FCC ID: DYY2110 2110 SSB Transceiver

 

06-02289-EN_1.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 9, 2004 8:41 AM Tactical Whip Antenna Quick Reference Card Requirements for deployment

3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip antenna, tape whip antenna, or knock-down whip antenna

earth lead with clip and plug, or counterpoise Antenna selection The tape and knock-down whip antennas are suitable for communication over short distances up to 100 km (60 mi), using frequencies of 330 MHz. Deploying a tactical whip antenna To ensure optimal transceiver performance and to avoid exposure to excessive electromagnetic fields, the antenna system must be deployed according to the instructions provided. To deploy a tactical whip antenna:

NOTE Select a site that is clear of overhead power lines and other electrical interference. WARNING Do not deploy or use the antenna if there is lightning in the area.

) 1 Straighten the antenna. 1 Switch off the transceiver. 1 Screw the antenna onto the antenna stud (

on the front panel. WARNING Take care not to cross the thread on the antenna stud. 1 Orient the antenna vertically for medium-

distance communication on any suitable frequency, or horizontally for short-distance communication on frequencies less than approximately 6 MHz. The 3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip antenna is suitable for communication over short to medium distances up to 500 km (300 mi), using frequencies of 230 MHz. 1 To use an earth lead:

Plug the earth lead into the earth terminal

) on the front panel.

Clip the other end of the earth lead to a large metal object, e.g. shed, vehicle, fence post. 1 To use a counterpoise:

Lay out the counterpoise, forming a cross.

Prop the transceiver against a suitable support in the centre of the counterpoise.

Plug the wire from the counterpoise into

) on the front panel. the earth terminal (

1 Switch on the transceiver. 1 Select a channel, then press PTT to tune. 1 Ensure that the internal antenna tuner is activated ( ATU/50 or ATU). WARNING WARNING High RF voltages are present during transmission and tuning. Do not touch the antenna during these activities. You should not transmit from your transceiver or tune the antenna unless people are standing beyond the safe working distance of 0.6 m

(2 ft) from the antenna.

' Codan Limited 2004 06-02289-EN Issue 1 06-02289-EN_1.fm Page 2 Tuesday, November 9, 2004 8:41 AM Packing up a tactical whip antenna To pack up a tactical whip antenna:

1 Switch off the transceiver. 1 Unplug the earth lead or counterpoise from the earth terminal, wind up, then stow. 1 Unscrew the antenna from the antenna stud. 1 Fold the antenna, secure with velcro (if fitted), then stow.

 

 

SSB Transceiver 2110 H F R A D I O C O M M U N I C A T I O N S G E T T I N G S T A R T E D G U I D E No part of this guide may be reproduced, transcribed, translated into any language or transmitted in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of Codan Limited.

' Copyright 2004 Codan Limited. Codan part number 15-04136-EN Issue 1, November 2004 CALM is a registered trademark of Codan Limited. Other brand, product, and company names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. The English version takes precedence over any translated versions. Table of contents CODAN Introduction 1 2 3 4 Overview of this guide . 1 Accessing the CD . 2 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Introduction. 4 European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive . 5 Electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices . 7 C-tick approval . 9 Care and safety information . 10 Your 2110 SSB Transceiver Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Charging a battery. 16 Connecting a battery to the transceiver. 19 Inserting the transceiver into a backpack . 20 Selecting an appropriate antenna . 21 The front panel Overview. 23 User controls . 24 Interface connectors . 25 Antennas . 25 Hot keys . 26 The channel screen . 28 Battery status indicator . 29 The handset. 31 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide i Table of contents 5 Getting started Switching on the transceiver . 34 Switching off the transceiver . 34 Setting up basics . 35 Selecting a channel . 36 Making a basic voice call . 37 Making a Selective call . 38 Scanning channels . 41 Switching scanning on or off . 41 Pausing scanning . 41 Troubleshooting 6 Appendix AEntering and editing text Editing a screen . 45 Entering text. 46 Changing between alpha and numerical characters . 47 Moving the cursor . 47 Inserting text . 47 Deleting text. 48 Saving text changes . 48 Appendix BUsing Quick Start Appendix CUsing the GPS receiver Appendix DTransceiver specifications Appendix EHF radio transmission Frequency, distance and time of day . 60 Antenna selection. 61 Channels and modes. 61 Networks and scanning . 62 Etiquette for the use of HF radio . 62 ii 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Table of contents Appendix FDefinitions Standards and icons . 65 Acronyms and abbreviations . 66 Glossary . 68 Units . 72 Unit multipliers. 72 About this issue. 73 Appendix GWarranties Index 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide iii Table of contents This page has been left blank intentionally. iv 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide List of figures CODAN Figure 1:

Figure 2:

Figure 3:

Figure 4:

Figure 5:

Figure 6:

Figure 7:

Typical front panel of a battery charger . 16 Transceiver with battery pack connected . 19 The front panel . 23 The channel screen in the Channel List . 28 Battery status indicator. 29 The handset. 31 The reflective properties of the ionosphere . 60 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide v List of figures This page has been left blank intentionally. vi 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide List of tables CODAN Table 1:

Table 2:

Table 3:

Table 4:

Table 5:

Table 6:

Table 7:

Table 8:

Earth symbol. 9 Battery storage times . 10 Selection guide for antennas. 21 Standard hot keys . 26 General troubleshooting . 44 Specifications . 57 Examples of channels and modes. 61 The phonetic alphabet. 63 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide vii List of tables This page has been left blank intentionally. viii 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Introduction CODAN Thank you for purchasing a Codan 2110 SSB Transceiver. With this great product and Codans supreme after-sales support, you can look forward to many years of clear and reliable HF communication. Please read this guide thoroughly and retain it for future reference. The 2110 SSB Transceiver is a self-contained, lightweight, waterproof and rugged communication system. Overview of this guide This guide provides instructions on how to get started with your 2110 SSB Transceiver. It assumes that you have limited knowledge of HF communication and of using an HF radio. This guide contains the following sections:

Section 1 2110 SSB Transceiver complianceprovides compliance information and safety notices, and information on specific care and safety requirements for your transceiver Your 2110 SSB Transceiverexplains briefly the components that make up your transceiver Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use explains briefly how to check that the transceiver and battery are ready for use The front paneldescribes the front panel and the function of items on the front panel Getting startedexplains how to use the basic operating features of your transceiver Troubleshootingprovides solutions for common operational issues for the 2110 SSB Transceiver Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Appendix A Entering and editing textexplains how to enter and edit text in editable screens 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 1 Introduction Appendix B Using Quick Startexplains how to use the Quick Start feature, if enabled Appendix C Using the GPS receiverexplains the information provided by the GPS receiver, if fitted Appendix D Transceiver specificationsprovides the common operational specifications of the transceiver Appendix E HF radio transmissiondescribes the medium of HF communication and how to use it effectively Appendix F Definitionsexplains the terms and abbreviations used in this guide Appendix G Warrantiesexplains the warranties associated with the components of the 2110 SSB Transceiver There is an index at the end of this guide and a CD containing extensive reference material. Accessing the CD To access the CD:

1 Place the CD in the CD drive of your computer. The CD will automatically launch the 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual as a fully text-

searchable HTML help file. 2 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 1 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Introduction (4) European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (5) Electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices (7) C-tick approval (9) Care and safety information (10) 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 3 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Introduction This section describes how to ensure the 2110 SSB Transceiver complies with the European Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC and the European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as called up in the European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC. The CE Declaration of Conformity and Expert Letter of Opinion for the product is listed on page 73, Associated documents. This document can be made available upon request to Codan or a Codan-authorised supplier. This section also contains the requirements for C-tick. 4 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive The 2110 SSB Transceiver has been tested and complies with the following standards and requirements (articles of the R&TTE Directive):

Article 3.1b: ETSI EN 301 489-1 Article 3.1b: ETSI EN 301 489-15 Article 3.2: Australian type approval according to AZ/NZS 4770:2003 Article 3.1a: assessed against ICNIRP requirements Article 3.1a: EN 60950

Compliance with these standards is deemed sufficient to fulfil the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Product marking and labelling Any equipment supplied by Codan that satisfies these 0191 requirements is identified by the markings on the model label of the product. 0191

, or Declaration of Conformity and Expert Letter of Opinion The CE Declaration of Conformity and Expert Letter of Opinion for this product is listed on page 73, Associated documents. This document can be made available upon request to Codan or a Codan-authorised supplier. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 5 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Protection of the radio spectrum CAUTION Most countries restrict the use of HF radio communications equipment to certain frequency bands and/or require such equipment to be licensed. It is the users responsibility to check the specific requirements with the appropriate communications authorities. If necessary, contact Codan for more information. 6 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices Radiation safety To ensure optimal transceiver performance and to avoid exposure to excessive electromagnetic fields, the antenna system must be installed according to the instructions provided. WARNING WARNING WARNING High voltages exist on the antenna during transmission and tuning. Do not touch the antenna during these activities. RF burns may result. Install the grounding system or counterpoise as directed to prevent RF burns from any metal part of the transceiver. You should not transmit from your transceiver or tune the antenna unless people are beyond the safe working distance of:

0.2 m (8 in) from a long wire, end-fed broadband, broadband dipole, or wire dipole antenna

0.6 m (2 ft) from any whip antenna Safe working distance is based on continuous exposure to CW type transmissions, as set out in the ICNIRP Exposure Guidelines 1998 for occupational exposure. Safe working distance can be reduced with normal voice communication. Electromagnetic compatibility To ensure compliance with the EMC Directive is maintained, you must:

1 Cover unused connectors with the protective caps supplied to prevent electrostatic discharge passing through your equipment. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 7 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Electrical safety To ensure compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive is maintained, you must deploy and use the 2110 SSB Transceiver and antennas in accordance with the instructions in the 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide, the Quick Reference Cards supplied with each antenna, and the 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual. When using equipment that is connected directly to the AC mains these precautions must be followed and checked before applying AC power to the unit:

1 Use the standard AC mains cable supplied. 1 Ensure the covers for the equipment are fitted correctly. The 3121 AC Battery Charger is double insulated and marked with

. CAUTION WARNING If it is necessary to remove the covers during service by a qualified electronics technician, they must be refitted correctly before using the equipment. The protective cover must always be fitted when the 3121 AC Battery Charger is connected to the AC mains. Batteries Battery cells are electrically live at all times and must be treated with extreme caution. They may supply high short-

circuit currents even if they appear to be damaged or inoperable. Batteries should be used to provide power to the transceiver only, using the supplied connectors. The batteries will not charge at temperatures higher than 40C. 8 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Earth symbol An antenna earth connection point is provided on the 2110 SSB Transceiver. The symbol shown in Table 1 is used to identify the earth on the equipment. Table 1: Earth symbol Symbol Meaning Antenna earth C-tick approval The 2110 SSB Transceiver meets the requirements of the Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications

(MF and HF Radiotelephone equipmentLand Mobile Services) Standard 2003 (AS/NZS 4770). 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 9 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Care and safety information Storage of batteries Codan recommends that batteries are fully charged prior to storage. The length of time that they can be stored before recharging is necessary is dependent on the type of battery and the average storage temperature. Table 2: Battery storage times Type NiMh SLA Storage time @ 20C

(70F) Storage time @ 30C

(85F) 12 months 15 months 6 months 10 months Disposal of batteries Batteries must be recycled. They should not be burnt or disposed of in landfill. Immersion of the transceiver in water The transceiver unit and battery pack are designed to be waterproof to IP68. The units can withstand immersion in 1 m

(3 ft) of water for up to 1 h. Prolonged immersion may cause damage to the units. If the units are immersed in water, drain any water from the front panel speaker and keypad, then wipe and air dry the connectors on the units prior to use or charging the battery. If the units are exposed to salt water, they should be washed with fresh water as soon as possible. WARNING Do not expose the connector on the battery pack to salt water. This will damage the connector. 10 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Deploying antennas WARNING Do not deploy the antenna at sites with overhead power cables. WARNING Do not deploy or use any antenna if there is lightning in the area. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 11 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance This page has been left blank intentionally. 12 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 2 Your 2110 SSB Transceiver CODAN The 2110 SSB Transceiver system has a range of accessories that are used in different situations. The following photographs may help you to identify the transceiver and its typical accessories. Transceiver with handset Battery pack Backpack Whip antenna Counterpoise Wire antenna/halyard Earth stake Balun Battery charger Coaxial cable Earth lead with clip and plug Configuration software and programming cable 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 13 Your 2110 SSB Transceiver This page has been left blank intentionally. 14 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 3 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Charging a battery (16) Connecting a battery to the transceiver (19) Inserting the transceiver into a backpack (20) Selecting an appropriate antenna (21) 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 15 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Charging a battery Before using your transceiver, you must ensure that the supplied battery is fully charged. You may use an ACDC or DCDC charger with the battery. The ACDC charger (Type 3121) uses a universal AC mains input of 90264 V AC. The DCDC battery charger (Type 3122) may be powered from any 1260 V DC source, for example, from a vehicle 12 V DC outlet, or from a 24 V vehicle battery. The Codan battery chargers are specially designed for low-

noise operation, so receiver performance remains optimal while charging the battery via the front panel. You can continue to use your transceiver during battery charging. CAUTION CAUTION Charging is recommended between 0 and 40C. The battery will not commence charging if the temperature is at or above 40C. If charging is already in progress, and the temperature rises to 50C, charging will be stopped automatically. To prevent damage to the battery, Codan recommends the use of the Codan battery chargers to charge the battery pack. Figure 1: Typical front panel of a battery charger 3121 AC Battery Charger INPUT OUTPUT power on

(green) charging

(orange, off when charging complete) WARNING The battery pack should be charged with the connector facing upward and the vents clear of obstructions so that any gas created during the charging process is released. 16 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use CAUTION Provide clear notification that charging is underway. Ensure there is adequate ventilation around the battery during charging. To charge a battery:

1 Do one of the following:

If the battery is attached to the transceiver, use cable 08-06215-001 to connect the output of the charger to the 19-way connector on the front panel of the transceiver.

If the battery is detached from the transceiver, use cable 08-06214-001 to connect the output of the charger to the 6-way connector on the top of the battery pack. 1 Connect the charger to an appropriate power source. If the transceiver is operational during charging, the battery status indicator on the screen will show that the battery is charging. When charging is complete, the battery status indicator will be full. NOTE It will take approximately 16 seconds for charging to start. Requirements for alternative chargers The Codan battery packs may be charged using alternative supplies, for example, solar panels or hand-crank generators. In this situation, the voltage level must not exceed 15.5 V and the current must be within 13 A. These chargers must be connected between pin B (charge in) and pin A (ground) on the connector on the battery pack. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 17 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Notes on charging batteries A battery will require 35 discharge/recharge cycles when new before it reaches its full capacity. In order to increase the battery service life, it is recommended that the battery is not fully discharged during each cycle. Full discharge should only be carried out periodically as follows:

Type NiMh SLA Full discharge Two full discharge/recharge cycles every 20 charge cycles One full discharge/recharge cycle every 20 charge cycles For the periodic full discharge cycle, run the battery down to zero capacity using the transceiver. The transceiver will switch off automatically when the battery is fully discharged. WARNING If you are using alternative means to discharge the battery, the battery voltage must not go below 10 V. WARNING An SLA battery must be charged immediately after discharge to prevent damage to the battery. 18 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Connecting a battery to the transceiver The battery is connected to the bottom of the transceiver. It is held in place by clips with locking key latches (see Figure 2). NOTE The battery connector on the base of the transceiver is on the same side of the transceiver as the antenna connectors on the front panel. Figure 2: Transceiver with battery pack connected transceiver clip key battery pack 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 19 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Inserting the transceiver into a backpack All backpacks come with adjustable straps that hold the transceiver firmly in position. Some backpacks have an internal mounting frame. To insert the transceiver into a backpack with an internal mounting frame:

1 Open the rear of the backpack to expose the mounting frame. 1 Push the transceiver between the foam mounts on the frame. 1 Secure the transceiver with the two adjustable straps. 1 Close the rear of the backpack. To insert the transceiver into the soft backpack:

1 Slide the transceiver into the backpack. 1 Secure the transceiver with the adjustable strap on the outside of the backpack. 20 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Selecting an appropriate antenna Use the following table as a guide to selecting an antenna that is appropriate for your communication requirements. Table 3: Selection guide for antennas Antenna Communication distance

(km) Effort to install Antenna performance 0100 100 500 up to 2000 up to 5000 Tape, Knock-down whip 3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip Long wire and adaptor End-fed broadband Broadband dipole Wire dipole

Minimum Adequate Maximum Superior 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 21 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use This page has been left blank intentionally. 22 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 4 The front panel CODAN Overview The front panel has three main areas: user controls, connectors and antennas, as shown in Figure 3. Figure 3: The front panel antennas user controls interface connectors TUNE 1 QZ FREE Rx 4 GHI 7 PRS EASI TALK CLAR 2ABC MODE DEF3 5 JKL SEC 8TUV VIEW 0 Tx PWR6 GPS 9 CALL LOGS infrared window internal speaker earth terminal location of internal GPS antenna 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 23 The front panel User controls The user control area comprises:

an LCD navigation keys (

volume controls (

soft function keys (F1, F2, F3) corresponding to the function displayed above the key on the front panel screen

) alphanumeric keys (09, *, #) emergency key (

) power key (

There are two ways to use the keys on the front panel. You can:

press a key, briefly hold a key for 2 seconds The Press

Hold Press

keys and to:

select the item on the active line in the list save changes answer yes to prompts to edit settings. to:

navigate up from settings to entries backspace over text remove messages on the screen cancel changes answer no to prompts 24 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide The front panel to go from any location to the home screen. If you Hold have entered text into a setting and want to discard the changes you made, hold

. The scroll keys and keys are the scroll keys. Use these keys to scroll The up or down through any list, to scroll left or right over text, and to increase or decrease a value. Interface connectors The interface connector area comprises:

) the 6-way handset connector (

the 19-way GPIO connector (

Antennas The antenna area comprises:

the antenna stud (

antenna adaptor the 50 connector (

antennas

) for whip antennas and the long wire

) for broadband and dipole 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 25 The front panel Hot keys Hot key F1 F2 F3 Hold MUTE TUNE CLAR MODE FREE Rx Tx PWR Hot keys enable you to perform a task quickly. The transceiver comes with some standard hot keys programmed; the keys are labelled with the corresponding task performed. You can also create your own hot keys (see the reference material on the enclosed CD). Table 4: Standard hot keys Function Pressing F1 performs the macro assigned to this soft function key. By default, MUTE is assigned to this key, so pressing F1 toggles mute on or off. Pressing F2 performs the macro assigned to this soft function key. By default, CALL is assigned to this key, so pressing F2 starts a call. Pressing F3 performs the macro assigned to this soft function key. By default, SCAN is assigned to this key, so pressing F3 switches off scanning, or if you were in a call, ends the call and switches scanning on. Holding MUTE toggles the front panel speaker on or off. Pressing TUNE displays the PTT tunes screen so you can manually tune the antenna. Pressing CLAR enables you to adjust the receive frequency to compensate for any frequency offset between your transceiver and the remote transceiver. Pressing MODE selects the next allowable mode programmed for the channel, usually USB or LSB. Pressing FREE Rx enters Free Tune mode in which you can adjust or enter a receive frequency. Pressing Tx PWR toggles the transmission power of the transceiver between Hi (25 W) and Lo (5 W). 26 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide The front panel Hot key V/S SEC GPS EASITALK VIEW Table 4: Standard hot keys (cont.) Function Pressing V/S toggles the mute type between Voice mute and Selcall mute. Pressing or holding SEC enters Secure mode, if the hardware option is fitted, and special firmware is programmed into the transceiver and enabled. Pressing GPS displays your current GPS position, if the hardware option is fitted and enabled. Pressing EASITALK toggles the DSP noise reduction algorithm on or off. Pressing VIEW toggles between the channel screen and the Address List. CALL LOGS Pressing CALL LOGS repeatedly steps through a number of call logs: Calls Out, Calls In, Last Heard, then back to the screen from which you began. In these logs, you can view the details of the calls or detected stations. The Last Heard log is only available if you have the MIL-STD-

188-141B ALE option installed.

(Emergency) Holding begins an automatic Emergency call transmission using call information contained in the Emergency entries in the Address List.

(Power)

+ 9

+ 0 Pressing the brightness settings. cycles the screen and keypad backlighting through Pressing screen contrast.

+ 9 enables you to change the default setting for the Pressing screen and keypad backlighting.

+ 0 enables you to change the default setting for the 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 27 The front panel The channel screen The channel screen is displayed when you press or VIEW. Figure 4: The channel screen in the Channel List mute type indicator

(V/S, highlighted when mute is on) Tx power indicator

(Hi/Lo) call type icon mode Rx freq (kHz) battery status indicator soft function keys signal strength indicator Rx/Tx indicator channel name Tx freq (kHz)

(not shown if Tx/Rx are the same) internal speaker icon (shown when speaker enabled) antenna selection icon

(internal 50 ohm

) When the transceiver is scanning, the call type icon is replaced by the scanning icon replaced by Scanning. and the channel information is 28 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Battery status indicator The front panel The channel screen displays a battery status indicator. The indicator graphically shows the:

state of charge state of health Figure 5: Battery status indicator State of charge State of health 32h 16h 16h 8h 100%

50%

100%

50%

100%

100%

50%

50%

State of charge The state of charge indicates graphically how much charge is remaining in the battery. The battery continuously monitors the current consumption of the transceiver and calculates the remaining hours of use assuming a Tx to Rx ratio of 1:9. State of health Rechargeable batteries have a limited lifetime and a limited number of times that they may be charged and discharged. Over time, the total amount of charge that a battery may hold decreases. The state of health indicates graphically how much charge a battery can still hold, relative to when it was new. A low state of health indicates that the battery may need replacing. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 29 The front panel NOTE When charging a new battery it may show a low state of health until it has been fully charged and discharged several times. 30 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide The handset The front panel The 2110 SSB Transceiver supports standard audio accessories using H-229 type connectors. The handset is a standard issue, lightweight, tactical H-250/U type, with built-

in earphone, noise-cancelling microphone, and PTT button. It is connected to the 6-way connector on the front panel of the transceiver. Figure 6: The handset PTT earphone microphone 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 31 The front panel This page has been left blank intentionally. 32 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 5 Getting started CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Switching on the transceiver (34) Setting up basics (35) Selecting a channel (36) Making a basic voice call (37) Making a Selective call (38) Scanning channels (41) WARNING You should not transmit from your transceiver or tune the antenna unless people are beyond the safe working distance of:

0.2 m (8 in) from a long wire, end-fed broadband, broadband dipole, or wire dipole antenna

0.6 m (2 ft) from any whip antenna 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 33 Getting started Switching on the transceiver NOTE Prior to operational use, you should connect an antenna to the transceiver (see page 21, Selecting an appropriate antenna, and the Quick Reference Card supplied with the antenna). To switch on the transceiver:

1 Press

. If you are prompted to enter a password, enter your user or administrator password, then press If you enter an incorrect password it is automatically erased. If you enter an incorrect password three times the transceiver automatically switches off. When the transceiver is switched on, it runs a self-test that checks the memory, hardware, LCD and keys. Switching off the transceiver To switch off the transceiver:

1 Hold

. The transceiver is switched off. 34 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Setting up basics Getting started NOTE Basic information for the transceiver, such as channels, self addresses, time and date, and enabling channels for scanning, should be set up by your system administrator using the NGT System Programmer. If Quick Start is enabled you can enter some of this information (see page 49, Using Quick Start). 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 35 Getting started Selecting a channel To select a channel:

1 Press VIEW until the channel screen is displayed. If scanning is on, press SCAN to switch it off. 1 Scroll through the channels in the list. Stop scrolling when the channel you want is displayed. The channel is selected. 1 If you want to change the sideband or IF filter settings, press MODE. If the mode does not change there is only one mode for the channel. NOTE If you have an automatic antenna fitted, press PTT to tune the antenna to the currently selected channel. 36 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Getting started Making a basic voice call To make a basic voice call:

1 Select the channel that you want to use (see page 36, Selecting a channel). 1 Hold down PTT then speak, releasing PTT when you have finished speaking. Muting the transceiver If you do not want to listen to on-air noise, you can mute the transceiver so that you will only hear voice traffic on the channel. To switch mute on or off:

1 Press MUTE. When the channel screen is displayed, the mute status is indicated by a V (Voice) or S (Selcall) at the top centre of the screen. If the letter is highlighted, mute is on. If the letter is not highlighted, mute is off. 1 Press V/S until V is displayed on the channel screen. The transceiver will remain muted until it detects voice traffic on the channel. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 37 Getting started Making a Selective call NOTE The call types available will depend on the options installed in your transceiver. To make a Selective call:

1 Press CALL. 1 Enter the address of the station you want to call, scroll to the type of call you want to make, then press CALL. Icon Used for... Testing the audible quality of a channel in a Codan Selcall network. Replacing LQA information for an ALE/CALM network (if you have the MIL-

STD-188-141B ALE option installed). Sending an emergency alert tone with a call. Requesting the location of a remote transceiver with a GPS receiver connected and enabled. Requesting diagnostic or configuration information from a remote transceiver. Sending a message to a remote transceiver. Sending a call to a radio/telephone interconnect unit, which connects the call to the public telephone network. Sending an emergency call to an RFDS base station (Australia only). Call type Channel Test Emergency Get Position Get Status Message Phone RFDS Emgcy 38 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Getting started Call type Selective Send Position Icon Used for... Sending a selective call to a remote transceiver. Sending your GPS position to a remote transceiver. A GPS receiver must be fitted and enabled in your transceiver. 1 If you are prompted for details about the call, use the information in the following table to enter them, then press CALL. If this prompt is displayed... Do this... Select network

select the network in which you want to make the call My address?

Select chan/mode

select or enter the self address from which you want to send the call In an ALE/CALM network:

select <auto> if you want the transceiver to select the best channel/mode for the call, starting with the channel on which the most recent successful link was established, or

select the channel/mode you want to use to make the call, or

if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, to select the best channel/mode combination from press the LQA database In a Codan Selcall network:

select the channel/mode you want to use to make the call and check that it is clear of voice and data traffic NOTE To abort the call before a connection to the other station is made, press PTT. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 39 Getting started 1 If you made the call in:

an ALE/CALM network, wait until a message informs you that the call has been successful (this means your call has been automatically answered by the other station)

a Codan Selcall network, wait until a message informs you that the call has been sent and listen for audible beeps transmitted from the other station 1 Hold down PTT then speak. Release PTT when you have finished speaking. NOTE If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed and made the call using a special ALE address syntax, you will be able to send data within the established link by pressing CALL and following the prompts. 1 To end the call, press SCAN. If the transceiver was scanning prior to the call it resumes scanning. 40 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Scanning channels Getting started Before you can switch scanning on, you need to allocate some channels to be scanned. If you have Quick Start enabled you can create a scan list from channels programmed into the transceiver (see page 49, Using Quick Start). If this feature is disabled, your system administrator will allocate some channels to a network, then enable scanning of this network. Switching scanning on or off To switch scanning on or off:

1 Press SCAN. Scanning is toggled on or off. NOTE SCAN is also used to end a call. If the transceiver was scanning before the call was sent or received, it resumes scanning. If the transceiver was not scanning before the call, press SCAN to switch scanning on. When scanning is switched on, mute is also switched on. You cannot use PTT while the transceiver is scanning. Pausing scanning To pause scanning:

1 Do one of the following:

to pause scanning on the current channel/mode, press

to pause scanning and scroll to another channel/mode, press or 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 41 Getting started The channel/modes through which you can scroll are those in the networks that were being scanned. They are not listed alphabetically but in the order in which they were being scanned. If you do not press a key within 30 seconds the transceiver automatically resumes scanning. 1 While scanning is paused, do one or more of the following:

to converse, hold down PTT

to resume scanning immediately, press 42 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 6 Troubleshooting CODAN Below is a checklist for basic troubleshooting. Check that:

all connectors are dry and free of dirt all connections are sound the battery is connected to the transceiver and has some charge the selected antenna is appropriate for the distance over which you want to communicate the antenna is deployed correctly, oriented in a suitable direction, and connected to the transceiver the grounding system is adequate as per instructions provided with the antenna the antenna selection icon on the front panel screen matches the type of antenna you are using

If required, restart your transceiver to invoke self-testing. The self-test checks the memory, hardware, LCD and keys. If a serious fault is reported, contact your Codan representative. Table 5 contains some general tips for troubleshooting your transceiver. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 43 Troubleshooting Table 5: General troubleshooting Problem Solution The sound from the front panel speaker is muffled Communications are not clear Drain any moisture from the front panel of the transceiver by turning it upside down. Try another channel. Press PTT. If you are using a whip or long wire antenna, check that the antenna selection icon is ATU or ATU/50 (see Figure 4 on page 28). If you are communicating over a short distance, try laying the whip horizontally for near vertical incident skywave operation. Change to a long wire antenna. If communications are still not clear, change to a dipole or broadband antenna and check that the antenna selection icon is 50 or ATU/50 (see Figure 4 on page 28). There are no supports for a wire antenna available Lay the antenna wire on the ground. Lay the earth lead or counterpoise in the opposite direction. I get a burn from the handset when I press PTT The transceiver is not adequately earthed. Attach an earth lead or counterpoise as per the instructions provided with the antenna. GPS is not working Ensure that the front panel of the transceiver, and hence the GPS antenna, is facing the sky so that it can receive signals from satellites. 44 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Appendix AEntering and editing text CODAN Editing a screen To gain access to an editable screen:

1 Hold

. A question mark is displayed at the end of the heading to show that you can now enter and/or edit text in the setting. NOTE If text has already been entered on the line it is highlighted. 1 Do one of the following:

To use the text displayed, press

To enter new text, start typing. When you have entered

. the text, press

To edit the text displayed, press

. The cursor is placed at the end of the line so you can backspace over characters and/or enter new text. When the text is correct, press

. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 45 Entering and editing text Entering text To enter text in an editable screen:

1 To enter one of the letters on a key, press the key repeatedly until the letter is displayed. NOTE You can also hold the key until the letter you want is displayed, then release the key. 1 To enter another letter on the same key, wait until the cursor moves to the next space... ..then press the key repeatedly until the letter you want is displayed. 1 To enter a letter on another key, press the key for the letter. You do not need to wait until the cursor moves to the next space. 46 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Entering and editing text Changing between alpha and numerical characters To change between upper-case and lower-case letters and numbers in an editable screen:

1 Press # to change the character/case indicator at the bottom right of the screen from A to a to #. NOTE When you are prompted to enter a call address, the characters that you can enter are determined by the call systems installed in the transceiver. Moving the cursor To move the cursor across the text:

1 Use to move the cursor left and right and respectively. Inserting text To insert text:

1 Use and to move the cursor to the point where you want to insert text (or a space), then press the required character key. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 47 Entering and editing text NOTE NOTE Deleting text If you want to insert a space, make sure that A or a is displayed at the bottom right of the screen before you press 0 otherwise you will enter a zero. You can enter a special character using *, or with and

. To delete text:

1 Use and to move the cursor one position to the right of the character that you want to delete, then press

. Saving text changes To save the changes you have made:

1 Press

. The question mark is removed from the heading. If you do not want to save the text, hold changes. to discard the 48 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Appendix BUsing Quick Start CODAN Quick Start provides simple methods to configure your transceiver to a basic operating state. Quick Start will be available if your transceiver contains only one station self address and network names from this default list:

*Voice

*Selcall

*CALM

!Default NOTE

, you should see the Quick When you hold Start entries, for example, Add/Edit channel, Set scan list etc. If these entries are not displayed, then Quick Start is not available to you. Quick Start is not available in countries that do not permit programming of transmit frequencies using the front panel, for example, the United States of America and Australia. For detailed information on programming your transceiver without Quick Start see the reference material on the enclosed CD. Opening and closing Quick Start To open Quick Start:

1 Hold

. To close Quick Start:

1 Press or hold

. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 49 Using Quick Start Adding/Editing a channel To add or edit a channel:

1 Open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Add/Edit channel, then press 1 Enter the name of the channel that you want to use, then

. press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 45, Entering and editing text. If you want to use an existing channel, scroll to the channel, then press

. 1 Enter the receive frequency in kilohertz, then press

. NOTE You can enter the frequency to three decimal places. Press* to enter a decimal point, then continue with entering the frequency. 1 Enter the transmit frequency in kilohertz, then press 1 Scroll to the mode combination you want to use, then

. press The transceiver will return to Quick Start. 1 If you want to add more channels to your transceiver, scroll to Add/Edit channel and repeat this process. 1 Close Quick Start, if required. NOTE If you want to make or receive calls on this new channel, you must add it to your scan list. 50 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Using Quick Start Setting up a scan list To set up a scan list:

1 Open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Set scan list, then press

. The first channel in the transceiver is displayed. 1 If you want to add this channel to the scan list, press

. If you do not want to add this channel to the scan list, press When all the channels have been viewed or you have added 20 channels to your scan list, the transceiver will return to Quick Start. If you do not want to scroll through all the channels in your scan list, hold to return to Quick Start. 1 Close Quick Start, if required. CAUTION Each time you enter Set scan list, the resulting scan list will overwrite the existing scan list. Setting the time and date To set the time and date:

1 Open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Set time/date, then press

. The display will appear with a line under the day of the month. 1 Use or to change the current setting to the correct value, then press The line will appear under the month. 1 Repeat the previous step until you have made all of the changes to the time and date. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 51 Using Quick Start When all the changes have been made, the transceiver will return to Quick Start. 1 Close Quick Start, if required. Setting your station self address NOTE When Quick Start is available, any self address that you enter using this method will replace the previous self address. If you want to enter more than one self address, and hence disable the Quick Start features, see the reference material on the enclosed CD. To set your station self address:

1 Open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Set my address, then press 1 Enter your station self address (maximum of 6 numeric digits for Codan Selcall, or 15 upper-case/numeric digits if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed), then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 45, Entering and editing text. 1 Close Quick Start, if required. 52 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Using Quick Start Adding/Editing an entry in the Address List or Call Book To add or edit an address that you call frequently:

1 Open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Address/CallBk, then press 1 Enter the name of the station or person that you want to to select an existing entry, and

. add to the list, or use then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 45, Entering and editing text. 1 Scroll to the type of call that you want to make, enter the station address that you want to call, then press

. 1 If you selected Message? or No call type, enter the message, then press If you do not want to select a message, press

. 1 Scroll to the call system that you want to use to make the call, then press

. 1 If you selected Phone? or No call type, select

<blank> for the phone link that you want to use, then press When all the changes have been made to the call address, the transceiver will return to Quick Start. 1 If you want to add more call addresses to your Address List or Call Book, scroll to Address/CallBk and repeat this process. 1 Close Quick Start, if required. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 53 Using Quick Start Deleting an entry To delete addresses, channels or phone links:

1 Open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Delete..., then press 1 Scroll to the list from which you want to delete an item,

. then press

. 1 Scroll to the item you want to delete, then press

. NOTE If you delete a channel from the Channel List, it is deleted automatically from the scan list. 1 Close Quick Start, if required. 54 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Appendix CUsing the GPS receiver CODAN The GPS antenna is located behind the front panel of the transceiver (see Figure 3 on page 23). In order to obtain reliable and accurate GPS information, you should ensure that the front panel of the transceiver is pointed toward the sky and is not shadowed by overhead obstructions. To access GPS information:

1 Press GPS to see the GPS screen. To calculate distance and bearing to another transceiver:

1 Go to an Address List or Call Log entry containing a GPS position of the other station. The transceiver calculates the distance to the other transceiver and its bearing from true north with respect to your current location. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 55 Using the GPS receiver This page has been left blank intentionally. 56 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Appendix DTransceiver specifications CODAN Table 6: Specifications Item Specification Frequency range Transmit:

1.6 to 30 MHz Receive:

250 kHz to 30 MHz Channel capacity 400 channels Operating modes Single sideband (J3E) USB and LSB or switched USB/LSB, AM H3E (optional) Sensitivity Frequency:

0.25 to 30 MHz Frequency:

1.6 to 30 MHz RF amp off:

0.28 V PD, 118 dBm RF amp on:

0.14 V PD, 124 dBm For 10 dB SINAD with greater than 50 mW audio output Power output 25 W PEP 0.5 dB (high power) 5 W PEP 0.5 dB (low power) Antenna tuning times First time tuning 2.5 s typical Memory tuning 50 ms typical Approximate battery life 13 Ah NiMh:

8 Ah NiMh:

7 Ah SLA:

50 h 30 h 15 h Environment Ambient temperature:

30 to 60C Relative humidity:

95% non-condensing Derate upper ambient temperature by 1C per 330 m (360 yd) above sea level 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 57 Transceiver specifications Item Size Table 6: Specifications Specification 2110 including battery: 245 mm W 350 mm D 92 mm H

(9.8 in W 14.0 in D 3.7 in H) 2110 only:

245 mm W 250 mm D 92 mm H

(9.8 in W 10.0 in D 3.7 in H) Weight 2110 only:

2.5 kg (5.5 lb) 13 Ah NiMh battery 2.9 kg (6.4 lb) 8 Ah NiMh battery 2.1 kg (4.6 lb) 7 Ah SLA battery 3.2 kg (7.1 lb) Sealing IP68; immersion for 1 h at a depth of 1 m (3 ft) 58 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Appendix EHF radio transmission CODAN The HF band is the range of frequencies between 3 and 30 MHz. HF transceivers usually cover a frequency range of 1.6 to 30 MHz. Codan HF transceivers transmit on single sidebands. This reduces the power required to send HF signals and increases the number of channels available within the HF spectrum. HF transceivers are primarily used for long-range communication where distances of 3000 km (1800 mi) and more are possible. Obstructions such as buildings and mountains have little effect on long-range communication. HF radio can cover such large distances because of the way the transmitted radio signal propagates. HF radio waves propagate in three ways simultaneously:

ground wave direct wave sky wave Ground wave The ground wave travels near the ground for short distances, typically up to 100 km (60 mi) over land and 300 km (190 mi) over sea. The distance covered depends upon the operating frequency, transmission power, and type of terrain. Direct wave The direct wave travels in a direct line-of-sight from the transmitter to the receiver. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 59 HF radio transmission Sky wave The sky wave is the most important form of HF propagation. The radio wave is transmitted toward the sky and is reflected by the ionosphere to a distant receiver on earth. The reflective properties of the ionosphere change throughout the day, from season to season, and yearly. Figure 7: The reflective properties of the ionosphere ionosphere emitted HF wave reflected HF wave transmitter receiver Frequency, distance and time of day The extent to which a radio wave is reflected depends on the frequency that is used. If the frequency is too low, the signal is absorbed by the ionosphere. If the frequency is too high, the signal passes straight through the ionosphere. Within the HF band, low frequencies are generally considered to be in the range of 2 to 10 MHz. High frequencies are above 10 MHz. A frequency chosen for daytime transmission may not necessarily be suitable for night-time use. During the day, the layers of the ionosphere are thick. The layers absorb lower frequencies and reflect higher frequencies. At night, the ionosphere becomes very thin. The low frequencies that were absorbed during the day are reflected and the high frequencies that were reflected during the day pass straight through. Summer HF communications usually operate on higher frequencies than those used in winter over the same distance. 60 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide HF radio transmission Solar activity varies over an 11 year cycle. Higher frequencies need to be used during periods of peak activity. It is important to remember that you may need to change the frequency you are using to achieve the best communication. The general rules of thumb for HF communication are:

the higher the sun, the higher the frequency the further the distance, the higher the frequency Antenna selection The selection of an appropriate antenna is critical to the success of your communications (see page 21, Selecting an appropriate antenna). Channels and modes A channel is a name that is given to a frequency or a pair of frequencies, e.g. Channel 1, 4500 and Headquarters. The frequencies may be any frequencies within the HF range. Each channel has one or more modes associated with it. Each mode indicates a sideband that can be used with the channel, such as USB or LSB. When you make a call you need to specify the channel and the mode you want to use. Table 7 shows examples of channels and the information associated with them. Table 7: Examples of channels and modes Channel Receive frequency

(kHz) Transmit frequency

(kHz) Channel 1 4500 Headquarters 10600 4500 22758 10600

23000 Modes LSB, USB AM USB 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 61 HF radio transmission Networks and scanning A network is two or more stations that use the same frequencies and call system to communicate. The frequencies are allocated by a government authority and enable the network to maintain HF communication throughout the day and night. The call system is the method the network uses to make and receive calls. For example, in networks that use the Codan Selcall call system to make calls, the user enters the address of the station they want to call, then selects the channel/mode on which to make the call. In networks that use the ALE/CALM call system, the transceiver selects the best channel/mode for the call. The transceiver can be set to scan the channel/modes used by your network to detect incoming calls. It is recommended that when you are not using the transceiver to communicate you switch scanning on. This ensures that you can receive calls from stations in your network. Etiquette for the use of HF radio There is a standard procedure for communicating over HF radio. Before you begin transmitting, switch off scanning, select a channel, then press PTT on the handset to initiate tuning of the antenna. Listen to the channel that you are going to use and ensure that there is no voice or data communication taking place. You may need to wait until the channel is clear or select another channel. When you first establish communication with another station it is customary to state their call sign and then your own using the phonetic alphabet (see Table 8 on page 63). For example:

Alpha Bravo One, this is Alpha Bravo Two. Do you receive me? Over. 62 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide HF radio transmission In this example your call sign is AB2 and you are calling a station with the call sign AB1. A call sign is a group of letters and numbers issued by a government authority to identify a station. The phonetic alphabet is used to ensure that your call sign is understood. The word over is used to signify the end of your transmission. The transceiver may be set up to transmit a short beep when you release the PTT button on the handset. When your conversation with the other party is finished, the party that speaks last should say out. Swearing or foul language should not be usedheavy penalties can apply. Keep communication as short as possible. Table 8: The phonetic alphabet Word Alpha Bravo Charlie Delta Echo Foxtrot Golf Hotel India Juliet Kilo Lima Mike Letter N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Word November Oscar Papa Quebec Romeo Sierra Tango Uniform Victor Whiskey X-ray Yankee Zulu Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L M 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 63 HF radio transmission This page has been left blank intentionally. 64 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Appendix FDefinitions CODAN Standards and icons The following standards and icons are used in this guide:

This typeface Means... Italic a cross-reference or text requiring emphasis This icon Means...

NOTE CAUTION WARNING a step within a task the text provided next to this icon may be of interest to you proceed with caution as your actions may lead to loss of data, privacy or signal quality your actions may cause harm to yourself or the equipment 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 65 Definitions Acronyms and abbreviations This term Means... ALE AM BER automatic link establishment amplitude modulation bit error rate CALM Codan automated link management CW DC DSP ETSI GPIO GPS HF ID carrier wave direct current digital signal processor European Telecommunications Standards Institute general purpose input/output global positioning system high frequency identification ICNIRP International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection IF LBT LCD LED LSB LQA NiMh NSP intermediate frequency listen before transmit liquid crystal display light emitting diode lower sideband link quality analysis nickel metal hydride NGT system programmer 66 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Definitions This term Means... PA PC PTT RF R&TTE Rx SB SINAD SLA tcvr Tx USB V power amplifier personal computer press-to-talk radio frequency radio and telecommunications terminal equipment receive sideband

(signal + noise + distortion)-to-(noise +

distortion) ratio sealed lead acid transceiver transmit upper sideband firmware/software version 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 67 Definitions Glossary This term active line address Means... The line below the title of a list on the front panel screen. Items in the active line are selected by pressing

. The HF transceiver equivalent of a telephone number. Your station self address is used by other stations to call you, and it is sent when you make calls to identify you as the caller. It is sometimes referred to as an ID, a station ID, or a self ID. MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option An option that enables you to make ALE ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET and Wildcard calls, and perform LQA reporting and AMD messaging. call detect time The length of time during scanning that the transceiver pauses on each channel in order to detect an incoming call. It is the inverse of the scan rate. channel Channel Test call Frequencies programmed in the transceiver to transmit and receive signals on air. A call that enables you to test the quality of a channel. It is sometimes referred to as a Beacon call. Channel Test calls may be made in an ALE/CALM network to replace information in the LQA database, and to perform a manual sounding operation (if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed). Emergency call A call that enables you to trigger an emergency alarm at a specific station then speak to an operator there. frequency The number of cycles per second of a radio wave, usually expressed in kilohertz. 68 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Definitions This term Means... Get Position call A call that gets the GPS position of a specific station. Get Status call A call that gets diagnostic or configuration information about the transceiver at a specific station. front panel hot key The interface that is used to control the functions of the 2110 SSB Transceiver. It consists of a display, keypad and connectors for the handset, antenna, ancillary equipment, and earthing. A key on the front panel that is pre-

programmed with a macro that enables you to perform a task quickly. Last Heard Log A log of the last 100 on-air transmissions detected by the current station. The Last Heard Log is available if the MIL-

STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. listen before transmit LQA beacon If enabled, the automatic process that the transceiver uses to detect whether or not there is traffic on a channel and, when necessary, select another channel or inform the user that the channel is busy. A Channel Test call made in an ALE/CALM network using a Group Selective or NET address syntax. On completion of the beacon, the information collected replaces the information for the channel stored in the LQA database. It is sometimes referred to as an ALE beacon. The LQA beacon is available if the MIL-

STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 69 Definitions This term Means... macro A short set of instructions to automate a task you perform with the transceiver. When a macro is assigned to a key, the key becomes a hot key. manual sounding A Channel Test call made in an ALE/CALM network using the text SOUNDING as the call address. The station performs a sounding operation, which other stations use to update the information in their LQA database. Manual sounding is available if the MIL-

STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. Message call A call that enables you to send a message to a specific station. mode network Phone call PTT button A type of reception or transmission you can use with a channel, comprising a sideband and an IF filter. Two or more stations that use the same frequencies and call system to communicate. A call that enables you to connect to a public telephone network. Press-to-talk button, located on the left side of the handset. This button enables you to communicate during voice calls, switch mute off, cancel voice calls prior to the point where voice can be transmitted, cancel calls where data is being transmitted, and exit out of editable screens without saving changes. revertive A signal sent by a station in response to a call. 70 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Definitions This term Means... transceiver unit The device that modulates audio signals onto radio frequencies that can be transmitted on air, and that demodulates the radio frequencies it receives into audio signals. Selective call A call that enables you to contact a specific station then speak to an operator. Send Position call A call that sends your GPS position to a specific station. sideband station A band of frequencies that is above or below a modulated carrier frequency. A point of communication consisting of a transceiver, a battery, an antenna, ancillary equipment, and appropriate connecting cables. transceiver A transceiver unit with speaker, handset, and battery. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 71 Definitions Units NOTE Imperial dimensions are in United States Customary Units. Measurement Unit Length Frequency Time Voltage Weight metre

(inch/feet/yard/

mile) hertz second hour volt gram

(pound) Abbreviation m

(in/ft/yd/mi) Hz s h V g

(lb) Unit multipliers NOTE Unit M k m Units are expressed in accordance with ISO 1000:1992 SI units and recommendations for the use of their multiples and of certain other units. Name mega kilo milli Multiplier 1000000 1000 0.001 72 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Definitions About this issue This is the first issue of the 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide. Associated documents This guide is one of a series of documents associated with the 2110 SSB Transceiver. The other documents are:

2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual (Codan part number 15-04135-EN) supplied on the CD inside the back cover of this guide 2110 SSB Transceiver Technical Service Manual (Codan part number 15-02071-EN) 2110 SSB Transceiver Repair Guide (Codan part number 15-04139-EN) Declaration of Conformity for the 2110 SSB Transceiver

(Codan part number 19-40157)

2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 73 Definitions This page has been left blank intentionally. 74 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Appendix GWarranties CODAN Codans warranty statement is provided on the International Product Warranty Card (Codan part number 12-50144). This statement sets out standard use and misuse under the terms of the warranty. The following warranties are supplied with the 2110 SSB Transceiver and accessories:

Item 2110 SSB Transceiver Warranty period 3 years ex-factory NiMh battery pack 3 years ex-factory SLA battery pack 1 year ex-factory Battery chargers 3 years ex-factory Antennas Backpacks 1 year ex-factory 1 year ex-factory NOTE If the transceiver or battery pack are opened then care must be taken when re-assembling to ensure that water tight seals retain integrity. Inspect all gaskets prior to closing and replace any that appear damaged. Original screws must be used. Failure to do so may void a warranty claim associated with moisture ingress. Replacement gaskets and screws are available as spares from your Codan representative. 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide 75 Warranties This page has been left blank intentionally. 76 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Index A Address List adding/editing entries 53 calling from 38 alternative charger requirements 17 B battery discharge regime 18 battery storage 10 C call sign 62 call systems ALE/CALM 62 Codan Selcall 62 calls from Address List 38 channel screen 28 channels definition 61 manual selection 36 compliance C-tick approval 9 electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices 7 earth symbol 9 electrical safety 8 electromagnetic compatibility 7 protection of the radio spectrum 6 European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 5 C-tick approval 9 D deleting entries 54 direct wave 59 discharge regime battery 18 CODAN E electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices compliance earth symbol 9 electrical safety 8 electromagnetic compatibility 7 protection of the radio spectrum 6 entering and editing text changing between alpha and numerical characters 47 deleting text 48 editing a screen 45 entering special characters 48 entering text 46 inserting text 47 moving the cursor 47 saving text changes 48 European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive compliance 5 F frequency selection depending on distance and time of day 60 front panel keys 23 G ground wave 59 H handset 31 HF radio transmission 59 M modes 36, 61 N networks 62 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide Index-1 Index P password entering 34 phonetic alphabet 63 power on/off 34 Q Quick Start 49 adding/editing a channel 50 adding/editing an entry in the Address List or Call Book 53 deleting an entry 54 opening and closing 49 setting the time and date 51 setting up a scan list 51 setting your station self address 52 S safety radiation 7 scan rate, see call detect time 68 scanning channels 41, 62 pausing channel scanning 41 selecting an item in a list 24 channel 36 sky wave 60 storage battery 10 W wave direct 59 ground 59 sky 60 Index-2 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide www.codan.com.au Head Office Codan Limited ABN 77 007 590 605 81 Graves Street Newton SA 5074 AUSTRALIA Telephone +61 8 8305 0311 Facsimile +61 8 8305 0411 asiasales@codan.com.au Codan (UK) Ltd Gostrey House Union Road Farnham Surrey GU9 7PT UNITED KINGDOM Telephone +44 1252 717 272 Facsimile +44 1252 717 337 uksales@codan.com.au Codan US, Inc. 8430 Kao Circle Manassas VA 20110 USA Telephone +1 703 361 2721 Facsimile +1 703 361 3812 ussales@codan.com.au Codan Limited ABN 77 007 590 605 105 Factory Road Oxley Qld 4075 AUSTRALIA Telephone +61 7 3716 6333 Facsimile +61 7 3716 6350

 

 

SSB Transceiver 2110 H F R A D I O C O M M U N I C A T I O N S R E F E R E N C E M A N U A L R E F E R E N C E M A N U A L No part of this reference manual may be reproduced, transcribed, translated into any language or transmitted in any form whatsoever without the prior written consent of Codan Limited.

' Copyright 2004 Codan Limited. Codan part number 15-04135-EN Issue 1, November 2004 CALM is a registered trademark of Codan Limited. Other brand, product, and company names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. The English version takes precedence over any translated versions. Table of contents 1 About this manual CODAN Standards and icons . 3 Definitions . 4 Acronyms and abbreviations . 4 Glossary . 6 Units. 10 Unit multipliers . 10 About this issue . 11 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Introduction . 14 European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive. 15 Electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices . 16 C-tick approval . 18 Care and safety information . 19 2 3 HF radio transmission HF radio transmission. 22 Frequency, distance and time of day . 23 Channels and modes . 23 Networks and scanning . 24 Etiquette for the use of HF radio . 25 4 The 2110 SSB Transceiver The front panel . 28 User controls . 28 Interface connectors. 29 Antennas . 29 Hot keys . 30 Handset . 32 5 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Charging a battery . 34 Connecting a battery to the transceiver . 36 Inserting the transceiver into a backpack . 36 Selecting an appropriate antenna . 37 Troubleshooting the transceiver . 41 Testing the installation . 42 Voltage standing wave ratio . 42 On-air testing . 43 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual i Table of contents 6 Operating the transceiver Switching on the transceiver . 46 The front panel screen . 47 The channel screen . 48 Battery status indicator . 50 External power supply indicator . 51 Selecting a channel . 51 Entering and editing text . 52 The editable screens . 52 Editing a screen. 53 Quick Start. 57 Muting the transceiver. 61 Scanning channels . 62 Using the microphone . 63 Finding words and values . 64 Setting the basics . 67 Setting the time and date. 67 Displaying the local time and date . 69 Entering your station self address. 69 Changing the screen contrast . 74 Changing the screen brightness . 74 Using hot keys . 75 Tuning the antenna . 76 Automatic tuning . 76 Manual tuning. 77 Using the clarifier . 78 Reducing background noise with Easitalk. 79 Using the voice encryptor . 80 Using the voice encryptor . 80 Setting up the voice encryptor . 84 7 Using lists The Main Menu . 88 Selecting a list . 90 The List Manager. 91 Using the List Manager. 91 Entries in the List Manager. 92 Setting a marker. 94 Setting the home screen. 95 Changing a setting in the Control List. 96 Making changes to all other lists . 97 Hiding and showing settings . 101 ii 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table of contents Grouping and ungrouping entries. 103 Restricting access to information . 108 Logging into admin level . 110 Displaying full and normal view . 112 Hiding and showing information . 113 Locking and unlocking information . 115 8 The Channel List About channels . 118 Settings in the Channel List . 118 Programming the Channel List. 119 9 The Network List About networks . 122 Settings in the Network List . 123 Special network names. 127 Programming the Network List . 128 10 The NET List About NETs . 132 Settings in the NET List . 134 Programming the NET List . 138 11 The Phone Link List About phone links. 142 Settings in the Phone Link List . 142 Programming the Phone Link List . 143 12 The Address List About the Address List. 146 Settings in the Address List . 147 Setting up the emergency key. 150 Programming the Address List. 154 13 Making and receiving calls Calls you can make and receive . 158 Special ALE address syntaxes . 158 Summary of the special ALE address syntaxes. 164 Call types . 165 Group calls in a Codan Selcall network. 170 Special AMD messaging features . 171 Recognised variable expansion . 172 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual iii Table of contents Making a call . 173 Listen Before Transmit Mode. 173 Testing the quality of a channel in a Codan Selcall network . 174 Replacing LQA information for all channels in an ALE/CALM network . 175 Making a manual sounding operation in an ALE/CALM network . 177 Selecting the best channel in an ALE/CALM network . 178 Other ways to make calls . 179 Calling methods . 181 The Calls Out Log. 187 Receiving a call . 190 The Calls In Log . 192 Detecting transmissions from other stations . 196 14 The Control List Entries in the Control List . 200 ALE entries . 209 Auto Resume entries . 215 Devices entry . 216 Accessing lists from the Devices entry. 220 GPS Screen entry. 222 LQA Screen entry . 224 Messages entry . 225 15 The Keypad List 16 The Mode List 17 Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode Using the transceiver in free tune . 232 Using the transceiver in Amateur Mode . 235 18 Hot keys About hot keys. 238 Full-time and part-time hot keys . 238 Assigning several macros to one key . 239 Automating several tasks with one macro. 239 Troubleshooting macros . 239 Storing macros. 240 Ideas for creating macros. 240 Creating a macro and assigning it to a hot key . 241 Copying a macro . 244 Moving a macro. 245 Renaming a macro. 246 iv 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Deleting a macro. 246 Creating a macro to perform two or more tasks. 247 Special macros . 249 19 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table of contents About CICS . 252 Using CICS. 252 Setting up CICS . 258 Terms used in CICS and the 2110 SSB Transceiver . 259 CICS commands. 260 alebeacon command. 261 alecall command . 262 aletelcall command . 263 amd command . 264 beacon command . 264 call command. 265 chan command . 266 echo command . 266 freq command . 267 gpsbeacon command . 268 gpsposition command . 269 hangup command. 269 help command . 270 lbt command . 270 link command . 270 lock command . 271 lqa command . 272 mode command . 273 pagecall command . 274 prompt command . 275 ptt command . 276 scan command . 277 secure command . 278 selbeacon command. 279 selcall command . 280 selfid command . 280 set command . 281 sideband command . 282 sound command . 283 statusack command . 284 statuscall command . 284 statustime command . 285 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual v Table of contents telcall command . 286 ver command. 286 Summary of command syntax . 287 CICS response messages . 291 CICS error messages . 295 20 Connectors Front panel. 302 Bottom panel . 306 Battery pack. 307 21 System messages 22 Accessories and hardware options 23 Specifications Accessories . 325 Appendix AHot key examples Appendix BGet Status calls Appendix CForgotten passwords Appendix DLimiting user access Introduction . 340 Syntax for the Message 10 entry . 340 Activating configuration commands in the Message 10 entry . 341 Restricting access to the List Manager . 341 Restricting access to admin level. 342 Restricting access to call types . 342 Enabling the automatic removal of the incoming call pop-up. 343 Restricting access to holding CALL . 343 Restricting access to Voice Encryptor features . 344 Index vi 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual List of figures CODAN Figure 1:

Figure 2:

Figure 3:

Figure 4:

Figure 5:

Figure 6:

Figure 7:

Figure 8:

Figure 9:

Figure 10:

Figure 11:

Figure 12:

Figure 13:

Figure 14:

Figure 15:

Figure 16:

Figure 17:

Figure 18:

Figure 19:

Figure 20:

Figure 21:

Figure 22:

Figure 23:

Figure 24:

Figure 25:

Figure 26:

Figure 27:

Figure 28:

Figure 29:

Figure 30:

Figure 31:

Figure 32:

Figure 33:

Figure 34:

Figure 35:

Figure 36:

Figure 37:

Figure 38:

Figure 39:

The reflective properties of the ionosphere . 22 The 2110 SSB Transceiver . 27 The front panel . 28 The handset . 32 Typical front panel of a battery charger . 34 Transceiver with battery pack connected . 36 The front panel screen. 47 The front panel screen displaying a value. 47 The channel screen in the Channel List . 48 The scanning screen . 49 Battery status indicator . 50 External power supply indicator . 51 Editable screen showing upper-case text entry. 52 Editable screen showing lower-case text entry. 52 Editable screen showing numeric text entry . 52 Editable screen showing slider . 53 The contents of the Main Menu . 88 Examples of entries, settings and values. 89 The Address List with settings shown . 101 The Address List with settings hidden . 101 Ungrouped entries in a list . 103 Grouped entries in a list, level one . 103 Grouped entries in a list, levels one and two . 103 Ungrouped and grouped entries . 104 Locking and hiding grouped entries . 107 Full view . 112 An example of information stored in the Network List . 122 An example of information stored in the NET List . 133 The front panel screen during a chain call . 152 LQA screen showing the most recent response . 175 The Calls Out Log showing a Selective call made . 187 The Calls Out Log showing a Message call made . 187 The Calls Out Log showing a NET call made . 188 An incoming call screen for a Selective call. 191 An incoming call screen for a Message call . 191 An incoming call screen for a NET call . 192 The Calls In Log showing a Selective call received. 193 The Calls In Log showing a Message call received . 193 The Calls In Log showing a Get Status call received . 193 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual vii List of figures Figure 40:

Figure 41:

Figure 42:

Figure 43:

Figure 44:

Figure 45:

Figure 46:

Figure 47:

Figure 48:

Figure 49:

Figure 50:

Figure 51:

Figure 52:

Figure 53:

The Calls In Log showing a NET call received. 193 The Last Heard Log . 196 The Devices entry in the Control List . 216 Lists as they are displayed in the Main Menu and under the Devices entry in the Control List . 220 The GPS Screen entry in the Control List . 222 The LQA Screen entry in the Control List. 224 Using a hot key to which several macros have been assigned. 239 Front panel of the transceiver unit . 302 Front view of the handset connector . 303 Front view of the 19-way GPIO connector . 304 Bottom panel of the transceiver unit . 306 Front view of the battery connector on the transceiver unit . 306 Top panel of the battery pack. 307 Front view of the battery connector on the battery pack . 307 viii 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual List of tables CODAN Table 1:

Table 2:

Table 3:

Table 4:

Table 5:

Table 6:

Table 7:

Table 8:

Table 9:

Table 10:

Table 11:

Table 12:

Table 13:

Table 14:

Table 15:

Table 16:

Table 17:

Table 18:

Table 19:

Table 20:

Table 21:

Table 22:

Table 23:

Table 24:

Table 25:

Table 26:

Table 27:

Table 28:

Table 29:

Table 30:

Table 31:

Table 32:

Table 33:

Table 34:

Table 35:

Table 36:

Table 37:

Table 38:

Earth symbol . 17 Battery storage times. 19 Examples of channels and modes . 23 The phonetic alphabet. 26 Standard hot keys . 30 Selection guide for antennas . 37 Advantages and limitations of a vertical whip antenna . 38 Advantages and limitations of a long wire antenna and adaptor . 39 Advantages and limitations of a end-fed broadband antenna . 39 Advantages and limitations of a broadband dipole antenna . 40 Advantages and limitations of a wire dipole antenna . 40 General troubleshooting . 41 List Manager entries and their functions . 92 Restricting access to information at user and admin levels . 109 Hiding items at user and admin levels . 113 Locking items at user and admin levels . 115 Call icons for Selective calls made or received using a special ALE address syntax . 158 Call types and icons . 166 Special AMD messaging syntax . 171 Recognised variables and their associated information . 172 Call types and alert tones . 190 Entries in the Control List. 200 Types of readings on the GPS screen . 222 Entries in the Keypad List. 227 Examples of modes. 229 Amateur bands in the 2110 SSB Transceiver . 235 Full-time and part-time hot keys. 238 Macro options . 242 Macros assigned to the Special entry in the Keypad List . 250 Editing keys used in CICS . 253 Variable expansion in a command . 256 CICS commands and the equivalent 2110 SSB Transceiver terms . 259 CICS commands and their functions . 260 Variations in message length . 274 Summary of CICS command syntax. 287 CICS response messages. 291 CICS error messages. 295 Pinouts of the handset connector . 303 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual ix List of tables Table 39:

Table 40:

Table 41:

Table 42:

Table 43:

Table 44:

Table 45:

Table 46:

Table 47:

Table 48:

Table 49:

Table 50:

Pinouts of the 19-way GPIO connector . 304 Pinouts of the battery connector on the transceiver unit . 306 Pinouts of the battery connector on the battery pack. 307 System messages . 309 List of accessories and hardware options. 321 Specifications for the 2110 SSB Transceiver . 323 Physical specifications of accessories . 325 Diagnostic information from a Get Status call made to a Codan transceiver . 335 Configuration information from a Get Status call made to a Codan transceiver. 336 Codes for restricting access to the List Manager. 341 Codes for restricting access to call types . 342 Codes for restricting access to Voice Encryptor features . 344 x 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 1 About this manual CODAN This reference manual provides an overview of the 2110 SSB Transceiver, how to deploy the antenna system, how to operate it, and how to perform advanced setup procedures. This manual is for system administrators who set up and maintain HF communication networks. This manual contains:

Section 1 About this manualexplains the terms and abbreviations used in this Section 2 manual 2110 SSB Transceiver compliancecompliance information and safety notices Section 3 HF radio transmissionprovides an overview of HF communication The 2110 SSB Transceiverexplains the transceivers components, Section 4 standard features and options Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for useexplains how to charge and install a battery, insert the transceiver into a backpack, and select an antenna Section 5 Section 6 Operating the transceiverexplains how to use the transceiver, set your station self address, and set the time and date Section 7 Using listsexplains the contents of the Main Menu, how to use lists, and Section 8 Section 9 how to manage them using the List Manager The Channel Listexplains the settings in the Channel List and how to program a channel The Network Listexplains the settings in the Network List and how to program a network Section 10 The NET Listexplains the settings in the NET List and how to program a NET Section 11 The Phone Link Listexplains the settings in the Phone Link List and how to program a phone link Section 12 The Address Listexplains the settings in the Address List and how to program the Address List Section 13 Making and receiving callsexplains how to make and receive calls Section 14 The Control Listexplains the contents of the Control List Section 15 The Keypad Listexplains the Keypad List Section 16 The Mode Listexplains the Mode List Section 17 Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Modeexplains how to use the transceiver in free tune Section 18 Hot keysexplains how to set up, manage and use hot keys Section 19 Operating the transceiver from a computerexplains how to operate the transceiver from a computer using CICS Section 20 Connectorsexplains the connectors on the 2110 SSB Transceiver Section 21 System messagesexplains the system messages that may be displayed on the front panel screen 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 1 About this manual Section 22 Accessories and hardware optionslists the accessories and hardware options available for the 2110 SSB Transceiver Section 23 Specificationslists the specifications of the 2110 SSB Transceiver Appendix A Hot key examplesprovides examples of hot keys and how to create them Appendix B Get Status callsexplains the information you can retrieve from another transceiver by making a Get Status call to that transceiver Appendix C Forgotten passwordsexplains what to do if you have forgotten the password for the transceiver Appendix D Limiting user accessdescribes the Message 10 entries and how to use them There is an index at the end of this manual. 2 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Standards and icons The following standards and icons are used in this manual:

About this manual This typeface Means... Italic Bold command command

<variable>|

<variable>

command

[optional]

a cross-reference or text requiring emphasis a key on a computer keyboard a command that you can enter from a computer, for example, help a variable associated with a command that you enter using a computer, for example, prompt off|<text string>|time means that you may enter prompt off, prompt <text string> or prompt time the information following the command in [] brackets is optional This icon 1 NOTE CAUTION WARNING Means... a step within a task the text beside this icon may be of interest to you proceed with caution as your actions may lead to loss of data, privacy or signal quality your actions may cause harm to yourself or the equipment 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 3 About this manual Definitions Acronyms and abbreviations This term 4WD addr AGC ALC ALE AM AMD ASCII BER CALM CB CICS CR CTS DC DSP DTE DTR ESN ETSI GP GPIO GPS HF ICNIRP ID IF Means... four wheel drive address automatic gain control automatic level control automatic link establishment amplitude modulation automatic message display American standard code for information interchange bit error rate Codan automated link management citizen band computer interface command set carriage return clear to send direct current digital signal processor data terminal equipment data terminal ready electronic serial number European Telecommunications Standards Institute general purpose general purpose input/output global positioning system high frequency International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection identification intermediate frequency 4 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual About this manual Means... internal sales order listen before transmit liquid crystal display light emitting diode line feed link quality analysis lower sideband nickel metal hydride NGT system programmer over-the-air power amplifier personal computer peak envelope power peak to peak press-to-talk received radio frequency radio and telecommunications terminal equipment request to send receive sideband

(signal + noise + distortion)-to-(noise + distortion) ratio sealed lead acid standing wave ratio transceiver ALE keyword this is transmit program enable ALE keyword this was transmit transmit disabled transmit enabled transmit prohibited This term ISO LBT LCD LED LF LQA LSB NiMh NSP OTA PA PC PEP pp PTT rcvd RF R&TTE RTS Rx SB SINAD SLA SWR tcvr TIS TPE TWAS Tx TxD TxE TxP 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 5 About this manual Glossary This term USB UTC UV V This term address ALL call ANY call automatic gain control

(AGC) automatic level control (ALC) automatic tuning antenna Means... upper sideband universal time coordinated ultraviolet firmware/software version Means... The HF transceiver equivalent of a telephone number. Your station self address is used by other stations to call you, and it is sent when you make calls to identify you as the caller. It is sometimes referred to as an ID, a station ID, or a self ID. An ALE address syntax used to broadcast to any station that is tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network. The ALL call uses a special address syntax @?@ that ALE stations recognise. A selective ALL call addresses a subset of stations. A multiple selective ALL call addresses these subsets within the one call. The ALL address syntax may be used in Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position calls if the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option or MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. An ALE address syntax used to broadcast to any station that is tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network. The ANY call uses a special address syntax @@? that ALE stations recognise. A selective ANY call addresses a subset of stations. A multiple selective ANY call addresses these subsets within the one call. The ANY address syntax may be used in Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position calls if the MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option is installed. A process that automatically adjusts the gain with respect to the input signal to provide a constant output level. A process that automatically provides a constant output level as the input level varies. An antenna designed for use with multichannel transceivers. It uses a microcontrolled stepper motor to give continuous tuning over the operating frequency range of the antenna. 6 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual About this manual This term call detect time channel Channel Test call counterpoise Emergency call frequency Get Position call Get Status call Means... The length of time during scanning that the transceiver pauses on each channel in order to detect an incoming call. It is the inverse of the scan rate. Frequencies programmed in the transceiver to transmit and receive signals on air. A call that enables you to test the quality of a channel. It is sometimes referred to as a Beacon call. If you have the MIL-

STD-188-141B ALE option installed, Channel Test calls may be made in an ALE/CALM network to replace information in the LQA database, and to perform a manual sounding operation. A radial array or a grid network of metallic wires arranged horizontally around the base of an antenna to provide an effective earth plane. A call that enables you to trigger an emergency alert tone at a specific station then speak to an operator there. The number of cycles per second of a radio wave, usually expressed in kilohertz. A call that gets the GPS position of a specific station. A call that gets diagnostic information about the transceiver at a specific station. Group Selective call An ALE call that is sent to stations specifically addressed in the front panel hot key Last Heard Log call that are tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network. The Group Selective call may be used in Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position calls if the MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option is installed. The interface that is used to control the functions of the 2110 SSB Transceiver. It consists of a display, keypad and connectors for the handset, antenna and earthing. A key on the front panel that is pre-programmed with a macro that enables you to perform a task quickly. A log of the last 100 on-air transmissions detected by the current station. The information gathered from each transmission includes the self address of the heard station, the time/date of the transmission, and the channel/mode used for the transmission. The Last Heard Log is available if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 7 About this manual This term link listen before transmit

(LBT) LQA beacon macro manual sounding Message call mode NET call network Phone call Means... A link is established following a 3-way handshake process. Scanning is off and a timeout, set using the Cfg In Call Timeout entry in the Control List, will be active. With ALL calls and NET calls that are set to link immediately, the linking establishment process is 1-way. If enabled, the automatic process that the transceiver uses to detect whether or not there is traffic on a channel and, when necessary, select another channel or inform the user that the channel is busy. A Channel Test call made in an ALE/CALM network using a Group Selective or NET address syntax. The LQA beacon tests all channels within the network to determine the best channel according to local and remote BER and SINAD measurements. On completion of the beacon, the information collected replaces the information for the channel stored in the LQA database. It is sometimes referred to as an ALE beacon. The LQA beacon is available if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. A short set of instructions to automate a task you perform with the transceiver. When a macro is assigned to a key, the key becomes a hot key. A Channel Test call made in an ALE/CALM network using the text SOUNDING as the call address. The station performs a sounding operation, which other stations use to update the information in their LQA database. Manual sounding is available if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. A call that enables you to send a message to a specific station. A type of reception or transmission you can use with a channel, comprising a sideband and an IF filter. An ALE address syntax that is used to send a call from one station to other stations that have the NET programmed in the NET List. If these stations have their self address in the Member Address setting they are members of this NET. The NET address syntax may be used in Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position calls if the MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option is installed. Two or more stations that use the same frequencies and call system to communicate. A call that enables you to connect to a public telephone network. 8 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual This term PTT button revertive transceiver unit Selective call Send Position call sideband standing wave ratio

(SWR) station transceiver Wildcard call About this manual Means... Press-to-talk button, located on the left side of the handset. This button enables you to communicate during voice calls, switch mute off temporarily, cancel voice calls prior to the point where voice can be transmitted, cancel calls where data is being transmitted, and exit out of editable screens without saving changes. A signal sent by a station in response to a call. The unit that modulates audio signals onto radio frequencies that can be transmitted on air, and that demodulates the radio frequencies it receives into audio signals. A call that enables you to contact a specific station then speak to an operator. A call that sends your GPS position to a specific station. A band of frequencies that is above or below a modulated carrier frequency. The ratio of forward and reflected powers between a transmitter and its antenna load, which can be measured by an SWR meter. A point of communication consisting of a transceiver, a power supply, an antenna, control and accessory devices, ancillary equipment, and appropriate connecting cables. A transceiver unit with speaker, handset, and battery. An ALE address syntax used to broadcast to any station that is tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network. The Wildcard address syntax, which ALE stations recognise, uses the wildcard character ? as a placeholder for characters within a self address of a receiving station. A multiple Wildcard call addresses matching subsets within the one call. The Wildcard address syntax may be used in Emergency, Message, Selective, and Send Position calls if the MIL-STD-

188-141B ALE option is installed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 9 About this manual Units NOTE Imperial dimensions are in United States Customary Units. Measurement Area Capacitance Current Frequency Impedance Length Power Power ratio Temperature Time Voltage Weight Abbreviation AWG F A Hz Unit American wire gauge farad amp hertz ohm metre (inch/feet/yard/mile) m (in/ft/yd/mi) watt decibel degrees Celsius (Fahrenheit) C (F) second hour volt gram (pound) s h V g (lb) W dB Unit multipliers NOTE Units are expressed in accordance with ISO 1000:1992 SI units and recommendations for the use of their multiples and of certain other units. Unit M k m n Name mega kilo milli nano Multiplier 1000000 1000 0.001 0.000000001 10 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual About this issue This is the first issue of the 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual. Associated documents About this manual 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide (Codan part number 15-04136-EN) This manual is one of a series of publications related to the 2110 SSB Transceiver. Associated documents are:

NGT System Programmer Help (Codan part number 15-04105-EN)

Antenna Matrix (Codan part number 12-50133)

2110 SSB Transceiver Technical Service Manual (Codan part number 15-02071-EN) 2110 SSB Transceiver Repair Guide (Codan part number 15-04139-EN)

Declaration of Conformity for the 2110 SSB Transceiver (Codan part number 19-40157) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 11 About this manual This page has been left blank intentionally. 12 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 2 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Introduction (14) European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (15) Electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices (16) C-tick approval (18) Care and safety information (19) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 13 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Introduction This section describes how to ensure the 2110 SSB Transceiver complies with the European Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC and the European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as called up in the European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC. The CE Declaration of Conformity and Expert Letter of Opinion for the product is listed on page 11, Associated documents. This document can be made available upon request to Codan or a Codan-authorised supplier. This section also contains the requirements for C-tick. 14 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance The 2110 SSB Transceiver has been tested and complies with the following standards and requirements (articles of the R&TTE Directive):

Article 3.1b: ETSI EN 301 489-1

Article 3.1b: ETSI EN 301 489-15

Article 3.2: Australian type approval according to AZ/NZS 4770:2003

Article 3.1a: assessed against ICNIRP requirements

Article 3.1a: EN 60950 Compliance with these standards is deemed sufficient to fulfil the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Product marking and labelling Any equipment supplied by Codan that satisfies these requirements is identified by the 0191

, 0191

, or markings on the model label of the product. Declaration of Conformity and Expert Letter of Opinion The CE Declaration of Conformity and Expert Letter of Opinion for this product is listed on page 11, Associated documents. This document can be made available upon request to Codan or a Codan-authorised supplier. Protection of the radio spectrum CAUTION Most countries restrict the use of HF radio communications equipment to certain frequency bands and/or require such equipment to be licensed. It is the users responsibility to check the specific requirements with the appropriate communications authorities. If necessary, contact Codan for more information. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 15 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices Radiation safety To ensure optimal transceiver performance and to avoid exposure to excessive electromagnetic fields, the antenna system must be installed according to the instructions provided. WARNING High voltages exist on the antenna during transmission and tuning. Do not WARNING Install the grounding system or counterpoise as directed to prevent RF touch the antenna during these activities. RF burns may result. burns from any metal part of the transceiver. You should not transmit from your transceiver or tune the antenna unless people are beyond the safe working distance of:

0.2 m (8 in) from a long wire, end-fed broadband, broadband dipole, or wire dipole antenna 0.6 m (2 ft) from any whip antenna

WARNING Safe working distance is based on continuous exposure to CW type transmissions, as set out in the ICNIRP Exposure Guidelines 1998 for occupational exposure. Safe working distance can be reduced with normal voice communication. Electromagnetic compatibility To ensure compliance with the EMC Directive is maintained, you must:

1 Cover unused connectors with the protective caps supplied to prevent electrostatic discharge passing through your equipment. Electrical safety To ensure compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive is maintained, you must deploy and use the 2110 SSB Transceiver and antennas in accordance with the instructions in the 2110 SSB Transceiver Getting Started Guide, the Quick Reference Cards supplied with each antenna, and the 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual. When using equipment that is connected directly to the AC mains these precautions must be followed and checked before apply AC power to the unit:

1 Use the standard AC mains cable supplied. 1 Ensure the covers for the equipment are fitted correctly. The 3121 AC Battery Charger is double insulated and marked with

. CAUTION If it is necessary to remove the covers during service by a qualified electronics technician, they must be refitted correctly before using the equipment. 16 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance WARNING The protective cover must always be fitted when the 3121 AC Battery Charger is connected to the AC mains. Batteries Battery cells are electrically live at all times and must be treated with extreme caution. They may supply high short-circuit currents even if they appear to be damaged or inoperable. Batteries should be used to provide power to the transceiver only, using the supplied connectors. The batteries will not charge at temperatures higher than 40C. Earth symbols An antenna earth connection point is provided on the 2110 SSB Transceiver. The symbol shown in Table 1 is used to identify the earth on the equipment. Table 1: Earth symbol Symbol Meaning Antenna earth 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 17 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance C-tick approval The 2110 SSB Transceiver meets the requirements of the Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (MF and HF Radiotelephone equipmentLand Mobile Services) Standard 2003 (AS/NZS 4770). 18 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Care and safety information Storage of batteries 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance Codan recommends that batteries are fully charged prior to storage. The length of time that they can be stored before recharging is necessary is dependent on the type of battery and the average storage temperature. Table 2: Battery storage times Type NiMh SLA Storage time @ 20C (70F) Storage time @ 30C (85F) 12 months 15 months 6 months 10 months Disposal of batteries Batteries must be recycled. They should not be burnt or disposed of in landfill. Immersion of the transceiver in water The transceiver unit and battery pack are designed to be waterproof to IP68. The units can withstand immersion in 1 m (3 ft) of water for up to 1 h. Prolonged immersion may cause damage to the units. If the units are immersed in water, drain any water from the front panel speaker and keypad, then wipe and air dry the connectors on the units prior to use or charging the battery. If the units are exposed to salt water, they should be washed with fresh water as soon as possible. WARNING Do not expose the connector on the battery pack to salt water. This will damage the connector. Deploying antennas WARNING Do not deploy the antenna at sites with overhead power cables. WARNING Do not deploy or use any antenna if there is lightning in the area. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 19 2110 SSB Transceiver compliance This page has been left blank intentionally. 20 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 3 HF radio transmission CODAN This section contains the following topics:

HF radio transmission (22) Etiquette for the use of HF radio (25) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 21 HF radio transmission HF radio transmission The HF band is the range of frequencies between 3 and 30 MHz. HF transceivers usually cover a frequency range of 1.6 to 30 MHz. Codan HF transceivers transmit on single sidebands. This reduces the power required to send HF signals and increases the number of channels available within the HF spectrum. HF transceivers are primarily used for long-range communication where distances of 3000 km (1800 mi) and more are possible. Obstructions such as buildings and mountains have little effect on long-range communication. HF radio can cover such large distances because of the way the transmitted radio signal propagates. HF radio waves propagate in three ways simultaneously:

ground wave direct wave sky wave Ground wave The ground wave travels near the ground for short distances, typically up to 100 km

(60 mi) over land and 300 km (190 mi) over sea. The distance covered depends upon the operating frequency, transmission power and type of terrain. Direct wave The direct wave travels in a direct line-of-sight from the transmitter to the receiver. Sky wave The sky wave is the most important form of HF propagation. The radio wave is transmitted toward the sky and is reflected by the ionosphere to a distant receiver on earth. The reflective properties of the ionosphere change throughout the day, from season to season, and yearly. Figure 1: The reflective properties of the ionosphere ionosphere emitted HF wave reflected HF wave transmitter receiver 22 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Frequency, distance and time of day HF radio transmission The extent to which a radio wave is reflected depends on the frequency that is used. If the frequency is too low the signal is absorbed by the ionosphere. If the frequency is too high the signal passes straight through the ionosphere. Within the HF band, low frequencies are generally considered to be in the range of 2 to 10 MHz. High frequencies are above 10 MHz. A frequency chosen for daytime transmission may not necessarily be suitable for night-

time use. During the day the layers of the ionosphere are thick. The layers absorb lower frequencies and reflect higher frequencies. At night, the ionosphere becomes very thin. The low frequencies that were absorbed during the day are reflected and the high frequencies that were reflected during the day pass straight through. Summer HF communications usually operate on higher frequencies than those used in winter over the same distance. Solar activity varies over an 11 year cycle. Higher frequencies need to be used during periods of peak activity. It is important to remember that you may need to change the frequency you are using to achieve the best communication. The general rules of thumb for HF communication are:

the higher the sun, the higher the frequency the further the distance, the higher the frequency Channels and modes A channel is a name that is given to a frequency or a pair of frequencies, for example,

Channel 1, 4500 and Headquarters. The frequencies may be any frequencies within the HF range. Each channel has one or more modes associated with it. Each mode indicates a sideband that can be used with the channel, such as USB or LSB. When you make a call you need to specify the channel and the mode you want to use. Table 3 shows examples of channels and the information associated with them. Table 3: Examples of channels and modes Channel Channel 1 4500 Headquarters Receive frequency

(kHz) 10600 4500 22758 Transmit frequency

(kHz) 10600

23000 Modes LSB, USB AM USB 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 23 HF radio transmission Networks and scanning A network is two or more stations that use the same frequencies and call system to communicate. The frequencies are allocated by a government authority and enable the network to maintain HF communication throughout the day and night. The call system is the method the network uses to make and receive calls. For example, in networks that use the Codan Selcall call system to make calls, the user enters the address of the station they want to call, then selects the channel/mode on which to make the call. In networks that use the ALE/CALM call system, the transceiver selects the best channel/mode for the call. The transceiver can be set to scan the channel/modes used by your network to detect incoming calls. It is recommended that when you are not using the transceiver to communicate you switch scanning on. This ensures that you can receive calls from stations in your network. The FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option If you want to use the ALE/CALM call system to automate the selection of channels you must install the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option in the transceiver. CALM stands for Codan Automated Link Management. The FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option enables the transceiver to test the signal propagation qualities of your channels using soundings, and build a profile of each channels suitability for use at different times of the day and night. The BER and SINAD information collected during sounding activity is stored in the transceiver using a 24-hour period LQA database. With this information, the transceiver is able to select the most suitable channel/mode for you when you make a call. You are able to make ALE ALL calls with this option. CALM is interoperable with FED-STD-1045 ALE. The MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option The MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option includes the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option. It also provides the capability to make ALE calls using ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes. These calls connect one station to many stations at the same time. The MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option also provides advanced link quality analysis, advanced messaging, and access to a Heard List. The MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is interoperable with FED-STD-1045 ALE and MIL-STD-188-141B. 24 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Etiquette for the use of HF radio HF radio transmission There is a standard procedure for communicating over HF radio. Before you begin transmitting, switch off scanning, select a channel, then press PTT to initiate tuning of the antenna. Listen to the channel that you are going to use and ensure that there is no voice or data communication taking place. You may need to wait until the channel is clear or select another channel. NOTE If you have the Cfg LBT Mode set to Enabled or Override allowed, the transceiver searches for a channel that is not being used; you do not need to check any channels first. When you first establish communication with another station it is customary to state their call sign and then your own using the phonetic alphabet (see Table 4 on page 26). For example:

Alpha Bravo One, this is Alpha Bravo Two. Do you receive me? Over. In this example your call sign is AB2 and you are calling a station with the call sign AB1. A call sign is a group of letters and numbers issued by a government authority to identify a station. The phonetic alphabet is used to ensure that your call sign is understood. The word over is used to signify the end of your transmission. The transceiver may be set up to transmit a short beep when you release the PTT button on the handset. When your conversation with the other party is finished, the party that speaks last should say

out. Swearing or foul language should not be usedheavy penalties can apply. Keep communication as short as possible. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 25 HF radio transmission Table 4: The phonetic alphabet Letter A B C D E F G H I J K L M Word Alpha Bravo Charlie Delta Echo Foxtrot Golf Hotel India Juliet Kilo Lima Mike Letter N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Word November Oscar Papa Quebec Romeo Sierra Tango Uniform Victor Whiskey X-ray Yankee Zulu 26 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 4 The 2110 SSB Transceiver CODAN handset 2110 transceiver unit battery pack antenna and earthing equipment The 2110 SSB Transceiver consists of a:

The handset is a hand-held device that has a microphone, and PTT button. The microphone and PTT button are used for voice communication. The transceiver unit modulates audio signals onto radio frequencies that can be transmitted on air, and demodulates the radio frequencies it receives into audio signals. The keypad on the front panel of the transceiver unit enables you to control and configure the 2110 SSB Transceiver. The handset connects to the front panel. Figure 2: The 2110 SSB Transceiver to antenna to handset 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 27 The 2110 SSB Transceiver The front panel Figure 3: The front panel antennas user controls interface connectors TUNE 1 QZ FREE Rx 4 GHI 7 PRS EASI TALK CLAR 2ABC MODE DEF3 5 JKL SEC 8TUV VIEW 0 Tx PWR6 GPS 9 CALL LOGS infrared window internal speaker earth terminal User controls location of internal GPS antenna

, The user control area comprises:

an LCD navigation keys ( , volume controls (

soft function keys (F1, F2, F3) corresponding to the function displayed on the front panel screen alphanumeric keys (09, *, #) emergency key (

power key (

There are two ways to use the keys on the front panel. You can:

press a key, briefly hold a key for 2 seconds

) 28 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The and keys The 2110 SSB Transceiver to:

to edit settings. to:

select the item on the active line in the list save changes answer yes to prompts Press

Hold Press

Hold setting and want to discard the changes you made, hold backspace over text remove messages on the screen cancel changes answer no to prompts

. to go from any location to the home screen. If you have entered text into a The scroll keys and keys are the scroll keys. Use these keys to scroll up or down through any The kind of list, to scroll left or right over text, and to increase or decrease a value. Interface connectors The interface connector area comprises:

the 6-way handset connector (

the 19-way GPIO connector (

) Antennas The antenna area comprises:

the antenna stud ( ) for whip antennas and the long wire antenna adaptor the 50 connector (

) for broadband and dipole antennas 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 29 The 2110 SSB Transceiver Hot keys Hot keys enable you to perform a task quickly. The transceiver comes with some standard hot keys programmed; the keys are labelled with the corresponding task performed. Table 5: Standard hot keys Hot key F1 F2 F3 Hold MUTE TUNE CLAR MODE FREE Rx Tx PWR V/S SEC GPS EASITALK Function Pressing F1 performs the macro assigned to this soft function key. By default, MUTE is assigned to this key, so pressing F1 toggles mute on or off. Pressing F2 performs the macro assigned to this soft function key. By default, CALL is assigned to this key, so pressing F2 starts a call. Pressing F3 performs the macro assigned to this soft function key. By default, SCAN is assigned to this key, so pressing F3 switches off scanning, or if you were in a call, ends the call and switches scanning on. Holding MUTE toggles the front panel speaker on or off. Pressing TUNE displays the PTT tunes screen so you can manually tune the antenna. For more information see page 77, Manual tuning. Pressing CLAR enables you to adjust the receive frequency to compensate for any frequency offset between your transceiver and the remote transceiver. For more information see page 78, Using the clarifier. Pressing MODE selects the next allowable mode programmed for the channel, usually USB or LSB. Pressing FREE Rx enters Free Tune mode in which you can adjust or enter a receive frequency. For more information see page 232, Using the transceiver in free tune. Pressing Tx PWR toggles the transmission power of the transceiver between Hi (25 W) and Lo (5 W). Pressing V/S toggles the mute type between Voice mute and Selcall mute. For more information see page 61, Muting the transceiver. Pressing or holding SEC enters Secure mode, if the hardware option is fitted, and special firmware is programmed into the transceiver and enabled. For more information see page 80, Using the voice encryptor. Pressing GPS displays your current GPS position, if the hardware option is fitted and enabled. For more information see page 222, GPS Screen entry. Pressing EASITALK toggles the DSP noise reduction algorithm on or off. For more information see page 79, Reducing background noise with Easitalk. 30 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The 2110 SSB Transceiver Table 5: Standard hot keys (cont.) Hot key VIEW Function Pressing VIEW toggles between the channel screen and the Address List. If you are in any other list, pressing VIEW displays the channel screen. CALL LOGS Pressing CALL LOGS repeatedly steps through a number of call logs: Calls Out, Calls In, Last Heard, then back to the screen from which you began. In these logs, you can view the details of the calls or detected stations. The Last Heard log is only available if you have the MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option installed.

(Emergency) Holding

(Power)

+ 9

+ 0 cycles the screen and keypad backlighting through the starts an automatic Emergency call transmission using call information contained in the Emergency entries in the Address List (see page 152, Making several different types of calls). Pressing brightness settings.

+ 9 enables you to change the default setting for the Pressing screen contrast. For more information see page 74, Changing the screen contrast. Pressing screen and keypad backlighting. For more information see page 74, Changing the screen brightness.

+ 0 enables you to change the default setting for the 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 31 The 2110 SSB Transceiver Handset The 2110 SSB Transceiver supports standard audio accessories using H-229 type connectors. The handset is a standard issue, lightweight, tactical H-250/U type, with built-in earphone, noise-cancelling microphone, and PTT button. It is connected to the 6-way connector on the front panel of the transceiver. Figure 4: The handset PTT earphone microphone 32 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 5 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Charging a battery (34) Connecting a battery to the transceiver (36) Inserting the transceiver into a backpack (36) Selecting an appropriate antenna (37) Troubleshooting the transceiver (41) Testing the installation (42) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 33 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Charging a battery Before using your transceiver, you must ensure that the supplied battery is fully charged. You may use an ACDC or DCDC charger with the battery. The ACDC charger (Type 3121) uses a universal AC mains input of 90264 VAC. The DCDC battery charger

(Type 3122) may be powered from any 1260 V DC source, for example, from a vehicle 12 V DC outlet, or from a 24 V vehicle battery. The Codan battery chargers are specially designed for low-noise operation, so receiver performance remains optimal while charging the battery via the front panel. You can continue to use your transceiver during battery charging. CAUTION Charging is recommended between 0 and 40C. The battery will not commence charging if the temperature is at or above 40C. If charging is already in progress, and the temperature rises to 50C, charging will be stopped automatically. CAUTION To prevent damage to the battery, Codan recommends the use of the Codan battery chargers to charge the battery pack. Figure 5: Typical front panel of a battery charger 3121 AC Battery Charger INPUT OUTPUT power on

(green) charging

(orange, off when charging complete) WARNING The battery pack should be charged with the connector facing upward and the vents clear of obstructions so that any gas created during the charging process is released. CAUTION Provide clear notification that charging is underway. Ensure there is adequate ventilation around the battery during charging. To charge a battery:

1 Do one of the following:

If the battery is attached to the transceiver, use cable 08-06215-001 to connect the output of the charger to the 19-way connector on the front panel of the transceiver. If the battery is detached from the transceiver, use cable 08-06214-001 to connect the output of the charger to the 6-way connector on the top of the battery pack. 1 Connect the charger to an appropriate power source. NOTE It will take approximately 16 seconds for charging to start. 34 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use If the transceiver is operational during charging, the battery status indicator on the front panel screen will show that the battery is charging. When charging is complete, the battery status indicator will be full. Requirements for alternative chargers The Codan battery packs may be charged using alternative supplies, for example, solar panels or hand-crank generators. In this situation, the voltage level must not exceed 15.5 V and the current must be within 13 A. These chargers must be connected between pin B (charge in) and pin A (ground) on the connector on the battery pack. Notes on charging batteries A battery will require 35 discharge/recharge cycles when new before it will reach its full capacity. In order to increase the battery service life, it is recommended that the battery is not fully discharged during each cycle. Full discharge should only be carried out periodically as follows:

Full discharge Type NiMh Two full discharge/recharge cycles every 20 charge cycles SLA One full discharge/recharge cycle every 20 charge cycles For the periodic full discharge cycle, run the battery down to zero capacity using the transceiver. The transceiver will switch off automatically when the battery is fully discharged. WARNING If you are using alternative means to discharge the battery, the battery WARNING An SLA battery must be charged immediately after discharge to prevent voltage must not go below 10 V. damage to the battery. The Codan battery packs have in-built monitoring, which is reported in the Battery entry in the Control List. You should view the Battery Cycle setting for the number of times the battery has received input current (that is, has been charged). NOTE You will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 35 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Connecting a battery to the transceiver The battery is connected to the bottom of the transceiver. It is held in place by clips with locking key latches (see Figure 6). NOTE The battery connector on the base of the transceiver is on the same side of the transceiver as the antenna connectors on the front panel. Figure 6: Transceiver with battery pack connected transceiver clip key battery pack Inserting the transceiver into a backpack All backpacks come with adjustable straps that hold the transceiver firmly in position. Some backpacks have an internal mounting frame. To insert the transceiver into a backpack with an internal mounting frame:

1 Open the rear of the backpack to expose the mounting frame. 1 Push the transceiver between the foam mounts on the frame. 1 Secure the transceiver with the two adjustable straps. 1 Close the rear of the backpack. To insert the transceiver into the soft backpack:

1 Slide the transceiver into the backpack. 1 Secure the transceiver with the adjustable strap on the outside of the backpack. 36 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Selecting an appropriate antenna Use the following table as a guide to selecting an antenna that is appropriate for your communication requirements. Table 6: Selection guide for antennas Antenna Communication distance

(km) Effort to install Antenna performance See... 0100 100500 up to 2000 up to 5000 Tape/Knock-

down whip 3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip Long wire and adaptor End-fed broadband Broadband dipole Wire dipole

Minimum Adequate page 37, Whip antennas page 38, Long wire antenna and adaptor page 39, End-

fed broadband antenna page 39, Broadband dipole antenna page 40, Wire dipole antenna Maximum Superior NOTE For specific information on the deployment of an antenna see the Quick Reference Card provided with the antenna. Whip antennas tape whip knock-down whip 3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip There are three whip antennas available for use with the 2110 SSB Transceiver:

All whip antennas are omnidirectional in performance, therefore providing radiation efficiency equally in all directions depending on the deployment position (for example, vertical position for long distances and horizontal position for short distances). When receiving, this omnidirectional performance may mean more unwanted signals are picked up, which contributes to high levels of background noise or interference. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 37 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use The whip antennas are suitable for multifrequency operation. The built-in antenna tuner automatically tunes the antenna on the first time a transmission occurs after selecting a new channel. This occurs when your transceiver receives a call, or when you press PTT. Alternatively, the antenna can be tuned to a frequency by pressing TUNE, then PTT. The SWR of the antenna may be viewed by pressing TUNE. The whip antennas are suitable for scanning ALE/CALM and Codan Selcall networks. The whip antennas are designed for deployment on the antenna stud on the front panel of the 2110 SSB Transceiver. The tape and knock-down whip antennas are suitable for walking and listening for communication over short distances up to 100 km (60 mi), using frequencies of 330 MHz. The 3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip antenna is suitable for communication over short to medium distances up to 500 km (300 mi), using frequencies of 230 MHz. Due to its length and rigidity, the collapsible whip antenna is not suitable for walking and listening. Table 7: Advantages and limitations of a vertical whip antenna Advantages Quick and easy to deploy. Tape and knock-down whips are suitable for monitoring communications while moving due to their flexibility and knock-

down properties. Omnidirectional antenna, therefore it can pick up signals equally in all directions. Suitable for short-distance communications. Suitable for scanning applications. Multifrequency operation. Limitations Tape and knock-down whips unsuitable for distances over 100 km (60 mi). 3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip unsuitable for distances over 500 km (300 mi). 3 m (10 ft) collapsible whip unsuitable for monitoring communications while moving. This antenna is more susceptible to noise pickup such as that produced by welders, electric motors, power lines etc. If used in a noisy environment, degradation of the received signal will occur. Long wire antenna and adaptor The long wire antenna is suitable for multifrequency operation with the built-in antenna tuner of the 2110 SSB Transceiver. It is approximately 10 m (11 yd) in length. The long wire antenna is suitable for scanning ALE/CALM and Codan Selcall networks. The long wire antenna and adaptor is designed for deployment on the antenna stud on the front panel of the 2110 SSB Transceiver with the use of one support structure. The long wire antenna is suitable for communication over short to long distances up to 5000 km

(3000 mi), using frequencies of 1.630 MHz. It is restricted to a fixed site for transmission and reception. 38 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Table 8: Advantages and limitations of a long wire antenna and adaptor Advantages Quick and easy to deploy. Large in size therefore, is more efficient than the whip antennas. Suitable for scanning applications. Multifrequency operation. Limitations Requires a support structure and appropriate space, oriented correctly for the required direction of communication. The length of the wire may need to be varied to tune on all frequencies. End-fed broadband antenna The end-fed broadband antenna is a multifrequency antenna that does not require tuning. It is suitable for scanning ALE/CALM and Codan Selcall networks. The end-fed broadband antenna is designed for deployment on the connector on the front panel of the 2110 SSB Transceiver with the use of one support structure. The end-

fed broadband antenna is suitable for communication over short to long distances up to 5000 km (3000 mi), using frequencies of 230 MHz. It is restricted to a fixed site for transmission and reception. Table 9: Advantages and limitations of a end-fed broadband antenna Advantages Quick and easy to deploy. Suitable for scanning applications. Multifrequency operation. Limitations Requires a support structure and appropriate space, oriented correctly for the required direction of communication. Due to its broadband properties, it has a low immunity to noise. May be inefficient on some frequencies. Broadband dipole antenna The broadband dipole antenna is a multifrequency antenna that does not require tuning. It is suitable for scanning ALE/CALM and Codan Selcall networks. connector on the The broadband dipole antenna is designed for deployment on the front panel of the 2110 SSB Transceiver with the use of at least one support structure. The broadband dipole antenna is suitable for communication over short to long distances up to 5000 km (3000 mi), using frequencies of 330 MHz. It is restricted to a fixed site for transmission and reception. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 39 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Table 10: Advantages and limitations of a broadband dipole antenna Advantages Suitable for scanning applications. Multifrequency operation. Generally, more efficient than the end-fed broadband antenna. Limitations Requires at least one support structure and appropriate space, oriented correctly for the required direction of communication. Wire dipole antenna The wire dipole antenna is a single frequency antenna that is deployed to a particular length corresponding to its operational frequency. It cannot be used in scanning applications. The wire dipole antenna is designed for deployment on the panel of the 2110 SSB Transceiver with three support structures. The wire dipole antenna is suitable for communication over short to long distances up to 5000 km

(3000 mi), using frequencies of 330 MHz. It is restricted to a fixed site for transmission and reception. connector on the front Table 11: Advantages and limitations of a wire dipole antenna Advantages Good signal quality. Suitable for medium to long-distance communications. Limitations Requires at least three support structures and appropriate space, oriented correctly for the required direction of communication. Single frequency operation, therefore not suitable for scanning applications. Length of antenna is specific to the desired frequency of operation. 40 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Troubleshooting the transceiver Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Below is a checklist for basic troubleshooting. Check that:

all connectors are dry and free of dirt all connections are sound the battery is connected to the transceiver and has some charge the selected antenna is appropriate for the distance over which you want to communicate the antenna is deployed correctly, oriented in a suitable direction, and connected to the transceiver the grounding system is adequate as per instructions provided with the antenna the antenna selection icon on the front panel screen matches the type of antenna you are using

If required, restart your transceiver to invoke self-testing. The self-test checks the memory, hardware, LCD and keys. If a serious fault is reported, contact your Codan representative. Table 12 contains some general tips for troubleshooting your transceiver. Table 12: General troubleshooting Problem The sound from the front panel speaker is muffled Communications are not clear There are no supports for a wire antenna available I get a burn from the handset when I press PTT GPS is not working ATU or ATU/50 (see Figure 9 on page 48). Solution Drain any moisture from the front panel of the transceiver by turning it upside down. Try another channel. Press PTT. If you are using a whip or long wire antenna, check that the antenna selection icon is If you are communicating over a short distance, try laying the whip horizontally for near vertical incident skywave operation. Change to a long wire antenna. If communications are still not clear, change to a dipole or broadband antenna and check that the antenna selection icon is

(see Figure 9 on page 48). Lay the antenna wire on the ground. Lay the counterpoise in the opposite direction. The transceiver is not adequately earthed. Attach a counterpoise as per the instructions provided with the antenna. Ensure that the front panel of the transceiver, and hence the GPS antenna, is facing the sky so that it can receive signals from satellites. ATU/50 50 or 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 41 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use Testing the installation Following correct deployment, the station should be tested for correct operation prior to use in the HF network. Testing involves:

measuring the SWR

carrying out station-to-station on-air testing Voltage standing wave ratio The 2110 SSB Transceiver measures the forward and reflected powers between the transceiver and its antenna load. To ensure correct installation, the power and SWR assessment should be performed with the transceiver working in its normal antenna system. Press TUNE to see the SWR, then press PTT to manually tune the antenna. If the impedance of the antenna is equal to 50 , there will be no power reflected. This is the ideal situation, which gives an SWR reading of 1:1. An SWR equal to or lower than 2.5:1 is acceptable. If the SWR is greater than 3:1, the ALC circuitry in the transceiver will reduce the output power. With some combinations of frequencies and antenna design, it may not be possible to achieve the desired value on all channels. Using SWR to test the transceiver To test the transceiver:

1 Select the channel with the highest operating frequency of the transceiver. 1 Press TUNE. 1 Press PTT to tune the transceiver. If the antenna length and ground parameters are within satisfactory operating range, tuning will be successful and the SWR reading will be less than 2:1. 1 Select the channel with the lowest operating frequency of the transceiver and repeat the test. 1 If a particular channel frequency does not tune, check the:

length of the antenna (for long wire antennas) effectiveness of the grounding system orientation of the antenna

Alter these slightly in an attempt to achieve better tuning. 42 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use On-air testing On-air testing gives a better indication of antenna operation, particularly if the operator is familiar with the signal strengths normally received within a network. Certain types of test calls can be used to test the transceiver. With on-air testing, the difference in equipment between stations must be taken into account when determining the quality of the transmission. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 43 Preparing the 2110 SSB Transceiver for use This page has been left blank intentionally. 44 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 6 Operating the transceiver CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Switching on the transceiver (46) The front panel screen (47) The channel screen (48) Entering and editing text (52) Quick Start (57) Muting the transceiver (61) Scanning channels (62) Using the microphone (63) Finding words and values (64) Setting the basics (67) Using hot keys (75) Tuning the antenna (76) Using the clarifier (78) Reducing background noise with Easitalk (79) Using the voice encryptor (80) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 45 Operating the transceiver Switching on the transceiver NOTE Prior to operational use, you should connect an antenna to the transceiver

(see page 37, Selecting an appropriate antenna, and the Quick Reference Card supplied with the antenna). To switch on the transceiver:

1 Press

. The Codan logo screen is displayed. 1 If you are prompted to enter a password, enter your user or administrator password,

. then press If you enter an incorrect password it is automatically erased. If you enter an incorrect password three times, the transceiver automatically switches off. If you have forgotten your password see page 337, Forgotten passwords. The welcome screen (if set) is briefly displayed, then the home screen is displayed. For example:

The default home screen is the channel screen in the Channel List. If another screen has been set as the home screen, it is displayed instead. For more information on the home screen see page 95, Setting the home screen. NOTE If there are no channels programmed into the transceiver, Free Tune is displayed. Switching off the transceiver To switch off the transceiver:

1 Hold down for 2 seconds, then release. The transceiver is switched off. 46 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The front panel screen Operating the transceiver NOTE In the following example, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Main Menu (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level and page 88, The Main Menu). The screen on the front panel consists of three lines. Figure 7: The front panel screen top line active line next item soft function keys the name of the list, entry or setting you are in the Find prompt when you press The information displayed on the top line depends on the task you are performing. It can display:

The next line is called the active line. You can use this line to indicate the list or entry you want to select, to enter text, and to change the value in a setting. The third line is used when a list is displayed to show either the next item in the list

(Figure 7), or the value in the first or only setting for the entry that is displayed

(Figure 8). When a value is displayed it is indented under the name of the entry to which it applies. In Figure 8 the value indicates that the Screen Brightness is set to Dark. The name of each soft function key represents the action that will take place when the corresponding F1, F2 or F3 key on the front panel of the transceiver is pressed. Figure 8: The front panel screen displaying a value top line active line value The front panel screen also displays information screens such as the channel screen in the Channel List, and the time screen in the Control List. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 47 Operating the transceiver The channel screen The channel screen is the screen that is displayed when you open the Channel List. It displays:

the name of the currently selected channel a bar graph that indicates the signal strength on receive and the output power on transmit the transmit power level indicator the mute type indicator the call type icon the mode the transmit and receive frequencies, if applicable an arrow that indicates whether the transceiver is receiving or transmitting the internal speaker icon the antenna selection icon the battery status indicator the soft function keys

Figure 9: The channel screen in the Channel List signal strength indicator Rx/Tx indicator channel name Tx freq (kHz)

(not shown if Tx/Rx the same) mute type indicator

(V/S, highlighted when mute is on) Tx power indicator

(Hi/Lo) call type icon mode Rx freq (kHz) battery status/

power supply indicator internal speaker icon (shown when speaker enabled) antenna selection icon

(internal 50 ohm

) soft function keys 48 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver If the transmit and receive frequencies are the same, the frequency is only displayed in the receive frequency position on the right side of the screen and the Rx indicator arrow is not used. The signal strength/output power indicator shows whether the transceiver is receiving or transmitting. Your transceiver has the option of selecting high or low power by pressing Tx PWR. When low power is selected, Lo is displayed to the right of the signal strength indicator

(see Figure 9). When high power is selected, Hi is displayed in this location. While a call is being established, the transceiver will show that calling activity is in progress by flashing CALL in place of the scan indicator (see Figure 10). During a call, this indicator is replaced with an icon showing the type of call being sent or received (see Figure 9). These icons are listed in Table 17 on page 158 and Table 18 on page 166. When the transceiver is scanning, the channel screen is replaced by the scanning screen

(see Figure 10). Figure 10: The scanning screen scan indicator 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 49 Operating the transceiver Battery status indicator The channel screen displays a battery status indicator. The indicator graphically shows the:

state of charge state of health Figure 11: Battery status indicator State of charge State of health 32h 16h 16h 8h 100%

50%

100%

50%

100%

100%

50%

50%

State of charge The state of charge indicates graphically how much charge is remaining in the battery. The battery continuously monitors the current consumption of the transceiver and calculates the remaining hours of use assuming a Tx to Rx ratio of 1:9. Additional battery information may be viewed in the Battery entry in the Control List. NOTE You will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). State of health Rechargeable batteries have a limited lifetime and a limited number of times that they may be charged and discharged. Over time, the total amount of charge that a battery may hold decreases. The state of health indicates graphically how much charge a battery can still hold, relative to when it was new. A low state of health indicates that the battery may need replacing. NOTE When charging a new battery it may show a low state of health until it has been fully charged and discharged several times. 50 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual External power supply indicator If you supply 12 V DC power to your transceiver via the 6-way connector on the base of the unit, the battery status indicator is replaced by the external power supply indicator. Operating the transceiver Figure 12: External power supply indicator external power supply indicator The indicator shows the voltage supplied by the power source. The scale of the indicator is 1015 V. In the example above, the voltage is just below 13 V. Selecting a channel To select a channel:

1 Press 1 If the transceiver is scanning, press SCAN to switch off scanning. or VIEW until the channel screen is displayed. 1 Scroll through the channels in the list. Stop scrolling when the channel you want is displayed. The channel is selected. NOTE If you want to change the sideband or IF filter settings, press MODE. If the mode does not change there is only one mode for the channel. You can also use the Find feature to find a channel (see page 64, Finding words and values). If you have an automatic antenna fitted, press PTT to tune the antenna to the currently selected channel. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 51 Operating the transceiver Entering and editing text There are several situations in which you may be prompted to enter or edit text, for example, when you enter the address of a station you want to call, when you select a setting in which text is required, or when you create an entry in a list. The numeric keypad on the front panel is context sensitive so that, in these situations, you can use the numeric keys to enter letters, numbers and symbols. The editable screens A screen in which you can enter or edit text will have a question mark at the end of the title line and a character/case indicator in the bottom right of the screen. Figure 13: Editable screen showing upper-case text entry indicates upper-case text entry Figure 14: Editable screen showing lower-case text entry indicates lower-case text entry Figure 15: Editable screen showing numeric text entry indicates numeric text entry 52 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Figure 16: Editable screen showing slider Operating the transceiver Editing a screen NOTE In the following example, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Welcome Text entry in the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). To gain access to an editable screen:

1 Hold

. A question mark is displayed at the end of the heading to show that you can now enter and/or edit text in the setting. Entering text To enter text in an editable screen:

1 To enter one of the letters on a key, press the key repeatedly until the letter is displayed. NOTE You can also hold the key until the letter you want is displayed, then release the key. 1 To enter another letter on the same key, wait until the cursor moves to the next space... 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 53 Operating the transceiver

...then press the key repeatedly until the letter you want is displayed. 1 To enter a letter on another key, press the key for the letter. You do not need to wait until the cursor moves to the next space. Changing between alpha and numerical characters To change between upper-case and lower-case letters and numbers in an editable screen:

1 Press # to change the character/case indicator at the bottom right of the screen from A to a to #. NOTE When you are prompted to enter a call address, the types of characters that you can enter are determined by the call systems installed in the transceiver. Moving the cursor To move the cursor across the text:

1 Use and to move the cursor left and right respectively. Inserting text To insert text:

1 Use and to move the cursor to the point where you want to insert text (or a space), then press the required character key. 54 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver NOTE If you want to insert a space, make sure that A or a is displayed at the bottom right of the screen before you press 0, otherwise you will enter a zero. Deleting text To delete text:

and 1 Use want to delete, then press

. to move the cursor one position to the right of the character that you Entering special characters in messages and names To enter special characters:

NOTE The special characters that are available are:

1 Use the and keys to move the cursor to the point where you want to insert a special character, then press * repeatedly until the symbol you want is displayed. Make sure that A or a is displayed at the bottom right of the screen NOTE before you press *, otherwise you will enter a decimal point. To enter one of an extended range of special characters:

NOTE The characters that are available are:

space , . ; ? : / ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ - + = | \ ~ <

> { } [ ] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 1 Use and a character. to move the cursor to the character or space where you want to replace NOTE If you want to add a new character, enter a space then move the cursor to this space. to place an underscore beneath the current character or space. and 1 Press 1 Use 1 When you have selected the character that you want to use, use 1 or 3 to scroll left to scroll through the character choices. or right respectively. 1 When you have made the changes, press to exit the special character mode. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 55 Operating the transceiver Entering text in an ALE call address NOTE NOTE If the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed in your transceiver, the

* key may be used to enter the special ALE addressing characters easily. You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. To enter a special ALE addressing character:

1 Ensure that you are in an editable address screen in which you can enter upper-case letters (A). 1 Do one of the following:

to enter an @, press * once to enter a ?, press * twice while the cursor is in the same space to enter a comma, press * three times while the cursor is in the same space to enter any upper-case letter, press the corresponding key to enter a number, press # once to change to numeric text entry, then press the corresponding key Saving text changes To save the changes you have made:

1 Press

. The question mark is removed from the heading. If you do not want to save the text, hold to discard the changes. 56 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Quick Start Operating the transceiver adding channels assigning channels to a scan list setting the time and date setting the self address of your station adding, changing or deleting entries from lists Quick Start provides a simple way of:

Quick Start will be available if your transceiver contains only one station self address and network names from this default list:

Quick Start is accessed via the page 91, The List Manager are accessed through the Advanced... entry in the List Manager when Quick Start is available. When Quick Start has been disabled by entering a non-default network name or by entering more than one station self address, all List Manager functionality is accessed directly by holding the Quick Start is not available in countries that do not permit programming of transmit frequencies using the front panel, for example, the United States of America and Australia. key. Standard List Manager functions as described on

*Voice

*Selcall

*CALM

!Default key. Opening and closing Quick Start To open Quick Start:

1 Hold

. To close Quick Start:

1 Press or hold

. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 57 Operating the transceiver Adding/Editing a channel to open Quick Start. To add or edit a channel:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Add/Edit channel, then press 1 Enter the name of the channel that you want to use, then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. If you want to use an existing channel, scroll to the channel, then press

. 1 Enter the receive frequency in kilohertz, then press

. NOTE You can enter the frequency to three decimal places. Press * to enter a decimal point, then continue with entering the frequency. 1 Enter the transmit frequency in kilohertz, then press 1 Scroll to the mode combination you want to use, then press

. The transceiver will return to Quick Start. 1 If you want to add more channels to your transceiver, scroll to Add/Edit channel and repeat this process. 1 Press to close Quick Start, if required. NOTE If you want to make or receive calls on this new channel, you must add it to your scan list. Setting up a scan list To set up a scan list:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Set scan list, then press to open Quick Start. The first channel in the transceiver will be displayed. 1 If you want to add this channel to the scan list, press

. If you do not want to add this channel to the scan list, press When all the channels have been viewed or you have added 20 channels to your scan list, the transceiver will return to Quick Start. If you do not want to scroll through all the channels in your scan list, hold return to Quick Start. to

. 1 Press to close Quick Start, if required. CAUTION Each time you enter Set scan list, the resulting scan list will overwrite the existing scan list. 58 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver Setting the time and date To set the time and date:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Set time/date, then press to open Quick Start. The display will appear with a line under the day of the month. 1 Use or to change the current setting to the correct value, then press

. The line will appear under the month. 1 Repeat the previous step until you have made all of the changes to the time and date. When all the changes have been made, the transceiver will return to Quick Start. 1 Press to close Quick Start, if required. Setting your station self address NOTE When Quick Start is available, any self address that you enter using this method will replace the previous self address. If you want to enter more than one self address, and hence disable the Quick Start features, see page 69, Entering your station self address. To set your station self address:

1 Hold to open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Set my address, then press 1 Enter your station self address (maximum of 6 numeric digits for a Codan Selcall

. network, and 15 upper-case/numeric digits for an ALE/CALM network), then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. 1 Press to close Quick Start, if required. Adding/Editing an entry in the Address List or Call Book to open Quick Start. To add or edit an address that you call frequently:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Address/CallBk, then press 1 Enter the name of the station or person that you want to add to the list, or use

. and to select an existing entry, then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. 1 Scroll to the type of call that you want to make, enter the station address that you want to call, then press

. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 59 Operating the transceiver 1 If you selected Message? or No call type, enter the message, then press

. If you do not want to enter a message, press

. 1 Scroll to the call system that you want to use to make the call, then press 1 If you selected Phone? or No call type, select <blank> for the phone link that

. you want to use, then press When all the changes have been made to the call address, the transceiver will return to Quick Start. 1 If you want to add more call addresses to your Address List or Call Book, scroll to Address/CallBk and repeat this process. to close Quick Start, if required. 1 Press Deleting an entry To delete addresses, channels or phone links:

1 Hold to open Quick Start. 1 Scroll to Delete..., then press

. You can delete items from the Address/CallBk, Channel or Phone Link Lists. 1 Scroll to the list from which you want to delete an item, then press 1 Scroll to the item you want to delete, then press

. NOTE If you delete a channel from the Channel List, it will be deleted from the scan list automatically. 1 Press to close Quick Start, if required. 60 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Muting the transceiver Operating the transceiver NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the entries in the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). When the transceiver is set to a channel or is scanning channels, you hear the noise on each channel. If you do not want to listen to this noise you can silence the transceiver by switching mute on. When the transceiver has been muted continuously for more than 10 seconds it will switch to low-current mode. The transceiver will return to full current use when mute is opened. You can disable the low-current mode by setting the Cfg Low Current Mode entry in the Control List to Disabled. Mute automatically comes on when the transceiver starts scanning. You must set the Mute Scan entry in the Control List to:

Selcall if you want the mute to open when a call addressed to your station is detected or voice is detected on a channel in a voice network

Voice if you want the mute to open when a voice signal is detected (you can alter the dwell time across Codan Selcall networks) Scan for Voice if you want the mute to open when a voice signal is detected on any network (the transceiver scans at a uniform rate across all networks)

If the scan is paused due to voice being detected, the length of time that the transceiver holds the pause is set in the Cfg Scan Voice Max Hold and Cfg Scan Voice Extend entries in the Control List. NOTE For help on these entries in the Control List see page 200, Entries in the Control List and page 96, Changing a setting in the Control List. Switching mute on or off To switch mute on or off:

1 Press MUTE. A message is displayed briefly to inform you that mute has been switched on or off. Setting the mute type To select the mute type:

1 Press V/S to toggle the mute type between Selcall mute and Voice mute. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 61 Operating the transceiver Scanning channels If you expect to receive calls on several channel/modes, switch scanning on. When scanning is switched on the transceiver selects each channel/mode in your network in quick succession to detect incoming calls. The channel/modes are scanned in a continuous cycle. Mute is switched on automatically. When the transceiver detects a call addressed to your station it stops scanning and notifies you according to the type of call received (see page 190, Receiving a call). When you press SCAN to end the call, scanning resumes. If you do not press this key to end the call, or any other key within 30 seconds, the transceiver automatically ends the call and resumes scanning. When the transceiver detects voice it notifies you according to the mute setting selected

(see page 61, Muting the transceiver). If your transceiver is set to notify you when voice is detected you can pause scanning, select the channel/mode on which the voice was heard, then resume scanning when required. It is recommended that scanning is switched on when you are not using the transceiver to communicate. Switching scanning on or off To switch scanning on or off:

1 Press SCAN. If a call is not in progress, scanning is toggled on or off. If a call is in progress, the call is ended and the transceiver begins scanning. NOTE When scanning is switched on, mute is also switched on. You cannot use the PTT button while the transceiver is scanning. Pausing scanning To pause scanning:

1 Do one of the following:

to pause scanning on the current channel/mode, press to pause scanning and scroll to another channel/mode, press

The channel/modes through which you can scroll are those in the network or networks that were being scanned. They are not listed alphabetically but in the order in which they were being scanned. If you do not press a key within 30 seconds, the transceiver automatically resumes scanning. or 1 While scanning is paused, do one or more of the following:

to speak, hold down PTT to resume scanning immediately, press 62 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using the microphone Operating the transceiver The microphone is located at the bottom of your handset, just like a telephone handset. When you talk into the microphone:

hold the handset as you would a telephone handset hold down PTT speak clearly at your normal volume and rate use the word over to indicate that you have finished speaking, then release PTT

(the transceiver also transmits a short beep when you release PTT) remember that your conversation can be monitored by anyone tuned to your transmit frequency

If PTT is held continuously for a certain length of time, the system stops transmission, switches to receive and displays an error message on the front panel. This ensures that, even if the PTT button is being held down accidentally (because, for example, you are sitting on the handset), power consumption is minimised and the transceiver is ready to receive calls. You can set the length of time the system waits before it cuts transmission, or switch this feature off, by using the PTT Cutout Time entry in the Control List (see page 200, Entries in the Control List). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 63 Operating the transceiver Finding words and values NOTE In the following examples, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Main Menu (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Scrolling through lists, entries and settings is one way to find items. The Find feature, however, may help you find them faster. There are two types of searches you can perform to find specific items. You can:

search for any word in the Main Menu or in an entry in a list that begins with a specific character (for example, find all the entries in the Control List that contain the word beep, such as Key Beep and PTT Beeps) search for a value in a setting (for example, find all the channels in the Channel List with a receive frequency of 13000 kHz)

Finding a word To find any word in the Main Menu or in the name of an entry:

1 From Main Menu, select the list in which you want to search. The first entry in the list is displayed. For example:

1 Press once. The Find prompt is displayed on the top line. NOTE For help with finding a value see page 65, Finding a value. 1 Enter the first character of the word you want to find. The first item that contains a word beginning with this character is displayed. 64 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver If there arent any words that begin with this character the character is deleted and an error beep is made. NOTE To refine your search, enter more characters in the word you want to find. To backspace over text, press

. 1 Scroll through the list until the item you want is displayed on the active line. NOTE If the list doesnt scroll then there is only one word that matches the characters you entered. 1 Press to exit Find at the entry. Finding a value To find a value that begins with a specific character:

1 From Main Menu, select the list in which the value is stored. NOTE You cannot use this type of search in the Main Menu or in the Control List. 1 Press twice. The Find prompt is displayed on the top line with the name of the first setting in the entry. For example:

NOTE The search for a value will be conducted in the setting displayed. To search for a value in a different setting, press until that setting is displayed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 65 Operating the transceiver 1 Enter the first character of the value you want to find. The first entry that contains a value beginning with this character is displayed, and the value is displayed beneath it. If there arent any values that begin with this character the character is deleted and an error beep is made. NOTE To refine your search, enter more characters in the value you want to find. To backspace over text, press

. 1 Scroll through the entries until the one you want is displayed. NOTE If the list doesnt scroll then there is only one value that matches the characters you entered. 1 Press to exit Find at the entry. NOTE If you are in the Channel List the transceiver selects this channel. 66 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Setting the basics Setting the time and date Operating the transceiver NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Main Menu (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). When the transceiver leaves the factory it is set to UTC time with a time zone offset of zero. To set your local time and date you need to enter your time zone offset from UTC time, then adjust the local time and date if necessary. This feature is useful if you have a network that spreads over several time zones, or you need to time stamp your transmissions according to the current time at longitude zero. Setting the time zone offset To set your time zone offset from UTC time:

until Main Menu is displayed. 1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Time Zone Offset, then hold

. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). 1 Scroll to the correct time zone offset for your location, then press 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 67 Operating the transceiver Adjusting the local time and date If the local time and date are not correct after setting your time zone offset from UTC time, adjust the local time and date. until Main Menu is displayed. To adjust the local time and date:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press

. 1 Scroll to Time Local, then hold

. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). The cursor is placed under the day of the month. 1 Scroll through the values until the one you want is displayed, then press to go to the next setting. To go to the previous setting, press

. 1 Repeat the previous step until the date and time are correct. 1 Press 1 Press after setting the seconds to save your changes. until Main Menu is displayed. 68 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Displaying the local time and date NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Main Menu (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Operating the transceiver until Main Menu is displayed. To display the local time and date:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press

. 1 Scroll to Time Screen, then hold

. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). The time screen is displayed. 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. Entering your station self address NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the entries in the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Your station self address is the address used by other stations to call you, and it is sent when you make calls to identify you as the caller. You can enter up to 20 self addresses for your station. This section explains how to enter, edit and delete station self addresses. Entering a self address until Main Menu is displayed. To enter your station self address:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Address, then press

. If a self address has not yet been entered the screen displays (none). Press open the List Manager. to 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 69 Operating the transceiver If one or more self addresses have already been entered the screen displays the number of self addresses (for example, (1 items)). Press to display the self addresses, then hold to open the List Manager. 1 Select Add item. 1 Enter the self address of your station. For example:

If you are entering a self address to be used in:

a Codan Selcall network, enter up to 6 numeric digits an ALE/CALM network, enter up to 15 upper-case/numeric digits, or a combination of both (see page 158, Special ALE address syntaxes) NOTE NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. Do not enter a self address that ends with one or more zeros. Zeros are used to indicate that calls are to be made to groups of stations in a Codan Selcall network. 1 Press 1 Select the network in which you want to use this self address. To use the self address in all networks, select <all>. 70 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver The self address is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the self address you have created, press Manager. to close the List 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 71 Operating the transceiver Editing a self address until Main Menu is displayed. To edit a station self address:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Address, then press

. The number of self addresses in the list is displayed. For example:

1 Press to display the self address/addresses. If there is more than one self address, scroll to the self address you want to edit. 1 Hold to edit the self address. The self address is displayed. 1 Edit the self address as required, then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. The network is displayed. 72 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver 1 Do one of the following:

to change the network, scroll to the network you want, then press to use the self address in all networks, select <all>

if you do not want to change the network, scroll to the original network, then press The new details are saved. 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. Deleting a self address until Main Menu is displayed. To delete a station self address:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Address, then press

. The number of self addresses in the list is displayed. For example:

1 Press to display the self address/addresses. 1 Scroll to the self address you want to delete. to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Delete item. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 73 Operating the transceiver The transceiver asks you to confirm that you want to delete the item. 1 Press

. The item is deleted and the List Manager remains open. 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. Changing the screen contrast To change the contrast of the screen:

1 Press

+ 9 to access the Screen Contrast entry in the Control List. The Screen Contrast slider screen is displayed. 1 Use or to increase or decrease the contrast, then press

. Changing the screen brightness To change the brightness of the screen:

1 Tap repeatedly to cycle through the screen brightness options. 74 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using hot keys Operating the transceiver Hot keys on the front panel are keys that perform special tasks in addition to their normal functions. Table 5 on page 30 lists the standard hot keys on the front panel and the tasks you can perform with them. Generally, pressing the hot key a second time will exit from the hot key activity. For example, pressing CLAR allows the clarifier to be edited. Pressing CLAR again exits the editing mode and returns you to the screen from which you began. NOTE If you want the user to be able to access an entry in the Control List so that they can change the value, you should set up a hot key that accesses the entry (see page 241, Creating a macro and assigning it to a hot key for information on how to create hot keys). To use a hot key on any of the front panel keys:

1 Press the hot key. NOTE NOTE If the key can perform more than one hot key task, a list of the tasks is displayed. Press the key repeatedly to scroll through the tasks. When the task you want to perform is displayed, press Some keys may require you to select a value from a list or enter text before the task is completed. The task is performed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 75 Operating the transceiver Tuning the antenna Automatic tuning If the transceiver is connected to an automatic antenna, it tunes the antenna automatically when required. To tune the antenna when you select a channel:

1 Select a channel in the Channel List (for help see page 51, Selecting a channel). 1 Press then release PTT. A message is displayed to inform you that tuning has begun, and the transceiver makes a series of short beeps. Tuning typically takes 12 seconds. If tuning fails, a message is displayed to inform you of this, and the transceiver makes an error beep. You may need to manually tune the antenna (see page 77, Manual tuning). Removing the tuning message To remove the tuning message before tuning is complete:

1 Press

. The beeps will continue until tuning is complete. Aborting automatic tuning To abort automatic tuning:

1 Press PTT. A message is displayed to inform you that tuning has been aborted, and the transceiver makes an error beep. 76 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Manual tuning Operating the transceiver You may need to manually tune the antenna if you are receiving on a channel on which you have not just transmitted, or if you want to check the SWR value for the antenna. The transceiver will display whether it is Tuned or Untuned. To manually tune the antenna:

1 Press TUNE. The PTT tunes screen is displayed with the SWR and battery voltage on the bottom line. For example:

NOTE If you do not press PTT within 30 seconds you are returned to the screen from which you began. 1 Press PTT to tune the antenna. Tuning... is displayed, and the transceiver makes a series of short beeps. NOTE

. An SWR of less than 2.5:1 is acceptable. If a message is displayed while you are tuning, you can remove it by pressing If tuning continues for more than 2 minutes, tuning is automatically aborted. The transceiver displays a message to inform you of this, makes an error beep, and returns you to the screen from which you began. If tuning is unsuccessful, refer to the Quick Reference Card supplied with the antenna. 1 Press PTT to stop tuning. 1 Press TUNE to return to the screen from which you began. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 77 Operating the transceiver Using the clarifier The clarifier is a feature that enables you to adjust the receive frequency to compensate for any frequency offset between your transceiver and the remote transceiver, thus improving the quality of received voice. To use the clarifier:

1 Press CLAR. The Clarifier slider is displayed in the channel screen. 1 Use or to increase or decrease the pitch of the received voice, then press or CLAR. If you select a positive clarifier offset from the frequency, the Rx indicator changes to an up arrow. If you select a negative clarifier offset from the frequency, the Rx indicator changes to a down arrow. For example:

arrow indicates positive clarifier offset from 18734 kHz NOTE When you select another channel/mode the clarifier is reset to the centre point. 78 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Reducing background noise with Easitalk Operating the transceiver The Easitalk feature enables you to reduce the level of background noise that is present when you listen to a channel. If Easitalk is on when the transceiver begins scanning, it is automatically switched off. It is switched on again when scanning pauses or stops. NOTE Easitalk uses one of three DSP algorithms to reduce the background noise. Depending on the conditions you may need to change the algorithm in the Cfg Easitalk entry in the Control List. If you intend to change the algorithm regularly, set up a hot key on the 5 key to go to the next algorithm value in the Cfg Easitalk entry in the Control List (see page 331, Example 4: changing a value to the next value in a list). Switching Easitalk on or off To switch Easitalk on or off:

1 Press EASITALK. The Easitalk entry in the Control List is displayed and the value is automatically toggled on or off. After about 2 seconds you are returned to the screen from which you began. NOTE Easitalk is not available if the Voice Encryptor feature is active. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 79 Operating the transceiver Using the voice encryptor NOTE To use the voice encryptor, you must have the hardware option fitted, and special firmware programmed into the transceiver and enabled. The voice encryptor is an optional feature that provides high-grade security for voice communications. This feature uses Secure Keys, Secure Modes, and PINs to provide various levels of secure communications. In order to communicate securely between two stations, both stations must use the same Secure Key. The voice encryptor may be programmed with multiple Secure Keys, any one of which may be selected. In addition to the Secure Keys, the voice encryptor provides a PIN facility, which temporarily varies the level of security on the key for a private session. For secure communications within your organisation you need to set up a Corporate key that is common to all transceivers in your organisation. If you need to have secure communications with other organisations operating the same type of equipment as yours, you can use the fixed Global key that is common to all voice encryptors shipped from the factory. The Global key provides secure communications, however the security is less than that provided by a Corporate key. The PIN facility may also be used with the Global key to improve the level of security. Using the voice encryptor NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the entries in the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Using the voice encryptor To use the voice encryptor:

1 Press SCAN to switch off scanning. 1 Press SEC. The transceiver will respond with two high short beeps and displays Go Secure, and the Secure Mode and Secure Key used. For example:

80 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If you are in the Channel List, the active voice encryptor is indicated by the word Secure <C|G> highlighted at the left of the channel screen. For example:

Operating the transceiver Switching off the voice encryptor To switch off the voice encryptor:

1 Press SEC. The transceiver will respond with two low short beeps and display Go Clear. For example:

Using a PIN for additional security To use the voice encryptor with a PIN:

1 If you are not already using the voice encryptor, press SCAN to switch off scanning. 1 Hold SEC to enter a PIN for the session. 1 Enter the 4-digit PIN that you have agreed to use with others for this session, then

. press CAUTION The PIN must be a number that both parties know and agree upon without mentioning it over the air. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 81 Operating the transceiver The transceiver will respond with two high short beeps and displays Go Secure, the Secure Mode and Secure Key used, and PIN to indicate that a PIN is in use. For example:

If you are in the Channel List, the active voice encryptor is indicated by the word Secure<C|G>P highlighted at the left of the channel screen. For example:

Switching between Global and Corporate Modes Whenever you switch on the voice encryptor it will enter the mode that is set in the Secure Mode entry in the Control List. For help on setting the default Secure Mode see page 96, Changing a setting in the Control List and page 200, Entries in the Control List. To switch between the Global and Corporate Modes while using the voice encryptor:

1 Hold SEC. 1 Use or 1 If you want to use a PIN, enter the 4-digit PIN that you have agreed to use with to toggle between Global and Corporate. others for this session. 1 Press

. NOTE The default Secure Mode is not changed. Next time you switch on the voice encryptor, the default mode will be entered. 82 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver Using the voice encryptor in Standby Mode When the voice encryptor is switched on you will hear all transmissions and noise on the selected channel. If you want to hear just the voice and encrypted transmissions you can enter the Standby Mode and switch on Voice mute. The transceiver will open mute when it detects a voice signal on the channel. When an encrypted transmission is received, the transceiver switches from Standby Mode to Secure Mode and the decrypted audio is heard. To enter Standby Mode:

1 Switch on the voice encryptor. 1 Press *. The voice encryptor switches to Standby Mode. If you are in the Channel List, the standby voice encryptor is indicated by the word SecureXX underlined at the left of the channel screen. For example:

NOTE The transceiver will automatically switch from Standby Mode to Secure Mode if an encrypted transmission is received. To exit Standby Mode:

1 Press *. The voice encryptor switches from Standby Mode. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 83 Operating the transceiver Setting up the voice encryptor NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the entries in the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Setting the Corporate key in an index until Main Menu is displayed. To set the Corporate key:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press

. 1 Scroll to Secure Key, then hold

. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). 1 Enter an 8-digit key that will be used for your organisation, then press 1 Scroll to Index, then hold 1 Scroll to Index 1, then press

. NOTE If you need to program Index 2 or above with a secure key, you must use CICS (see page 278, secure command). 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. Setting up the voice encryptor for basic security use To set up the voice encryptor:

1 Set up the Corporate key, if required (see above Setting the Corporate key in an index). 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Secure Mode, then hold

. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). 1 Scroll to Corporate, then press 1 Lock and hide the Secure Mode entry in the Control List (see page 115, Locking and

. unlocking information and page 113, Hiding and showing information). 1 If you want your users to be able to use a PIN, enable the PIN mode (see page 344, Restricting access to Voice Encryptor features). Otherwise, disable the PIN mode. 84 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver Setting up the voice encryptor for advanced security use To set up the voice encryptor:

1 Set up the Corporate key, if required (see page 84, Setting the Corporate key in an index). 1 Set up a hot key to access the Secure Index entry in the Control List so that the current Secure Index, as designated by the organisation, can be selected (see page 330, Example 3: displaying and/or changing a setting in the Control List). 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Secure Mode, then hold 1 Scroll to Corporate, then press 1 Program multiple Corporate keys via CICS (see page 278, secure command). 1 If you want to change the base of all Corporate keys, modify the base key (Index 0)

. via CICS (see page 278, secure command). 1 If you want to alter the encryption algorithm contact your Codan representative. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 85 Operating the transceiver This page has been left blank intentionally. 86 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 7 Using lists CODAN This section contains the following topics:

The Main Menu (88) Selecting a list (90) The List Manager (91) Setting a marker (94) Setting the home screen (95) Changing a setting in the Control List (96) Making changes to all other lists (97) Hiding and showing settings (101) Grouping and ungrouping entries (103) Restricting access to information (108) Logging into admin level (110) Displaying full and normal view (112) Hiding and showing information (113) Locking and unlocking information (115) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 87 Using lists The Main Menu NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Main Menu (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). All the details required to operate the transceiver, such as the self address of your station and the channels and networks you use, are stored in lists. Each list relates to a particular area of the transceivers operation. The lists that are displayed in the Main Menu are:

the Address List, which stores the details of stations you often call the Channel List, which stores the details of the channels you use the Control List, which stores the settings that control the way the transceiver operates, for example, the brightness and contrast of the front panel screen, the time and date, passwords, and your station self address the NET List, which stores information about the NETS that you use, whether or not you are a member of these NETs, and the networks used with each NET the Network List, which stores information about the networks you use and the channels used in each network the Phone Link List, which stores the details of telecommunication stations you contact to make telephone calls from the transceiver

The lists are displayed in the Main Menu without the word list after them. Figure 17: The contents of the Main Menu Main Menu Address Channel Control Network NET Phone Link Entries, settings and values Each list contains entries. The entries in the Address List are the names of the stations you often call, for example, Home, Work. The entries in the Channel List are the names of the channels you use, for example, Channel 1, Channel 2. You can add entries to each list except the Control List. Each entry has one or more settings. For example, the entries in the Channel List are the channels that you use, and each entry has a setting for the receive and transmit frequencies, and the modes that can be used with the channel. Each setting has a value. For example, the value for the Receive freq setting in the Channel List is the receive frequency of the channel in kilohertz. 88 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using lists Figure 18: Examples of entries, settings and values entries settings values Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Receive freq Transmit freq Modes... Receive freq Transmit freq Modes... Receive freq Transmit freq Modes... 4 010 kHz 4 010 kHz USB 15 000 kHz Disabled USB, LSB 8 734 kHz 8 210 kHz USB Main Menu Address Channel Control Network NET Phone Link 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 89 Using lists Selecting a list NOTE In the following example, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Main Menu (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). To select a list from the Main Menu:

1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. 1 Scroll through the Main Menu until the list you want to select is displayed on the active (middle) line. For example:

1 Select the list. The name of the list is displayed on the top line and the first entry is displayed on the active line. You can now scroll through the entries. 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. 90 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The List Manager Using lists creating, copying, renaming and deleting entries setting the home screen changing the way lists, entries and settings are displayed preventing information from being edited and/or displayed (hiding and locking) creating macros and hot keys logging in as an administrator The List Manager is a collection of tools that enable you to perform various tasks on lists, entries and settings. These tasks include:

The tools in the List Manager are displayed as entries. You can scroll through them and select them the same way you scroll through entries in lists. The entries in the List Manager vary according to the list, entry or setting you were on when you opened it:

only entries relevant to that item are displayed. Table 13 on page 92 lists the entries in the List Manager and their functions. Using the List Manager The entries in the List Manager are covered in detail in this section. However, the basic steps for using them are the same. To use an entry in the List Manager:

1 Go to the list, entry or setting in which you want to use the List Manager. 1 Hold to open the List Manager. If Quick Start is enabled, scroll to Advanced..., then press

. 1 Scroll through the entries until the one you want to select is displayed on the active line (see Table 13 on page 92). 1 Press

. When the task is completed, the List Manager remains open. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 91 Using lists Entries in the List Manager Table 13: List Manager entries and their functions Entry Create entry Copy entry Rename entry Delete entry Set marker Add item Delete item Display options... Enables you to... Create an entry in a list. Copy an entry in a list. Rename an entry in a list. Delete an entry in a list. Set a marker on an entry in a list so that the next time you open the list, it is opened to this entry. Add:

a mode to a channel in the Channel List a channel/mode to a network in the Network List your station self addresses to the Address entry in the Control List Delete:

a mode from a channel in the Channel List a channel/mode from a network in the Network List your station self addresses from the Address entry in the Control List a macro from a key in the Keypad List Ungroup entries in a list. Group entries? Group entries in a list. Ungroup entries?

Show settings? Display the first setting of an entry under the name of the entry. Hide settings? Display the next item in a list under the name of an entry. Full view?

Show the lock and hide icons at the top right of the screen and display entries marked as hidden. Remove the lock and hide icons at the top right of the screen and hide entries marked as hidden. Normal view?

92 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 13: List Manager entries and their functions (cont.) Using lists Entry Macros... Create macro Copy macro Move macro Enables you to... Create a macro. Copy a macro. Move a macro from one key to another, or from one position to another on the same key. Create a macro then add it to the end of an existing macro. Join two existing macros. Add to macro Join macros Rename macro Rename a macro. Delete macro Set home screen Set the home screen. Lock?

Delete a macro. Config... Built-in Test Admin... Unlock?

Hide?

Show?

Locks off?

Locks on?

Admin login Select test?

Admin lock?

Prevent users from editing lists, entries and settings by locking items at user level. Unlock lists, entries and settings that have been locked at user level. Prevent users from displaying lists, entries and settings in normal view by hiding items at user level. Display lists, entries and settings in normal view that have been hidden at user level. Switch off all locks set at user level until the Locks on? entry is used, or the transceiver is switched off then on again. Switch on all locks set at user level. Gain access to the Admin... group of entries in the List Manager. Select a built-in test from a range of automatic, startup and user tests. Prevent users from editing lists, entries and settings by locking items at admin level. Admin unlock? Unlock lists, entries and settings locked at admin level. Admin hide?

Prevent users from displaying lists entries and settings by hiding items at admin level. Display lists, entries and settings hidden at admin level. Switch off all locks set at admin level until the Admin... Locks on?

entry is used, or the transceiver is switched off then on again. Switch on all locks set at admin level. Admin show?

Locks off?

Locks on?

Admin logout? Log out of admin level. NOTE The Admin... group of entries enables the administrator to restrict user access to information configured in the transceiver. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 93 Using lists Setting a marker Markers are like bookmarks: if you want to display a particular entry each time you open a list, set a marker on that entry. This saves your having to scroll to the entry each time you want to use it. For example, if you often use a particular entry in the Address List, set a marker on that entry so that each time you open the Address List the entry is displayed. To set a marker:

1 Go to the list or entry on which you want to set a marker. 1 Hold 1 Select Set marker. to open the List Manager. The marker is set and the List Manager closes. NOTE To move a marker to another entry repeat the steps above. If you want a list to open at the first entry, set the marker on the first entry in the list. 94 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Setting the home screen Using lists switch the transceiver on hold from any location The home screen is the screen that can be displayed quickly, regardless of the list you happen to be in. It is displayed after you:

The default home screen is the Channel List but almost any screen can be used as a home screen. If you want to see the current time, make the time screen the home screen. When you set the home screen, values are not recorded. For example, if you make the Channel List the home screen, it displays the currently selected channel, not the channel that was selected when you set the home screen. Setting the home screen To set the home screen:

1 Go to the screen you want to make the home screen. NOTE If you want to make a screen in the Control List the home screen, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Config... 1 Select Set home screen. The home screen is set and the List Manager remains open. Displaying the home screen To display the home screen from any location:

1 Hold

. NOTE If you are editing a setting, holding exit the setting. Holding will cancel your changes and again will display the home screen. 1 To return to the channel screen, press VIEW. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 95 Using lists Changing a setting in the Control List NOTE In the following example, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Most of the entries in the Control List contain a single setting. The steps in this section show you how to change these settings. The Address entry, which contains multiple settings, is covered on page 69, Entering your station self address. until Main Menu is displayed. To change a setting in the Control List:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to the entry in which the setting you want to change is stored, then hold

. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). A question mark is displayed at the end of the heading to show that you can now edit the setting. For example:

1 Scroll to the value you want (if it is a slider screen or a list) or enter text (for help see page 52, Entering and editing text). If you do not want to save the change you made and you are in a setting where you can:

The change is discarded and the setting is closed. select a value from a list or slider screen, press enter and delete text, hold or press PTT or PTT 1 Press

. The question mark is removed. 1 Press until Main Menu is displayed. 96 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using lists Making changes to all other lists NOTE In the following examples, you will need to log in as administrator to see the lists (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). The following steps can be used to make changes in every list except the Control List

(see page 96, Changing a setting in the Control List). Creating an entry in a list To create an entry in a list:

1 Select the list in which you want to create an entry. 1 Hold 1 Select Create entry. to open the List Manager. The transceiver suggests a name for the new entry based on the name of the entry you were on. For example:

1 Enter the name that you want to use for the new entry. The name must be unique to the list that you are in. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. 1 Press

. The transceiver will prompt you to enter settings for the entry. For information on settings in the... Channel List Network List NET List Phone Link List Address List 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual See... page 118 page 123 page 134 page 142 page 147 97 Using lists The new entry is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the entry you have created, press to close the List Manager. Renaming an entry in a list To rename an entry in a list:

1 Go to the entry you want to rename. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Rename entry. The transceiver displays the existing name of the entry for editing. 1 Enter the new name that you want to use for this entry. The name must be unique to the list that you are in. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. 1 Press

. The entry is renamed and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the entry you have renamed, press to close the List Manager. 98 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using lists Copying an entry in a list To copy an entry in a list:

1 Go to the entry you want to copy. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Copy entry. The transceiver suggests a name for the new entry based on the name of the entry you were on. 1 Enter the name that you want to use for the copy of this entry. The name must be unique to the list that you are in. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. 1 Press

. A copy of the original entry, with the new name, is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the entry you have created, press to close the List Manager. Editing an entry in a list To edit an entry in a list:

1 Go to the entry you want to edit. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). to view the settings for the entry. 1 Press 1 Scroll to the setting you want to edit, then hold

. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 99 Using lists For information on settings in the... Channel List Network List NET List Phone Link List Address List See... page 118 page 123 page 134 page 142 page 147 1 When you have edited the settings, press until you return to the entry. Deleting an entry from a list To delete an entry from a list:

1 Go to the entry you want to delete. NOTE Scroll to the entry or use the Find feature (for help see page 64, Finding words and values). to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Delete entry. The transceiver asks you to confirm that you want to delete the entry. 1 Press

. The entry is deleted and the List Manager remains open. 100 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Hiding and showing settings Using lists You can set up the transceiver to show the first setting for each entry in a list. This shows the information in the entry. Figure 19 shows an entry (Call Base) in the Address List with the first setting for the entry (call type and address) displayed under it. The setting is indented to indicate that it belongs to the entry above it. Figure 19: The Address List with settings shown entry setting If you do not want the first setting to be displayed you can hide it. The next entry in the list is displayed instead, as shown in Figure 20. Figure 20: The Address List with settings hidden entry next entry NOTE In the following examples, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Hiding settings in a list To hide settings in a list:

1 Go to the list in which you want to hide settings. For example:

1 Hold to open the List Manager. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 101 Using lists 1 Select Display options... 1 Select Hide settings?

The settings are hidden and the List Manager remains open. Showing settings in a list To show settings in a list:

1 Go to the list in which you want to show settings. For example:

to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Display options... 1 Select Show settings?

The settings are shown and the List Manager remains open. 102 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using lists Grouping and ungrouping entries Entries in lists are usually displayed on a single level. When you scroll through a list you scroll over each entry in it. Figure 21: Ungrouped entries in a list Control Screen Auto-Dim Screen Brightness Screen Contrast Time Local Time Screen Time Zone Offset If you want to simplify your lists so that you do not have to scroll over each entry, you can group the entries. When you do this, a second level is created for groups of entries that begin with the same word. The word that is common to the group is displayed on the first level and is followed by an ellipsis (...) to indicate that there are entries beneath it. Figure 22: Grouped entries in a list, level one Control Screen... Time... This reduces the number of items over which you have to scroll. The entries themselves are displayed on the second level. Figure 23: Grouped entries in a list, levels one and two Control Screen... Auto-Dim Brightness Contrast Time... Local Screen Zone Offset To display the entries on the second level you simply select the group name (for example, Screen...) on the first level. The entries can then be selected and edited in the same way as other entries. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 103 Using lists The entries in the Control List have been named to take advantage of grouping. Related entries begin with the same word so that, grouped or ungrouped, they appear close to each other in the list (for example, Time Local, Time Screen, Time Zone Offset). You cannot change the names of the entries in the Control List. You can, however, take advantage of grouping in other lists by creating or renaming your entries with group names. For example, if you have a number of channels that you only use at night, you could rename them using a group name such as Night, then group the entries in the Channel List (see Figure 24). This will save your having to scroll over the night-time channels when you do not need to use them, and to limit your scrolling to within the group when you do. Figure 24: Ungrouped and grouped entries Original entries Channel Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 5 Chan 6 NOTE Entries grouped Channel Chan... Night... Night-time entries renamed with a group name Channel Chan 1 Chan 2 Night Chan 1 Night Chan 2 Night Chan 3 Night Chan 4 In the following examples, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Grouping entries To group entries:

1 Open the list in which you want to group entries. For example:

to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Display options... 1 Select Group entries?

The entries are grouped and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the grouped entries, press to close the List Manager. 104 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If you were on an entry with a group name when you opened the List Manager, the lowest level of that group is displayed when you exit the List Manager. The group name is displayed on the top line. Using lists To return to the top level of the group, press displayed on the top line. until the name of the list you are in is Ungrouping entries There are two ways to ungroup entries in a list. If you want to temporarily ungroup the entries in a list, scroll to a grouped entry, then hold ungrouped until you exit the list. If you want the entries to be ungrouped each time you open the list, use the steps below. The entries will remain To ungroup entries:

1 Open the list in which you want to ungroup entries. For example:

to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Display options... 1 Select Ungroup entries?

The entries are ungrouped and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the ungrouped entries, press to close the List Manager. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 105 Using lists Selecting a grouped entry To select a grouped entry:

1 Scroll to the grouped name, then press

. The grouped name is displayed on the top line and the entries are displayed beneath it. NOTE If the settings are hidden, the next entry in the list is displayed on the bottom line instead of a setting. 1 Scroll through the entries until the one you want is displayed on the active line. 1 Press

. The first (or only) setting for the entry is displayed. 1 To return to the list of grouped entries, press

. 1 To return to the first level of the list, press

. 106 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using lists Locking and hiding grouped entries Grouped entries can be locked and hidden. The process is the same as that for individual entries except that you start by going to the name of the group you want to lock or hide, not to a single entry. For example, to lock all the channels in Figure 25 you would go to the group name Mobile... and lock it. To lock the night-time channels, you would go to the group name Night... For more information on locking and hiding entries see page 115, Locking and unlocking information and page 113, Hiding and showing information. Figure 25: Locking and hiding grouped entries Mobile... Day... Chan 1 Chan 2 Night... Chan 11 Chan 12 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 107 Using lists Restricting access to information Access to information in the transceiver can be restricted in two ways. You can lock lists, entries and settings to prevent them from being edited, and you can hide them to prevent them from being displayed. For example, if you do not want users to change the transmit frequencies of channels in the transceiver, you can lock the settings in which these frequencies are stored. If you do not want users to see these frequencies you can hide the settings. User, admin and factory level Lists, entries and settings can be locked and hidden at three levelsuser, admin and factory leveland they can only be unlocked and displayed by someone logged into the same or a higher level. User level is the lowest and most general level. When you switch on the transceiver you are automatically logged into this level. Items locked and hidden at this level can be unlocked and displayed by others logged into this level or admin level. The user should be able to access all necessary information for the day-to-day operation of the transceiver at this level. By default, the user has access to the Channel and Address Lists. Admin level is for use by system administrators. Items locked and hidden at this level can only be unlocked and displayed by others logged into this level. This prevents users from being able to change and display these items. For details on the admin level see Table 14 on page 109 and page 110, Logging into admin level. By default, all lists are hidden at admin level however, this can be changed by the administrator to meet the users requirements. If the administrator recognises that there are some entries in the Control List to which the user requires access, they can either unlock and show the entry at user level, or set up a hot key to access the entry (see page 241, Creating a macro and assigning it to a hot key). Factory level is the highest level and is used by Codan to lock certain configuration settings in the Control List. Items locked at this level can be displayed by users and administrators but cannot be unlocked. You cannot log into factory level. Items can be locked at one level and hidden at another. For example, if you have access to admin level and do not want users to display the factory-locked configuration settings in the Control List, you could hide these settings at admin level. Table 14 summarises the access restrictions you can place on items at user and admin level. Locking and hiding information is covered in more detail on page 115, Locking and unlocking information and on page 113, Hiding and showing information. 108 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 14: Restricting access to information at user and admin levels Using lists You can...

You cannot...

If you log into user level... If you log into admin level... lock and hide items at user level unlock items that have been locked at user level display items that have been hidden at user level

unlock items that have been locked at admin or factory level display items that have been hidden at admin or factory level You can...

You cannot...

lock and hide items at user and admin level unlock items that have been locked at user or admin level display items that have been hidden at user or admin level unlock items that have been locked at factory level Full and normal view Full view is a feature that enables you to display items that have been hidden at the level into which you are logged, and to see the level at which items have been locked. For example, if you have logged in as a user then switch to full view, information that has been hidden at user level is displayed and icons at the top right of the screen indicate the level at which any items have been locked and hidden. When you switch to normal view, the hidden items and the icons are removed. Full and normal view are covered in more detail on page 112, Displaying full and normal view. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 109 Using lists Logging into admin level Logging into admin level gives you access to the Admin... group of entries in the List Manager (see Table 13 on page 92). These entries enable you to lock and hide information at admin level. When you log into admin level:

There are two ways you can log into admin level. If you are prompted to enter a password when you switch on the transceiver, you can enter the admin password instead of the user password. all locked entries are temporarily unlocked full view is enabled NOTE If you want to log into admin level this way, make sure that a user and an admin password have been set in the Control List. When you switch on the transceiver, you are only prompted to enter a password if a user password has been set. You can also log into admin level by logging in at user level then using the Admin login entry in the List Manager. Logging into admin level from user level To log into admin level from user level:

1 Hold to open the List Manager. If Quick Start is enabled, scroll to Advanced... in the Quick Start menu, then press

. 1 Scroll to Config..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Admin login, then press 1 Enter the admin password, then press

. NOTE If an admin password has not been set, you can log in by simply pressing

. You are logged into admin level and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to access the Main Menu, press until Main Menu is displayed. Logging out of admin level To log out of admin level:

1 Hold to open the List Manager. If Quick Start is enabled, scroll to Advanced..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Admin..., then press

. 110 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using lists 1 Scroll to Admin logout, then press

. You are returned to user level and the List Manager remains open. NOTE If you switch off the transceiver while you are logged into admin level you are automatically logged out. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 111 Using lists Displaying full and normal view Full view is a feature that enables you to display any items that have been hidden at the level into which you are logged, and to see the level at which items have been locked. When you switch to full view, icons are displayed at the top right of the screen to indicate whether an item has been locked and/or hidden, and the level at which these restrictions were set (for more information on access levels see page 108, Restricting access to information). When you switch to normal view, the icons and any items that have been hidden are removed. Figure 26 shows the front panel screen in full view. The entry in this figure has been locked at admin level to prevent it from being edited by users, and hidden at user level to prevent it from being displayed to users in normal view. Figure 26: Full view level at which item was locked (A=admin) lock icon hide icon level at which item was hidden (U=user) If you want to unlock an item that was locked at the same level as that into which you are logged, you do not need to switch to full view. For example, if you are logged into user level and want to unlock an item locked at user level you can do so in normal view. If you want to be able to see an item that has been hidden in normal view, you must first switch to full view to display the item (with its hide icon), then use the Config... Show?

entry in the List Manager. When you return to normal view, the item will be displayed. For more information on locking and hiding items at different levels see page 115, Locking and unlocking information and page 113, Hiding and showing information. Switching between full and normal view to open the List Manager. To switch between full and normal view:

1 Hold 1 Select Display options... 1 Select Full view? or Normal view?

Full view or normal view is displayed and the List Manager remains open. 112 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Hiding and showing information Using lists If you want to prevent users from displaying information, in particular lists, entries and settings, you can hide these items. For example, to prevent users from displaying the transmit frequency of a channel, you can hide the setting in which the frequency is stored. You can also hide entries in lists to reduce the number of items over which you need to scroll. By default, all lists are admin hidden. Therefore, users cannot access configuration information in the transceiver unless the administrator shows this information at user level. You can hide lists, entries and settings at one of two levels: user level and admin level

(for more information see page 108, Restricting access to information). Table 15 summarises the effects of hiding information at these levels. When you log into admin level, full view is automatically enabled, so all items hidden at user or admin level will be displayed. CAUTION If a hot key has been created to display a hidden item, anyone can display the item by using the hot key. If the item is not locked, anyone can edit the item. Table 15: Hiding items at user and admin levels Hiding an item at... Means that... user level

admin level the item is hidden from anyone logged into user level, in normal view users can display the item by switching to full view users can display the item in normal view by using the Config... Show? entry in the List Manager the item is visible to anyone logged into admin level, in normal or full view the item is hidden from anyone logged into user level, in full or normal view all items hidden at user or admin level will be displayed automatically Hiding or showing an item at user level To hide or show a list, entry or setting at user level:

1 Go to the list, entry or setting you want to hide or show. NOTE NOTE You may need to switch to full view to see the item (see page 112, Displaying full and normal view). If you want to hide a group of entries in a list, make sure that the entries in the list are grouped, then go to the name of the group you want to hide. For more information on grouping entries see page 103, Grouping and ungrouping entries. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 113 Using lists to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Config... 1 Select Hide? or Show?

1 Switch to normal view, if required. The List Manager remains open. Displaying an item hidden at user level To display a list, entry or setting that has been hidden at user level:

1 Switch to full view (for help see page 112, Displaying full and normal view). 1 Go to the list, entry or setting that was hidden. NOTE If the item is not displayed in full view it has been hidden at admin or factory level. Hiding or showing an item at admin level To hide or show a list, entry or setting at admin level:

1 Log into admin level if you have not already done so (for help see page 110, Logging into admin level). 1 Go to the list, entry or setting you want to hide or show. NOTE If you want to hide a group of entries in a list, make sure that the entries in the list are grouped, then go to the name of the group you want to hide. For more information on grouping entries see page 103, Grouping and ungrouping entries. to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Admin... 1 Select Admin hide? or Admin show?

The List Manager remains open. 114 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Locking and unlocking information Using lists If you want to prevent users from changing information, in particular lists, entries and settings, you can lock these items. For example, if you want to prevent users from changing the station self address of the transceiver you can lock the Address entry in the Control List. If you want to prevent users from changing any information in the Control List you can lock the entire list. In addition, locking items prevents them from being accidentally changed. You can lock lists, entries and settings at one of two levels: user level and admin level

(for more information see page 108, Restricting access to information). Table 16 summarises the effects of locking information at these levels. When you log into admin level, all locked items are temporarily unlocked. Table 16: Locking items at user and admin levels Locking an item at... Means that... user level

anyone logged into user level can unlock the item by using the Unlock? or Locks off? entries in the List Manager, then they can edit the item anyone logged into admin level can edit the item without unlocking it first the item cannot be edited by anyone logged into user level the item can be edited by anyone logged into admin level admin level

Locking or unlocking an item at user level To lock or unlock a list, entry or setting at user level:

1 Go to the list, entry or setting you want to lock or unlock. NOTE If you want to lock a group of entries in a list, make sure that the entries in the list are grouped, then go to the name of the group you want to lock. For more information on grouping entries see page 103, Grouping and ungrouping entries. to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Config... 1 Select Lock? or Unlock?

The item is locked or unlocked and the List Manager remains open. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 115 Using lists Locking or unlocking an item at admin level To lock or unlock a list, entry or setting at admin level:

1 Log into admin level if you have not already done so (for help see page 110, Logging into admin level). 1 Go to the list, entry or setting you want to lock or unlock. NOTE If you want to lock a group of entries in a list, make sure that the entries in the list are grouped, then go to the name of the group you want to lock. For more information on grouping entries see page 103, Grouping and ungrouping entries. to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Select Admin... 1 Select Admin lock? or Admin unlock?

The item is locked or unlocked and the List Manager remains open. Switching locks off or on at user level If you need to edit a number of items that have been locked you may want to use the locks off feature. This switches off all the locks set at the level into which you are logged, so you do not have to unlock items individually. When you have edited the items you can reinstate all the locks in one step using the locks on feature. NOTE If you switch off the locks and switch off the transceiver, the locks are automatically reinstated. To switch locks off or on at user level:

1 Hold to open the List Manager. 1 Select Config... 1 To switch locks off select Locks off?

To switch locks on select Locks on?

The List Manager remains open. 116 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 8 The Channel List CODAN This section contains the following topics:

About channels (118) Settings in the Channel List (118) Programming the Channel List (119) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 117 The Channel List About channels A channel is a frequency or pair of frequencies to which a name has been given, such as

Channel 1, 4500 and Headquarters. You need to enter the details of at least one channel before you can make or receive a call. Channels are stored in the Channel List. Settings in the Channel List When you create a channel you need to enter:

a name for the channel the receive and transmit frequencies of the channel, if applicable one or more modes to be used with the channel Channel names A channel name can consist of letters, numbers or a combination of both. Before you name any channels, consider using group names to make navigation in the Channel List easier (for more information see page 103, Grouping and ungrouping entries). CAUTION You should be aware of any restrictions placed on channel names in your transceiver when it is used with InterNav software. For more information see the documentation provided with this equipment. Frequencies The receive and transmit frequencies may be any frequencies within the HF range. However, the transmit frequencies can only be those allocated to you by the relevant government authority in your country. Spectral regulations may require the TxD option to be installed in the transceiver. In this case, you cannot create channels with new transmit frequencies. You can, however, create receive-only channels, and channels with the same transmit frequency as an existing channel. If the TxP option has been installed in the transceiver, you cannot create channels. Modes A mode specifies a combination of a sideband (for example, USB or LSB) and IF filter settings (that is, bandwidth and centre frequency). Each channel must have at least one mode. You may want to select several modes for each channel depending on the modes available to you. When the standard IF filter is fitted, the allowable modes are USB and LSB. If a different filter is fitted, other modes are available. For example, if you have a wide IF filter fitted, USBW and LSBW are available. If you have a narrow Morse filter fitted, USB CW and LSB CW are available. 118 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Programming the Channel List The Channel List Creating a channel This section covers creating a channel in a transceiver where receive and transmit frequencies can be entered. NOTE If you are operating the transceiver in a country that has stringent licensing regulations, you may not be permitted to create channels with transmit frequencies. If the TxD option has been installed in the transceiver, there are restrictions on the frequencies you can enter. If the TxP option has been installed in the transceiver, you cannot create channels. To create a channel:

1 Press VIEW until the channel screen is displayed. NOTE If the Channel List is empty, Free Tune is displayed. 1 Use the List Manager to create an entry (for help see page 97, Creating an entry in a list and page 52, Entering and editing text). 1 Enter the setting information provided in the following table as required, then press to enter the information. If this prompt is displayed... Receive Freq Transmit Freq Do this...

use this frequency, or enter a new receive frequency in kilohertz NOTE You can enter the frequency to three decimal places. Press * to enter a decimal point, then continue with entering the frequency.

use this frequency, or enter a new transmit frequency in kilohertz, or disable the transmit frequency by pressing repeatedly until the setting is empty NOTE If the TxD option has been installed in the transceiver, you cannot create channels with new transmit frequencies. You can however, create channels with the same transmit frequency as an existing channel, and you can disable transmit frequencies to create receive-only channels. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 119 The Channel List If this prompt is displayed... Mode Do this...

enter a mode NOTE If multiple modes can be added to the channel, select the new mode and press If you do not want to add another mode, press

. The new channel is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the channel you have created, press Manager. to close the List NOTE If you disabled the transmit frequency, dashes are displayed in place of the transmit frequency. Renaming a channel When you rename a channel, references to the channel in other lists are not automatically updated; you need to go to the Address, Network and Phone Link Lists and update any references to the channel. For example, if the channel you renamed is used in a network, go to the channel/mode list for the network, find the reference to the old channel name, then edit it so that the new name is displayed (for help see page 129, Editing a network). If you do not update the reference to the channel, the channel will not be scanned when scanning is switched on. Renaming a channel is a standard list function. For help see page 98, Renaming an entry in a list. Copying a channel Copying a channel is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Copying an entry in a list. Editing a channel Editing a channel is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Editing an entry in a list. Deleting a channel Deleting a channel is a standard list function. For help see page 100, Deleting an entry from a list. 120 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 9 The Network List CODAN This section contains the following topics:

About networks (122) Settings in the Network List (123) Special network names (127) Programming the Network List (128) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 121 The Network List About networks A network is two or more stations that use the same frequencies and call system to communicate. This simplifies communication because each station knows the method with which they can make and scan for incoming calls, and the frequencies they can use. Information about the networks you may use is stored in the Network List. Networks are based on call systems. A call system is a method of making and receiving calls. For example, if you are in a network that uses the Codan Selcall call system, you can make calls by entering the address of the station you want to call, then selecting the channel/mode you want to use. When your call is detected by the receiving station, that station rings to alert the operator. In an ALE/CALM network, you can make calls by entering the address of the station you want to call only. The transceiver will select the best channel on which to make the call. When you create a network, the transceiver prompts you to select a call system, then prompts you for further information based on your selection. Figure 27 shows an example of the information required to create networks based on the Codan Selcall, ALE/CALM, and Voice Only call systems. This information is explained on page 123, Settings in the Network List. NOTE The call systems from which you can select depend on the options installed in the transceiver. Figure 27: An example of information stored in the Network List Network List Network A Network B Scan Network:

Call System:

Call Detect Time:

Privacy Mode:

Privacy Password:

Nominal Preamble:

Channel/Mode:

Scan Network:

Call System:

Call Detect Time:

Sounding Interval:

Privacy Mode:

Privacy Password:

Nominal Preamble:

Channel/Mode:

Network C Scan Network:

Call System:

Call Detect Time:

Channel/Mode:

Scan voice Codan Selcall

<default>

Registered

4 seconds Chan 3/USB Chan 4/LSB Chan 5/USB Scan ALE/CALM

<default>

2.5 hours Group

2 seconds Chan 1/USB Chan 2/USB Chan 3/USB Chan 4/LSB Dont Scan Voice Only

<default>

Chan 1/USB Chan 2/LSB 122 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Settings in the Network List The Network List NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Network List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Network Name CAUTION You should be aware of any restrictions placed on network names in your transceiver when it is used with InterNav software. Scan Network The Scan Network setting applies to all types of networks. It enables you to specify whether or not you want the channels in the network to be scanned when scanning is switched on. You can also set the transceiver to scan for voice in voice networks even when the Mute Type is set to Selcall mute. NOTE The transceiver will scan a maximum of 100 channels at a time. If the total number of channels in all the networks you are scanning exceeds 100, only 100 of the channels will be scanned. Call System The Call System setting applies to all types of networks. The call system is the method used by the network to make and receive calls, for example, Codan Selcall, ALE/CALM or Voice Only. The call systems from which you can select depend on the options installed in the transceiver. If your network uses the Codan Selcall call system, you can make calls by selecting an appropriate channel/mode then entering the address of the station you want to call. When your call is detected by the receiving station, that station rings to alert the operator. If your network uses the ALE/CALM call system the transceiver can select the best channel/mode for you. If your network uses the Voice Only call system, you can make calls by selecting an appropriate channel/mode then pressing PTT and speaking. You cannot enter the address of the station you want to call. CAUTION Any station that is tuned to your frequency and has mute off can listen to your voice conversation. Call Detect Time The Call Detect Time setting applies to all types of networks. The call detect time is the length of time the transceiver pauses on each channel, when scanning, to detect an incoming call. You can set the call detect time to <default> or to a specific value. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 123 The Network List NOTE The call detect time is the inverse of the scan rate. For example, a call detect time of 0.2 seconds is equivalent to a scan rate of 5 channels per second. Sounding Interval The Sounding Interval setting applies to ALE/CALM networks only. The sounding interval is the frequency with which the transceiver sends sounding signals to other stations to assess the quality of the channels in the network. The recommended value is 5 hours. The longer the value, the longer the transceiver takes to update its channel quality information. If the value is set to 5 hours the transceiver will take 5 days to completely update channel quality information. Longer sounding intervals decrease the interruptions on network channels. NOTE Link quality information is also updated each time a call is made or received. Privacy Mode The Privacy Mode setting applies to Codan Selcall and ALE/CALM networks only. The Privacy Mode is the method used to encrypt the data content of calls between stations. If you select Registered or Group, you will need to enter an appropriate password into the Privacy Password setting. Privacy Mode Registered Group None Plain (lowest mode)

(MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option only) Is used for... encrypting Phone calls that you make when you have registered with a network that encrypts telephone numbers (you are provided with a password that you need to enter into the Privacy Password setting) encrypting data in calls between two stations (you agree upon a password to enter into the Privacy Password setting) calls made under a Codan protocol, which uses special formatting AMD messages in ALE calls (basic 64 ASCII subset AZ, 09, space ! " # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]

^) When you are setting up ALE/CALM networks, you should ensure that you set up networks with the same Privacy Mode for communication. If there is a mismatch in Privacy Modes, the receiving station will use the most suitable privacy mode out of the networks through which the call may be received. For example, if an initiating station starts an ALE call containing data through a network that has its Privacy Mode set to Plain, and the receiving station determines that the address is valid in networks with the Privacy Mode set to Group or Plain, then it will select the network with the Privacy Mode set to Plain on which to establish the link. Any data communications within this link will use the basic 64 ASCII subset of characters. 124 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Network List However, if the receiving station determines that the address is available in a Group network only, it will select the Group network on which to establish the link. Data communications within this link will not be successful because the initiating station does not have the password for the Privacy Mode of Group at the receiving station. If an initiating station starts an ALE call (without data), the receiving station determines in which networks the address is valid, selects a network with the lowest Privacy Mode available, then establishes the link. Data communications may proceed as per the Privacy Modes of the selected sending and receiving networks. Privacy Password The Privacy Password setting applies to Codan Selcall and ALE/CALM networks where the Privacy Mode has been set to Group or Registered. The privacy password is the password that enables you to use the Privacy Mode mentioned above. It can be up to 15 characters long. Nominal Preamble The Nominal Preamble setting applies to Codan Selcall and ALE/CALM networks only. The nominal preamble is the length of the preamble signal sent by the transceiver when you make a call. This is the signal for which other transceivers scan in order to detect your call. The nominal preamble should be set to no less than the number of channels in the network multiplied by the call detect time. If you set the Nominal Preamble to <default>

the transceiver will calculate the length of preamble at the time of the call, based upon the number of channels in the network. If you are calling a station that uses identical network information, the preamble of the initiating station will match the detection requirements of the receiving station. If such stations are scanning a different number of networks, then the nominal preamble should be calculated on a per station basis. If a transceiver that you want to call scans multiple networks, the preamble can be increased to the time it takes that transceiver to scan all of its channels. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 125 The Network List Channel/Mode The Channel/Mode setting applies to all networks. This setting contains the channels and modes used by the network. The modes from which you can select are those specified for the channel in the Channel List. Before you add channel/modes to a network, consider the following:

While there is no limit to the number of channels you can add to a network, the transceiver will only scan a maximum of 100 channels at a time. If the total number of channels in all the networks you are scanning exceeds 100, only 100 of the channels will be scanned. If several modes can be used with one channel and you want the channel to be scanned using each mode, create several entries for the channel, one for each mode. For example, if you want to scan Chan 1 using modes USB and LSB, create the entries Chan 1/USB and Chan 1/LSB.

An easy way to add and maintain channels in a network is to use groups of channels. Only the group name is stored in the Network List so you can add and delete channels from the group in the Channel List without having to update the Network List each time. When the network is scanned the transceiver scans whichever channels are in the group at the time. For more information see page 103, Grouping and ungrouping entries.

When you add a group of channels to a network you need to select a mode for the group. The mode should be an allowed mode for all the channels in the group as the transceiver will only scan the channels for which the mode is allowed. If the mode is not an allowed mode for one or more channels, these channels are listed in a message that is displayed when you switch scanning on. In this situation these channels will not be scanned. To ensure that they are scanned, add them to the network individually.

A network cannot be scanned unless there are channel/modes in it. However, you can still use the network to make calls. The channel/modes from which you can select are all those in the Channel List. If you rename a channel in the Channel List and that channel is used in a network, you must delete the channel from the network and if necessary add the new channel name. If you make frequent and significant changes to the channels and networks in the transceiver you may want to use NSP to maintain this information.

126 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Special network names The Network List Specifying a default network to use with !<network name>

When you make a call from the Channel List, the transceiver usually prompts you to select a network and channel for the call. To avoid the transceiver prompting you for a network or channel, the system administrator should set up a network with a leading ! in the name, for example, !AidNet. The !<network name> should contain all of the channels that are programmed into the transceiver, thus avoiding any prompting for channels. These networks enable the operator to make a call on any channel in the transceiver with minimal prompting by the transceiver. Networks called *CALM, *Selcall and *Voice These networks are used with Quick Start (see page 57, Quick Start). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 127 The Network List Programming the Network List NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Network List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Creating a network When you create a network, the transceiver prompts you for various details. It is recommended that you read page 123, Settings in the Network List before you create a network. until Main Menu is displayed. To create a network:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Network, then press 1 Use the List Manager to create an entry (for help see page 97, Creating an entry in a

. list and page 52, Entering and editing text). 1 Enter the setting information provided in the following table as required, then press to enter the information. If this prompt is displayed... Scan Network?

Call System?

Call Detect Time?

Sounding Interval?

Privacy Mode?

Privacy Password?

Nominal Preamble?

Channel?

Do this...

select whether the network is scanned or not If you want to scan a voice network for voice when the Mute Type is set to Selcall, select Scan voice (see page 61, Muting the transceiver). NOTE

select the call system you want to use increase or decrease the call detect time, or scroll to the far left of the line until <default> is displayed select the value you want to use select the mode you want to use enter the password you want to use with the Privacy Mode increase or decrease the nominal preamble time select the channel you want to use NOTE If the channel is in a group, select the group name then press

, then select the channel that you want to use. If you want to use a group of channels, select the group name, then hold

. 128 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If this prompt is displayed... Mode?

Add another Channel/

Mode?

The Network List Do this...

select the mode for the channel or group of channels that you want to use

select the channel/mode that you want to use NOTE If you do not want to add another channel/

mode, press

. The new network is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the network you have created, press Manager. to close the List Renaming a network When you rename a network, references to the network in other lists are not automatically updated; you need to go to the Address entry in the Control List to update any of your station self addresses that refer to the network, and to the Address, NET and Phone Link Lists to update any entries that refer to the network. For example, if the network you renamed is used in an entry in the Address List, go to this entry, find the reference to the old network name, then change it so that the new name is displayed (for help see page 155, Editing an entry in the Address List). If you do not update the reference to the network, the transceiver will prompt you to select a network each time you use the entry to make a call. Renaming a network is a standard list function. For help see page 98, Renaming an entry in a list. Copying a network Copying a network is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Copying an entry in a list. Editing a network Editing a network is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Editing an entry in a list. Deleting a network Deleting a network is a standard list function. For help see page 100, Deleting an entry from a list. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 129 The Network List This page has been left blank intentionally. 130 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual

 

 

10 The NET List CODAN This section contains the following topics:

About NETs (132) Settings in the NET List (134) Programming the NET List (138) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 131 The NET List About NETs A NET is a special ALE addressing capability. With NET addressing, two or more stations are pre-configured to respond to the same NET address. When a station calls a NET, all stations with that NET address and their self addresses in the Member Address setting for the NET respond in their designated response slot. In the NGT transceiver, a NET contains the configuration information required for making and receiving NET calls. This information defines the process for the handshake during link establishment. The full 3-way handshake process involves a leading call from the initiating station, a response from the receiving station, and an acknowledgement from the initiating station. Following the acknowledgement, all stations that are able to, enter the link. A station can have a NET programmed in its NET List and either:

be a member of the NET, that is, their self address is in the Member Address setting for the NET not be a member of the NET, that is, their self address is not in the Member Address setting for the NET

NETs are used with ALE/CALM networks, which define the channels that the NET may use when establishing an ALE link, and the Privacy Mode for messaging within a call. For more information on networks see page 121, The Network List. You can make a call to a NET by selecting the NET, Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, or Send Position call type and entering the NET address. You can set up an entry in the Address List to make a NET call. For more information on the Address List see page 145, The Address List. Figure 28 shows an example of the information required to create a NET. This information is explained on page 134, Settings in the NET List. 132 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Figure 28: An example of information stored in the NET List The NET List NET List NET A Address:

Network:

Member Address:

NET B Outgoing Calls:

Incoming Calls:

Link:

Response:

Tune Time:

LQA Exchange:

Slot Width:

Address:

Network:

Member Address:

Outgoing Calls:

Incoming Calls:

Link:

1 of 5 2 of 5 3 of 5 4 of 5 5 of 5 111 North BOB JOE SAM TOM TIM Enabled Members only Only if response Send 2 seconds Yes Variable 222 Central BET MAR SAM MIK JAC JAN PET Disabled Enabled Immediately 1 of 7 2 of 7 3 of 7 4 of 7 5 of 7 6 of 7 7 of 7 NOTE For successful NET calling and response, the Address, Network, Member Address, Link, Tune Time, LQA Exchange and Slot Width settings in the NET List must be identical for all stations that are members of the NET. Specifically, the order of the member stations in the Member Address setting must be identical for all member stations, as this order is used to determine the response slots for all stations. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 133 The NET List Settings in the NET List In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the NET List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). NOTE Name The NET name may be any meaningful name that you want to assign to the NET. The name may be up to 20 alphanumeric characters including spaces. The NET name is only used for reference within the transceiver. It is not part of the NET configuration data. Address CAUTION This setting must be the same in all member stations. The Address setting contains the global address used by all members of the NET, and other stations that have the NET programmed in the NET List, to establish an ALE link during NET calls. The address may be up to 15 alphanumeric characters however, for efficiency of NET calls, it is preferable that the address be limited to 3 characters. You should choose an address that is not the same as any self addresses in the NET or wider communication audience. Network CAUTION This setting must be the same in all member stations. The Network setting refers to the network containing the channels to be used with the NET. This is selected from the pre-defined list of networks in the Network List. You can set up two NETs with the same address but with different networks, say one for Group Privacy Mode and one for Plain Privacy Mode. If the networks have the same channels, then the Member Address setting in each NET should be identical. Member Address CAUTION This setting must be the same in all member stations. The Member Address setting contains a sequential list of the self addresses of all members of the NET. The station uses this list to calculate the response slots, so each station in the NET can determine when an automatic response is required after the initiating call. A member address may be up to 15 alphanumeric characters however, for efficiency of NET calls, it is preferable that the member addresses be limited to 3 characters. To preserve an empty slot use the null address (@@@) in a member address position. 134 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The NET List Outgoing Calls The Outgoing Calls setting enables you to set up your station to make calls to the NET, or disable calling to the NET. Unless you need to restrict calling to the NET, you should set the Outgoing Calls setting to Enabled for all stations in the NET, regardless of their member status. If you want to set up your NET so that only one station makes calls to the NET, set the Outgoing Calls setting for the NET in that station to Enabled. All other stations with this NET programmed would then have the Outgoing Calls setting for the NET set to Disabled. Incoming Calls CAUTION If the Link setting is set to Only if response, you must ensure that at least one member station is set to receive an incoming call from the NET. The Incoming Calls setting enables you to set up your station to receive all incoming calls from the NET, receive calls only if you are a member of the NET, or disable receiving calls from the NET. If the station has the NET programmed, then it can receive calls from the NET if the Incoming Calls setting is set to Enabled. If your station has the NET programmed but you are not a member, and you do not want to receive all of the NET calls, set the Incoming Calls setting to Members only. As your station is not a member of the NET, it will not enter the link. If you are a member of the NET but do not want to receive any calls from the NET, select Disabled. Link CAUTION This setting must be the same in all member stations. The Link setting determines how the initiating station links with the receiving stations. It can link:

only if it receives a response from a member station even if it doesnt receive a response from a member station immediately NOTE Stations with the NET programmed will only send a response to a NET call if:

their self address is included in the Member Address setting for the NET, that is, they are a member of the NET the Response setting in the NET List is set to Send

2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 135 The NET List If it is important that you know with which member stations you have linked, then you must set the Link setting to Only if response. The initiating station will make the call to the NET using the best channel, on average, for all NET members. If there is no response to this channel, the initiating station will select the next ranked channel and attempt the call again, and so on until at least one response is received. Any member station detecting the call will respond, if they are enabled to do so, then the initiating station completes the link. Non-member stations with this NET programmed will also enter the link, but as they are not members, they will not send a response. If you use this setting, you must be sure that there are stations in your NET that will respond. If the initiating station does not receive a response to the call after trying all channels for the NET, it will terminate the link establishment process. If you want to send a NET call to all stations with the NET programmed, but you do not need to know which of the member stations have entered the link, set the Link setting to Even if no response. The initiating station will make the call to the NET using the best average channel for all NET members. All stations detecting the call will enter the link, if enabled to do so. If you want to send a NET call to all stations with the NET programmed without the delay of the link establishment process, set the Link setting to Immediately. In this case, the initiating station will establish an implicit link with any stations programmed with the NET that detected the call. There is no 3-way handshake. Response CAUTION If the Link setting is set to Only if response, you must ensure that at least one member station is set to respond to a call from the NET. The Response setting sets whether or not receiving member stations respond to NET calls during link establishment. Generally, you would set the Response setting to Send, so that there is confirmation of the station entering the link. However, if for some reason you do not want the receiving station to transmit on air, you would set the Response setting to Dont send. If a station is set to not respond, it will still enter the link when it receives the acknowledgement from the initiating station. NOTE The Response setting is only applicable to NET calls. It does not affect a stations ability to respond to an ANY, Group Selective or Wildcard call

(see page 158, Calls you can make and receive). Tune Time CAUTION This setting must be the same in all member stations. The Tune Time setting is the time that the members of the NET wait after the initiating call before sending the automatic responses to the initiating station. This time should be set to match the longest tuning time between all members in the NET. 136 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The NET List LQA Exchange CAUTION This setting must be the same in all member stations. The LQA Exchange setting determines whether or not the exchange of LQA information occurs during calls within the NET. If this setting is enabled, the transceiver adds an appropriate amount of time to the slot widths so that LQA information can be exchanged. Slot Width CAUTION This setting must be the same in all member stations. The Slot Width setting determines the width of response slots for each member of the NET. If the Slot Width setting is set to Fixed, then all slot widths match the width required for the largest member address for the NET. However, this extends the time to complete the handshake considerably. Unless required for interoperability reasons, the recommended setting is Variable. In this case, the transceiver calculates the exact slot width required for the response from each station. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 137 The NET List Programming the NET List NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the NET List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Creating a NET When you create a NET, the transceiver prompts you for various details. It is recommended that you read page 134, Settings in the NET List before you create a NET. until Main Menu is displayed. To create a NET:

1 Press 1 Scroll to NET, then press 1 Use the List Manager to create an entry (for help see page 97, Creating an entry in a

. list and page 52, Entering and editing text). 1 Enter the setting information provided in the following table as required, then press to enter the information. If this prompt is displayed... Address?

Network?

Member Address?

Add another Member Address?

Outgoing Calls?

Incoming Calls?

Do this...

enter the address of the NET you want to use for the NET call NOTE If you leave this setting blank, the NET cannot be used.

select the network you want to use for the NET call NOTE If you select <Disable>, the NET cannot be used.

enter the self address of the first member of the NET enter the self address of the next member of the NET NOTE If you do not want to add another member address, press

select whether or not you can make NET calls from this NET select whether or not you can receive NET calls on this NET as a member of the NET

(Members only or Disabled), or select whether or not you can receive NET calls on this NET if you are not a member of the NET

(Enabled or Disabled) 138 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If this prompt is displayed... Link?

Response?

Tune Time?

LQA Exchange?

Slot Width?

The NET List Do this...

select how you want member stations to operate during link establishment select whether or not your station will respond to a NET call NOTE Only stations that are members of a NET are able to send a response.

increase or decrease the tuning time select whether or not LQA information is exchanged during NET calls select whether the width of the response slot is fixed or variable The new NET is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the NET you have created, press to close the List Manager. Renaming a NET When you rename a NET, references to the NET in other lists are not automatically updated; you need to go to the Address List to update any entries that refer to the NET. For example, if the NET you renamed is used in an entry in the Address List, go to this entry, find the reference to the old NET name, then change it so that the new name is displayed (for help see page 155, Editing an entry in the Address List). If you do not update the reference to the NET, the transceiver will prompt you to enter an address each time you use the entry to make a call. Renaming a NET is a standard list function. For help see page 98, Renaming an entry in a list. Copying a NET Copying a NET is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Copying an entry in a list. Editing a NET Editing a NET is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Editing an entry in a list. Deleting a NET Deleting a NET is a standard list function. For help see page 100, Deleting an entry from a list. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 139 The NET List This page has been left blank intentionally. 140 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 11 The Phone Link List CODAN This section contains the following topics:

About phone links (142) Settings in the Phone Link List (142) Programming the Phone Link List (143) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 141 The Phone Link List About phone links A phone link is a connection to a station with a telephone interconnect unit that can route Phone calls from transceivers to the public telephone network. The addresses of the phone link stations you use, and the networks and channel/modes you use to make Phone calls, can be stored in the Phone Link List. If you want to be prompted for some of these details when you make a Phone call you can leave the relevant settings in the Phone Link List blank. If you want to be prompted for all of these details leave the Phone Link List blank. Settings in the Phone Link List In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Phone Link List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). NOTE Address The Address setting in a phone link is the address of the transceiver connected to the radio/telephone interface. Network The Network setting in a phone link identifies the network through which the call is made to the transceiver connected to the radio/telephone interface. Channel/Mode The Channel/Mode setting in a phone link identifies the channel and mode that are used to make a call to the transceiver connected to the radio/telephone interface. 142 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Programming the Phone Link List NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Phone Link List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). The Phone Link List Creating a phone link until Main Menu is displayed. To create a phone link:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Phone Link, then press 1 Use the List Manager to create an entry (for help see page 97, Creating an entry in a

. list and page 52, Entering and editing text). 1 Enter the setting information provided in the following table as required, then press to enter the information. If this prompt is displayed... Address?

Network?

Channel/Mode?

Do this...

enter the address of the phone link station, or leave the address empty if you want to be prompted to choose an address when you make the call select the network in which you want to use this phone link, or select <blank> if you want to be prompted to select a network when you make the call select the channel/mode that you want to use to make the call, or select <blank> if you want to be prompted to select a channel/mode when you make the call The new phone link is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the phone link you have created, press Manager. to close the List Renaming a phone link When you rename a phone link, references to the phone link in the Address List are not automatically updated; you need to go to the Address List and update any references to the phone link. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 143 The Phone Link List For example, if the phone link you renamed is used in an entry in the Address List, go to this entry, find the reference to the old phone link, then change it so that the new name is displayed (for help see page 155, Editing an entry in the Address List). If you do not update the reference to the phone link, the transceiver will prompt you to select a phone link each time you use the entry to make a call. Renaming a phone link is a standard list function. For help see page 98, Renaming an entry in a list. Copying a phone link Copying a phone link is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Copying an entry in a list. Editing a phone link Editing a phone link is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Editing an entry in a list. Deleting a phone link Deleting a phone link is a standard list function. For help see page 100, Deleting an entry from a list. 144 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 12 The Address List CODAN This section contains the following topics:

About the Address List (146) Settings in the Address List (147) Setting up the emergency key (150) Programming the Address List (154) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 145 The Address List About the Address List The Address List is like any personal address book: it is a place to store the names and addresses of stations you often call. When you have entered the details of a station, calling the station becomes as simple as going to the entry for it, then pressing CALL. If you want to be prompted to enter particular details at the time you make a call (for example, type a message or select a channel) you can leave the relevant settings blank. If you make several different types of calls to one address you can create several entries with the same name and address but with different call types. The Emergency 1 entry is stored in the Address List. This is the entry the transceiver calls when you press emergency key. For information on making calls from the Address List and making calls using page 173, Making a call. Setting up this key is covered on page 150, Setting up the see 146 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Settings in the Address List CallTypeAddress The Address List The call type is the type of call that you want to make to the station that you want to call. For example, if you want to know where a mobile station is located, you send a Get Position call to the station. The Address setting is the address of the station that you want to call. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can set up the Address List to use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes with the Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types. The transceiver will automatically determine the call type from the ALE address syntax that you enter in the address. If you enter the ALE address syntax...

@A@

@@A

@AB The transceiver will send... a global ALL call to all listening stations (see page 159, ALL address syntax) a selective ALL call to listening stations that have an A as the last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, TNAA, EANBA, 1NCA, 23A (see page 159, ALL address syntax) a global ANY call to all listening stations (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a selective ANY call to listening stations that have an A as the last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, TNAA, EANBA, 1NCA, 23A (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a double selective ANY call to listening stations that have

AB as the last two characters of their self address (A and

B may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, BAAB, 14BAB, Q2CAB, 1AB (see page 160, ANY address syntax) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 147 The Address List If you enter the ALE address syntax...

@A?

ABC,JK3MN,PQR

(example only) NET address

A?B? (example only) The transceiver will send... a double selective wildcard ANY call to listening stations that have an A as the second to last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number) and any upper-case letter or number as the last character, for example, USAM, 19MA0, ENA9, 3DAZ (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a Group Selective call to the stations specifically addressed

(see page 161, Group Selective address syntax) a NET call to all stations with that NET programmed in the NET List (see page 162, NET address syntax) a Wildcard call to listening stations that have a self address matching the length of the sent address and with any upper-

case letter or number as each of the characters, for example, SAM, NAA, 234, 3AZ (see page 163, Wildcard address syntax) a selective Wildcard call to listening stations that have a self address matching the length of the sent address with A and

B as the first and third characters respectively, and with any upper-case letter or number in the second and last characters, in this case (A and B may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, A2BM, ADB1, AZBE, A3B8

(see page 163, Wildcard address syntax) Message The Message setting in the Address List entry is available when you select Message as the call type. It may be used for requesting configuration and diagnostic information from other transceivers in your network, or you can pre-store a standard message that is sent each time you make a call using this entry in the Address List. For example, you may need to notify your base station that you are shutting down for the day. Therefore, you would create an entry in your Address List to send a Message call (call type) to your base station (address) containing the message Shut down. The Privacy Mode and Privacy Password in the network used for the call specify how the data is transmitted, for example, plain or encrypted (see page 124, Privacy Mode). Messages are sent using a Codan protocol in Codan Selcall networks, and as an AMD message in ALE/CALM networks. A Message call closes the link as soon as the message has been sent. Phone Link The Phone Link setting in an Address List entry is available when you select Phone as the call type. It identifies the phone link station through which the call is made. 148 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Address List Network The Network setting in an Address List entry identifies the network through which the call is made to the station that you want to call. Channel/Mode The Channel/Mode setting in an Address List entry identifies the channel and mode that are used to make the call to the address given in the entry. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 149 The Address List Setting up the emergency key the transceiver begins a call to the station specified in the When you press Emergency 1 entry in the Address List. You can configure this entry to make any type of call available to you. Emergency calls will trigger an emergency alert tone at the receiving station. When AMD messaging is used in ALE calls, an emergency alert tone is triggered by #HELP, #SOS, #MAYDAY, #PANPAN, and #EMERGENCY text. The key can be set up to call one or more stations in an emergency. CAUTION You should pre-set all the settings in the Emergency entries so that the call is made automatically during an emergency without the transceiver prompting for information. Calling one station in an emergency key to call one station in an emergency:

To set up the 1 Press VIEW until the Address List is displayed. 1 Press 1 Scroll to Emergency 1, then press

. NOTE If the Emergency 1 entry has been deleted, create a new entry and name it Emergency 1 (for help see page 154, Creating an entry in the Address List). 1 Edit the details in each setting to suit the call you want to make (for help see page 155, Editing an entry in the Address List). Calling several stations in an emergency key to call several stations you can do so in two ways. You If you want to set up the can:

make one call to several stations simultaneously

make several different types of calls in succession 150 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Address List Calling several stations simultaneously If you want to call several stations simultaneously, set up the Emergency 1 entry in the Address List to make a call. In an ALE/CALM network, calls to a group of stations can be made using ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes through the Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed. You can also send a message as part of the ALE call. For more information on the special ALE address syntax see page 147, CallType Address. In a Codan Selcall network, calls to a group of stations can be made using a group selcall address through the Emergency, Message, and Selective call types. A group address is an address that ends in two or more zeros. For example, to call all stations with addresses that range from 1201 to 1299, you would enter 1200 as the address. To call all stations with addresses that range from 150001 to 159999, you would enter 150000 as the address. key to call several stations simultaneously:

To set up the 1 Press VIEW until the Address List is displayed. 1 Press 1 Scroll to Emergency 1, then press

. NOTE If the Emergency 1 entry has been deleted, create a new entry and name it Emergency 1 (for help see page 154, Creating an entry in the Address List). 1 Enter the details of the call you want to make (for help see page 155, Editing an entry in the Address List). 1 Enter the group selcall address in the CallTypeAddress setting. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 151 The Address List Making several different types of calls NOTE This capability is available for use in Codan Selcall networks, enabling you to make different types of calls, or even the same call type on several channels. In ALE/CALM networks, the channel selection is typically done automatically, so it is not necessary to set up the Emergency entries in the Address List to make chain calls. If you want to make several different types of calls in succession you need to create an entry in the Address List for each different type of call you want to make, and name the entries Emergency 1, Emergency 2, Emergency 3 and so on. When you press Emergency 1 entry, then pauses for about 10 seconds. It then calls the station in the Emergency 2 entry, and so on, until it calls the station in the last Emergency entry. Calls made this way are referred to as chain calls. When the transceiver pauses between calls it displays the seconds remaining in the pause at the top right of the screen, as shown in Figure 29.

, the transceiver calls the station (or stations) specified in the Figure 29: The front panel screen during a chain call You can terminate a chain call by pressing PTT. If you press PTT during:

an Emergency or Selective call, you can continue with the current call but the chain call itself is terminated (that is, the transceiver will not call the next Emergency entry) a call in which data is being sent to another station (for example, a Message call), the current call and chain call are terminated

NOTE If you want to make a call that sends data and a call that enables you to speak to an operator, set up the Emergency entries to make the data call first: once you press PTT to speak to an operator, the chain call is terminated. You can also terminate a chain call by pressing any key. The exceptions to this are that:

to adjust you can press the volume at any time, without terminating the call if you are prompted to select and/or enter details about the call (for example, a channel/mode), you can press any keys to do so without terminating the call to remove messages on the screen, and press and

152 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Address List To set up the 1 Decide on the stations you want to call in an emergency, the type of call you want to key to call several stations in succession:

make to each station, and the order in which you want to make the calls. NOTE If you want to use a special ALE address syntax, you should set up the Emergency entries to make calls that create an implicit link, or link immediately first, for example, an ALL call. Address syntaxes that require a response should be set up in the last Emergency entry of the chain call, if required. 1 Enter the details of the first call you want to make into the Emergency 1 entry (for help see page 155, Editing an entry in the Address List). 1 Create an entry in the Address List, name it Emergency 2 and enter the details of the second call you want to make (for help see page 154, Creating an entry in the Address List). 1 Create an entry for each subsequent call you want to make, naming the entries Emergency 3, Emergency 4 and so on. The number of Emergency entries you can create is limited by the number of entries you can store in the Address List. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 153 The Address List Programming the Address List Creating an entry in the Address List To create an entry in the Address List:

1 Press VIEW until the Address List is displayed. 1 Press 1 Use the List Manager to create an entry (for help see page 97, Creating an entry in a

. list and page 52, Entering and editing text). 1 Enter the setting information provided in the following table as required, then press to enter the information. If this prompt is displayed... New name?

<Call type>? and

<Address>

Message?

Phone Link?

Do this...

enter a name for the new entry (for example, the name of the person or station you want to call using this entry) select the call type you want to use, or select

<No call type> if you want to be prompted to select a call type when you make the call enter the address to which you want to send the call, or leave the address empty if you want to be prompted for an address when you make the call NOTE NOTE If you selected Phone? as the call type, enter the telephone number you want to call. You can enter up to 16 digits. For information on the address syntaxes for MIL-STD-188-141B ALE calls see page 147, CallTypeAddress.

enter the message you want to send, or leave the message empty if you want to be prompted to choose a stored message when you make the call (see page 168, Message call) select the phone link station through which you want to make the call, or select <blank> if you want to be prompted to select a phone link when you make the call 154 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If this prompt is displayed... Network?

Channel/Mode?

The Address List Do this...

select the network you want to use to make the call, or select <blank> if you want to be prompted to select a network when you make the call select the channel/mode you want to use to make the call, or select <blank> if you want to be prompted to select a channel/mode when you make the call The new entry is created and the List Manager remains open. 1 If you want to view the entry you have created, press to close the List Manager. Renaming an entry in the Address List Renaming an entry in the Address List is a standard list function. For help see page 98, Renaming an entry in a list. Copying an entry in the Address List Copying an entry in the Address List is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Copying an entry in a list. Editing an entry in the Address List Editing an entry in the Address List is a standard list function. For help see page 99, Editing an entry in a list. Deleting an entry in the Address List Deleting an entry in the Address List is a standard list function. For help see page 100, Deleting an entry from a list. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 155 The Address List This page has been left blank intentionally. 156 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 13 Making and receiving calls CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Calls you can make and receive (158) Making a call (173) Receiving a call (190) Detecting transmissions from other stations (196) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 157 Making and receiving calls Calls you can make and receive Special ALE address syntaxes There are five types of special address syntax available for use in ALE/CALM networks with a 2110 SSB Transceiver:

ALL address syntax (FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option or MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option)

ANY address syntax (MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option)

Group Selective address syntax (MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option)

NET address syntax (MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option)

Wildcard address syntax (MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option) The types of ALE address syntaxes you can use depends on the options installed in the transceiver. Each address syntax has an icon associated with it that is displayed when you make and receive calls (see Table 17). Table 17: Call icons for Selective calls made or received using a special ALE address syntax Address syntax Icon ALL ANY Group Selective NET Wildcard Each special ALE address syntax is described below. 158 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls ALL address syntax NOTE NOTE NOTE The ALL address syntax may be used if the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option or MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed in the transceiver. You cannot use the ALL address syntax in the Channel Test, Get Position, or Get Status call type. For information on entering text in a call address see page 56, Entering text in an ALE call address. If you want to send an ALE call to any station that is tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network, make a call through the Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types using the ALL address syntax

(see page 167, Emergency call, page 168, Message call, page 169, Phone call, page 169, Selective call, and page 170, Send Position call). The ALL call does not specifically call any stations, and does not request any automatic responses from stations that enter the link. Stations can be configured to accept or to ignore ALL calls. NOTE When you use an ALL address syntax through the Selective call type, the call icon will change to the ALL call icon (

) when the call is started. The global ALL address syntax is @?@. All stations detecting the call will enter an ALE link with the initiating station, if enabled to do so. The group of linking stations can be narrowed by using a selective ALL address syntax. In this address, the ? is replaced by an upper-case letter or number, for example, @A@. All stations detecting the call that have this letter or number as the last character in their self address for the ALE/CALM network will enter the link. If you send a selective ALL call to a group of stations, you can send another selective ALL call to bring more stations into the link. For example, if you initially call @A@, all stations tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network with an A as the last character of their self address will enter the link. If you follow this with a call to @B@, then a further group of stations with B as the last character of their self address will also enter the link. If the receiving stations are already in a link, this link will be closed and a new link created with the new call. Alternatively, you can send multiple ALL addresses together to make a call to a range of stations, for example, @A@,@B@. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 159 Making and receiving calls ANY address syntax NOTE NOTE The ANY address syntax may be used if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed in the transceiver. You cannot use the ANY address syntax in the Channel Test, Get Position, or Get Status call type. For information on entering text in a call address see page 56, Entering text in an ALE call address. NOTE CAUTION If a station detects an ANY call to its matching self address, it will send a response over the air. If you want to send an ALE call to any station that is tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network, and receive a response, make a call through the Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types using the ANY address syntax (see page 167, Emergency call, page 168, Message call, page 169, Phone call, page 169, Selective call, and page 170, Send Position call). The ANY call does not specifically call any stations, but it does request an automatic response from stations that detect the call. These responses are returned in any slot position (collisions may occur). The operator at the initiating station can use these responses to gather information on the status of the stations using the network. The initiating station then completes the link establishment with an acknowledgement sent to all stations from which it received a response. Stations can be configured to respond to or to ignore ANY calls. NOTE When you use an ANY address syntax through the Selective call type, the call icon will change to the ANY call icon (

) when the call is started. The global ANY address syntax is @@?. All stations detecting the call will send a response to the initiating station. The group of stations detecting the call can be narrowed by using a selective ANY address syntax. In this address, the ? is replaced by an upper-

case letter or number, for example, @@A. All stations detecting the call that have this letter or number as the last character in their self address for the ALE/CALM network will send a response, then enter a link with the initiating station when the acknowledgement is received. You can send multiple ANY addresses together to make a call to a range of stations, for example, @@A,@@B. The allowable length of the called address is dependent on the length of the self address used for the call. If the length of your self address is... 13 characters 46 characters The length of the called address can be... 19 characters 13 characters 160 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Group Selective address syntax Making and receiving calls NOTE NOTE The Group Selective address syntax may be used if the MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option is installed in the transceiver. You cannot use the Group Selective address syntax in the Get Position or Get Status call type. For information on entering text in a call address see page 56, Entering text in an ALE call address. NOTE CAUTION If a station detects a Group Selective call to its matching self address, it will send a response over the air. If you want to send an ALE call to specific stations that are named in the call but are not members of a pre-determined group, make a call through the Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types using the Group Selective address syntax

(see page 167, Emergency call, page 168, Message call, page 169, Phone call, page 169, Selective call, and page 170, Send Position call). The Group Selective call requests an automatic response from stations that detect the call and whose self addresses match one of those in the call. These responses are sent in reverse order from that provided in the call. The initiating station then completes the link establishment with an acknowledgement sent to all stations from which it received a response. NOTE When you use a Group Selective address syntax through the Selective call type, the call icon will change to the Group Selective call icon (

) when the call is started. With Group Selective addresses, the length of the combined address can be no longer than 12 ALE words, excluding commas. An ALE word has 3 characters. There can be no more than five different first ALE words in the combined address. For example:

An address of BOB1,BOB2,BOB3,BOB4,TIM,JOHN,MIK,SUE has five different first ALE words, that is, BOB, TIM, JOH, MIK and SUE. However, this address will be rejected because it has a total of 13 ALE words, that is, BOB, 1, BOB, 2, BOB, 3, BOB, 4, TIM, JOH, N, MIK and SUE. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 161 Making and receiving calls NET address syntax NOTE NOTE NOTE The NET address syntax may be used if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed in the transceiver. You cannot use the NET address syntax in the Get Position or Get Status call type. For information on entering text in a call address see page 56, Entering text in an ALE call address. If you want to send an ALE call from one station to other stations that are members of the NET or have the NET programmed, make a NET call using the NET address through the Emergency, Message, NET, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types (see page 167, Emergency call, page 168, Message call, page 169, Phone call, page 169, Selective call, and page 170, Send Position call). These stations have a common NET address. The member stations send an automatic response to the initiating station in a pre-determined response slot. The initiating station then completes the link establishment with all member stations. If a member station is set up to not respond during its allocated response slot, it will still enter the link. NOTE When you use a NET address syntax through the Selective call type, the call icon will change to the NET call icon (

) when the call is started. The NET address syntax can be any combination of upper-case letters and numbers up to 15 characters however, for efficiency of NET calls, it is preferable that the address be limited to 3 characters. To make a call using a NET, the NET must be programmed in the transceiver and configured correctly (see page 138, Programming the NET List). 162 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Wildcard address syntax Making and receiving calls NOTE NOTE The Wildcard address syntax may be used if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed in the transceiver. You cannot use the Wildcard address syntax in the Channel Test, Get Position, or Get Status call type. For information on entering text in a call address see page 56, Entering text in an ALE call address. NOTE CAUTION If a station detects a Wildcard call to its matching self address, it will send a response over the air. If you want to send an ALE call to any station that is tuned to the same frequency in an ALE/CALM network or scanning the network, and receive a response, make a call through the Emergency, Message, Phone, Selective, and Send Position call types using the Wildcard address syntax (see page 167, Emergency call, page 168, Message call, page 169, Phone call, page 169, Selective call, and page 170, Send Position call). The Wildcard address syntax, which ALE stations recognise, uses the wildcard character ? as a placeholder for characters within a self address of a receiving station. Stations that detect the call and whose self address matches the pattern in the wildcard address will send a response to the initiating station. These responses are returned in any slot position

(collisions may occur). For example, a call sent to EM? may be responded to by stations in the network with a self address in the ranges EMAEMZ and EM0EM9. The initiating station then completes the link establishment with an acknowledgement sent to all stations from which it received a response. NOTE NOTE When you use a Wildcard address syntax through the Selective call type, the call icon will change to the Wildcard call icon (

) when the call is started. The wildcard question marks can be in any position within the address. The stations that respond will have an address that is the same length as the wildcard address sent from the initiating station. You can send multiple Wildcard addresses together to make a call to a range of stations, for example, ?A,B??. The allowable length of the called address is dependent on the length of the self address used for the call. If the length of your self address is... 13 characters 46 characters The length of the called address can be... 19 characters 13 characters 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 163 Making and receiving calls Summary of the special ALE address syntaxes The following summarises the special ALE address syntaxes for the MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option. For help with entering the special characters see page 56, Entering text in an ALE call address. If you enter the ALE address syntax...

@A@

@@A

@AB The transceiver will send... a global ALL call to all listening stations (see page 159, ALL address syntax) a selective ALL call to listening stations that have an A as the last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, TNAA, EANBA, 1NCA, 23A (see page 159, ALL address syntax) a global ANY call to all listening stations (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a selective ANY call to listening stations that have an A as the last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, TNAA, EANBA, 1NCA, 23A (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a double selective ANY call to listening stations that have

AB as the last two characters of their self address (A and

B may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, BAAB, 14BAB, Q2CAB, 1AB (see page 160, ANY address syntax) 164 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If you enter the ALE address syntax...

@A?

ABC,JK3MN,PQR

(example only) NET address

A?B? (example only) Making and receiving calls The transceiver will send... a double selective wildcard ANY call to listening stations that have an A as the second to last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number) and any upper-case letter or number as the last character, for example, USAM, 19MA0, ENA9, 3DAZ (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a Group Selective call to the stations specifically addressed

(see page 161, Group Selective address syntax) a NET call to all stations with that NET programmed in the NET List (see page 162, NET address syntax) a Wildcard call to listening stations that have a self address matching the length of the sent address and with any upper-

case letter or number as each of the characters, for example, SAM, NAA, 234, 3AZ (see page 163, Wildcard address syntax) a selective Wildcard call to listening stations that have a self address matching the length of the sent address with A and

B as the first and third characters respectively, and with any upper-case letter or number in the second and last characters, in this case (A and B may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, A2BM, ADB1, AZBE, A3B8

(see page 163, Wildcard address syntax) There are 8 different types of calls available with an 2110 SSB Transceiver:

Channel Test call

Emergency call

Get Position call

Get Status call

Message call

The types of calls you can make and receive depend on the options installed in the transceiver. Each call type has an icon associated with it that is displayed when you make and receive calls (see Table 18). Phone call Selective call Send Position call Call types 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 165 Making and receiving calls Table 18: Call types and icons Call type Icon Channel Test Emergency Get Position Get Status Message Phone Selective Send Position Each type of call is described below. Channel Test call If you want to test the suitability of a channel/mode before you use it to transmit voice or data, make a Channel Test call. In an ALE/CALM network, a Channel Test call may be sent to an ALE address using a Group Selective or NET address syntax (if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed). NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, or Wildcard address syntax with a Channel Test call. A Channel Test call made in an ALE/CALM network with a Group Selective or NET address may be used to replace the information in the LQA database. The initiating station automatically sends a beacon on each channel/mode combination in the ALE/

CALM network, recording local and remote BER and SINAD information, and calculating an LQA score. The LQA screen is visible during the Channel Test call, and at the end of the call, displays the best channel on which to make the call. The LQA information recorded during a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network replaces information already recorded against the same network and self addresses. Using a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network is an immediate method of replacing the LQA database in the transceiver. A Channel Test call made in an ALE/CALM network using the text SOUNDING as the call address may be used to initiate a sounding operation. Transceivers that detect this sounding will update the relevant information stored in their LQA database. 166 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls In a Codan Selcall network, a Channel Test call sends a request to the station you want to call on the channel/mode you have selected. The receiving station automatically returns an audible test signal. The volume and clarity of this signal indicates the quality of the channel/mode. You can also test channels once you have started a call (for more information see page 176, Replacing LQA information as part of a call in an ALE/CALM network and page 174, Testing a channel as part of a call in a Codan Selcall network). Emergency call If you want to trigger an emergency alert tone at a particular station and speak to an operator, make an Emergency call. If the GPS option is installed in the transceiver (and you have connected and configured a GPS receiver), your GPS position is automatically sent with the call. Emergency calls can be sent to several stations at once (see page 150, Setting up the emergency key and page 170, Group calls in a Codan Selcall network). If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the Emergency call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes with the Emergency call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. For more information on the ALE address syntaxes you can use with an Emergency call see page 164, Summary of the special ALE address syntaxes. Get Position call NOTE NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with a Get Position call. The success of your Get Position call will depend upon the setting in the Cfg Respond GPS entry in the Control List of the transceiver you are polling and the Privacy Mode of the network you are using for the call

(see page 204, Cfg Respond GPS). If you want to obtain the GPS position of a station that has the GPS option installed in the transceiver (and a GPS receiver connected to it and configured), make a Get Position call. Get Position calls are automatically answered by the receiving station so an operator is not required to take any action. The information you receive from a Get Position call is displayed on the front panel as it is received, if permitted, and is stored in the Calls In Log (see page 192, The Calls In Log). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 167 Making and receiving calls Get Status call NOTE NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with a Get Status call. The success of your Get Status call will depend upon the setting in the Cfg Respond OTA entry in the Control List of the transceiver you are polling and the Privacy Mode of the network you are using for the call

(see page 204, Cfg Respond OTA). If you want to obtain information on the status of a transceiver at another station, such as the power output of the transmitter or the firmware versions installed, make a Get Status call. Get Status calls are automatically answered by the receiving station so an operator is not required to take any action. The information you receive from a Get Status call is displayed on the front panel as it is received, if permitted, and is stored in the Calls In Log (see page 192, The Calls In Log). When you make a Get Status call you need to specify the type of information you require: diagnostic or configuration. This is described in detail on page 335, Get Status calls. Message call If you want to send a typed message to another station, make a Message call. You can enter a message at the time you make a call, store up to 10 messages in the Control List for later use, and store messages in the Address List as part of a Message call. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the Message call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes with the Message call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. For more information on the ALE address syntaxes you can use with a Message call see page 164, Summary of the special ALE address syntaxes. Message calls are automatically answered by any receiving stations so an operator is not required to take any action. If you send an ALE call using the Message call type, the link terminates immediately after the message is sent. Messages you receive are displayed on the front panel, if permitted, and stored in the Calls In Log (see page 192, The Calls In Log). 168 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls Phone call If you want to call a telephone number from the transceiver, make a Phone call. Before you make a Phone call you need to know the address of a telecommunication station through which your call can be routed to the public telephone network. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the Phone call type to send a call to a group of telecommunication stations using an ALE/CALM network. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes with the Phone call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/

CALM network. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. For more information on the ALE address syntaxes you can use with a Phone call see page 164, Summary of the special ALE address syntaxes. Selective call If you want to speak to an operator at a particular station, make a Selective call. When the station receives the call the transceiver rings like a phone to notify the operator. Selective calls can be heard by any station tuned to or scanning your current channel with their mute switched off. However, only the transceiver at the station to which the call has been addressed will ring. Selective calls can be made to several stations at once (see page 170, Group calls in a Codan Selcall network). If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the Selective call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes with the Selective call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. The transceiver will automatically determine the call icon from the address syntax that you enter in the address. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed and the ALE Selective Msg entry in the Control List enabled, you will be able to send a message with the start of a call if you press network to make the call. For more information on the ALE address syntaxes you can use with a Selective call see page 164, Summary of the special ALE address syntaxes. when prompted during the call. You must use an ALE/CALM 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 169 Making and receiving calls Send Position call If you want to send your GPS information to another station, make a Send Position call. You can only make Send Position calls if the GPS option has been installed in your transceiver. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the Send Position call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard address syntaxes with the Send Position call type to send a call to a group of stations using an ALE/CALM network. The transceiver will automatically determine the call icon from the address syntax that you enter in the address. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. For more information on the ALE address syntaxes you can use with a Send Position call see page 164, Summary of the special ALE address syntaxes. Send Position calls are automatically answered by any receiving stations so an operator is not required to take any action. If you send an ALE call using the Send Position call type, the link terminates immediately after the GPS position is sent. GPS positions you send are stored in the Calls Out Log (see page 187, The Calls Out Log). Group calls in a Codan Selcall network Emergency, Message and Selective calls can be made to a group of stations simultaneously by using a Codan Selcall network and a group address. A group selcall address is an address that ends in two or more zeros. For example, to call all stations with addresses that range from 1201 to 1299, you would enter 1200 as the address. To call all stations with addresses that range from 150001 to 159999, you would enter 150000 as the address. NOTE You can replace the zeros at the end of the address with dots or question marks, for example, 12.. or 12?? instead of 1200. 170 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Special AMD messaging features Making and receiving calls NOTE Special AMD messaging is available if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed. For interoperability with other transceivers, the 2110 SSB Transceiver recognises special AMD messaging syntax included at the beginning of an AMD message sent on a network with a Privacy Mode of Plain. The transceiver will accept and process the syntax shown in Table 19. You can also manually enter any of this text into an AMD message. The syntax shown must be followed by a space, then the required information. Table 19: Special AMD messaging syntax Syntax

#CMD

#EMERGENCY

#GPS

#GPS?

#HELP

#MAYDAY

#PANPAN

#SOS

#TEL <Telephone number>

#TEL!

Processed as... A query call. The command is forwarded to the CICS port or internal engineering terminal, then the status is returned. An Emergency call. The transceiver will sound an emergency alert tone. A Send Position call. The GPS position data is received followed by position information. A Get Position call. The GPS position data is received followed by position information. An Emergency call. The transceiver will sound an emergency alert tone. An Emergency call. The transceiver will sound an emergency alert tone. An Emergency call. The transceiver will sound an emergency alert tone. An Emergency call. The transceiver will sound an emergency alert tone. A Phone call. The call is transferred to the attached telephone interconnect unit, which dials the telephone number. A hangup for a Phone call. The hangup from the radio party has hung up the call. NOTE When you send an Emergency call using a Plain network from 2110 SSB Transceivers, the #HELP text appears in the AMD message of a receiving vendor transceiver. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 171 Making and receiving calls Recognised variable expansion The variables listed in Table 20 may be added in a Message call or an AMD message sent with a call. These variables are recognised by the 2110 SSB Transceivers firmware. The firmware expands the variable by inserting the current information associated with the variable in the message. Table 20: Recognised variables and their associated information Keyword

$DATE

$GPS

$TIME

$TZ

$VER Function when used in a message Inserts the current date in the following format: <name of day>

<month> <day> <year>

Inserts the current valid GPS position in the following format:

<latitude> <longitude> <altitude> <UTC>

Inserts the current time in the following format: <hh>:<mm>:<ss>

Inserts the time zone offset in the following format: <time zone offset>

Inserts the current version of the transceiver unit firmware in the following format: <version number>

If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed and the ALE Selective Msg entry in the Control List enabled, you will be able to send a message with the start of a call if you press when prompted during the call. If you enter the following message... MY POSITION IS $GPS

...the receiving station will display the following:

MY POSITION IS 8958.04N 13841.23E +0.0M 101622 (A) 05 FEB 02:05 NOTE NOTE For help on entering $ see page 55, Entering special characters in messages and names. The transceiver checks the length of the expanded message before transmission. If you receive an error stating that the message is too long, review the message and shorten the message as required. 172 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls Making a call Listen Before Transmit Mode NOTE If you change the setting in the Cfg LBT Mode entry in the Control List you must switch the transceiver off then on again for the change to take effect. The 2110 SSB Transceiver is capable of listening to a channel before initiating a call on the channel. If the Cfg LBT Mode in the Control List is enabled, the transceiver will detect whether or not there is traffic on the selected channel, that is, the channel is occupied. The transceiver will listen on a channel for the length of time specified in the Cfg LBT Period entry in the Control List. The transceiver will try busy channels twice before reporting that they are busy. The Cfg LBT Mode may be set to Enabled, Override allowed, or Disabled. When the Cfg LBT Mode is set to Enabled, and the transceiver detects that the channel(s) tried is(are) busy, it will prompt you to try the call again. You can:

to select a new channel, then press CALL to make a call on this channel press CALL to try the call again using LBT press using LBT NOTE If only one channel was tried and found to be busy using LBT, you can listen for traffic on the channel then, if clear, override LBT by holding CALL. When the Cfg LBT Mode is set to Override allowed, and the transceiver detects that the channel(s) tried is(are) busy, it will prompt you to try the call again. You can:

press CALL to try the call again using LBT hold CALL to try the call again without LBT (send the call regardless of any detected traffic) press using LBT hold the call regardless of any detected traffic) to select a new channel, then press CALL to make a call on this channel to select a new channel and try the call on this channel without LBT (send

Calls using the Emergency call type or calls made through the LBT Mode if it is enabled at either level. For information on setting up the page 150, Setting up the emergency key. key will override the key see 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 173 Making and receiving calls Testing the quality of a channel in a Codan Selcall network If you want to test the quality of a particular channel/mode in a Codan Selcall network before you use it to transmit voice or data, you can do so in two ways. You can:

start making a call then, when prompted to select a channel/mode, test one or more channel/mode combinations

make a separate Channel Test call before you make the other call Testing a channel as part of a call in a Codan Selcall network NOTE This is the recommended method of making a Channel Test call. To test a channel/mode as part of a call:

1 Start the call using your preferred method. For example, go to the Address List then select the entry for the station you want to call. 1 When the transceiver prompts you to select a channel/mode, scroll to the channel/

mode you want to test then hold CALL. 1 Listen for the revertive signal from the other station. The volume and clarity of the signal indicates the quality of the channel/mode. You may need to try another channel. 1 When you have found a suitable channel/mode, press CALL to continue the call. Making a Channel Test call in a Codan Selcall network To make a Channel Test call in a Codan Selcall network:

1 Press CALL. 1 Type the address of the station you want to call and select Channel Test? as the call type. 1 Select the Codan Selcall network in which you want to make the call. 1 Scroll to the channel/mode you want to test, then press CALL. 1 Listen for the revertive signal from the other station. The volume and clarity of the signal indicates the quality of the channel/mode. 174 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Replacing LQA information for all channels in an ALE/CALM network Making and receiving calls NOTE You can make a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed. If your station operates in a rapidly changing environment, for example, interactions with mobile stations, you may want to replace the network-specific LQA information in the transceivers database just prior to making a call in the network. You can do this by making a Channel Test call in the network using the Group Selective or NET address syntax. If you want to replace the LQA information for an ALE/CALM network in your transceiver, you can do so in two ways. You can:

start a call then, when prompted to select a channel/mode, test one or more channel/

mode combinations

make a separate Channel Test call before you make the other call CAUTION You cannot make a Channel Test call using the ALL, ANY, or Wildcard address syntax, or to a NET that is set up to link immediately (see page 134, Settings in the NET List). During a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network, the LQA screen will be visible, indicating the most recent response from a station, and a progress report on the highest number of responses received on any channel and the number of channels tried. Figure 30: LQA screen showing the most recent response station that has responded most recently For more information on the LQA screen see page 224, LQA Screen entry. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 175 Making and receiving calls Replacing LQA information as part of a call in an ALE/CALM network To replace LQA information as part of a call:

1 Press SCAN to stop scanning. 1 Start the call using your preferred method. For example, go to the Address List then select the entry for the station you want to call. 1 When the transceiver prompts you to select a channel/mode, select <auto>, then hold CALL. 1 View the LQA screen for the best channel/mode to use. 1 Press CALL to continue the call. 1 When prompted again to select a channel/mode, you can either:

to select the best channel/mode combination determined during the press Channel Test call select any other channel that had an acceptable LQA score select <auto> for the transceiver to select the best channel/mode for the call, starting with the channel on which the most recent successful link was established 1 Press CALL to continue the call. Making a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network To make a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network:

1 Press CALL. 1 Type the ALE NET or Group Selective address syntax of the stations for which you want to replace the LQA information, then select Channel Test? as the call type. 1 Select the ALE/CALM network in which you want to make the call. NOTE You do not have to select a network if you are sending the call to a NET address as the network is already defined by the NET. The LQA Screen will display the best channel for the network, including the LQA score as a percentage, and the BER/SINAD scores at the local and remote stations. 176 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making a manual sounding operation in an ALE/CALM network Making and receiving calls NOTE Manual sounding is available if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed. If you need to perform a manual sounding operation using the handset, you make a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network using the text SOUNDING as the address. You can do this as part of a new call, or if you use this feature often, set up an entry in the Address List, then use this entry to perform a sounding operation in the selected network

(see page 154, Creating an entry in the Address List). The sounding operation will update the LQA database in transceivers that detect the sounding. To make a manual sounding operation:

1 Press CALL. 1 Select Channel Test? as the call type, then press * to enter the text SOUNDING as the address, then press CALL. 1 Select the ALE/CALM network in which you want to make the sounding, and if scanning was switched off, the channel/mode on which you want to make the sounding. A sounding operation on all channels, or the specified channel, in the network is performed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 177 Making and receiving calls Selecting the best channel in an ALE/CALM network NOTE You must have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed. In order to select the best channel based on LQA information stored in the transceiver, you need to provide the context of the best channel, that is, the address that you want to call and the network in which you want to make the call. To select the best channel:

1 Press SCAN to switch off scanning. 1 Press CALL. 1 Type the address of the station for which you want to find the best channel. 1 Select any valid call type for the address entered. 1 Select the ALE/CALM network in which you want to make the call. 1 At the channel/mode prompt, press

. The best channel is selected. 178 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Other ways to make calls Making a new call Making and receiving calls Making a new call is as simple as pressing CALL, typing the address of the station you want to call, then following the prompts. You can make a new call at any time. Returning a call The details of the calls you receive are stored in the Calls In Log. Up to 20 calls can be stored at a time and you can return any of these calls directly from this log. When you return a call from the Calls In Log you can either use as many details of the original call as possible, or review all details and select new details if necessary. For more information on the log see page 192, The Calls In Log. Repeating a call The details of the calls you make are stored in the Calls Out Log. Up to 20 calls can be stored at one time and you can repeat any of these calls directly from this log. When you repeat a call from the Calls Out Log you can either use as many details of the original call as possible, or review all details and select new details if necessary. For more information on the log see page 187, The Calls Out Log. Making a call from the Last Heard Log If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, your transceiver will keep a log of the last 100 on-air transmissions it has detected. The information gathered from each transmission includes the self address used by the heard station, the time/date of the transmission, and the channel/mode used for the transmission. When you make a call from the Last Heard Log, you will be prompted with the information from the log. You may select new details for the call if necessary. For more information on the log see page 196, Detecting transmissions from other stations. Making a call from the Phone Link List If you make frequent Phone calls from the transceiver you may want to make them from the Phone Link List. When you begin a call from this list the call type is always Phone

(so you dont have to scroll to it), and you are not prompted to select a phone link; the call uses the entry you were on when you began the call. You may be prompted to select certain details about the call depending on the configuration of the transceiver. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 179 Making and receiving calls Making a voice call select a channel and mode press PTT to tune the antenna The simplest type of call is a voice call. To make a voice call you:

wait until the channel is clear of voice and data traffic

Your call can be heard by any station tuned to or scanning this channel with their Mute Scan entry switched off, set to Scan for Voice, or set to Voice. hold down PTT and begin speaking 180 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Calling methods Making and receiving calls CAUTION Depending on the configuration of a NET, a NET call may take several minutes to establish a link. While a call is being established, the transceiver will show that calling activity is in progress by flashing the CALL icon in place of the scan indicator. NOTE To make any type of call to a specific station:

1 Decide on the method you want to use to make the call, then use the information in the following table to start the call. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. If you want to... make a call from the Address List

make a call in an emergency

make a new call

Do this...

for at least 2 seconds go to the entry you want to call in the Address List to use as many details from the entry as possible, press CALL, or to review all details and/or select new ones, hold CALL hold press CALL select the call type you want to use enter the address (including any special ALE address syntax for ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard calls) of the station(s) you want to call, or if you are making a Phone call, enter the phone number you want to call press CALL return a call NOTE If the ALE Selective Msg entry in the Control List is enabled, you will be prompted to press to enter a message.

press CALL LOGS twice to open the Calls In Log go to the call you want to return to use as many details from this call as possible, press CALL, or to review all details and/or select new ones, hold CALL 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 181 Making and receiving calls If you want to... repeat a call Do this...

press CALL LOGS to open the Calls Out Log go to the call you want to repeat to automatically repeat this call, press CALL, or to review all details and/or select new ones, hold CALL press CALL LOGS three times to open the Last Heard Log go to the Last Heard entry to which you want to make a call press CALL select the call type you want to use press CALL make a call from the Last Heard Log

make a Phone call from the Phone Link List NOTE If the ALE Selective Msg entry in the Control List is enabled, you will be prompted to press to enter a message.

go to the phone link through which you want to make this call press CALL enter the telephone number you want to call (you can enter up to 16 digits) press CALL 1 You may be prompted for details about the call depending on the method you chose to make the call, the call type you selected, and the configuration of the transceiver. If you are prompted for any details, use the information in the following table to enter them, then press CALL. If this prompt is displayed... Select link Phone link addr?

Do this...

select the phone link station through which you want to make the Phone call enter the address of the phone link station through which you want to make the Phone call

(including any special ALE address syntax for ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard calls) 182 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If this prompt is displayed... Select msg Select network My address?

Select chan/mode Making and receiving calls Do this...

select the message you want to use NOTE For help on editing a message see page 225, Messages entry. To retrieve diagnostic information from the remote station, type 1. To retrieve configuration information, type 2 (see page 335, Get Status calls).

select the network in which you want to make the call select or enter the self address from which you want to send the call In an ALE/CALM network:

select <auto> if you want the transceiver to select the best channel/mode for the call, starting with the channel on which the most recent successful link was established, or select the channel/mode you want to use to make the call, or if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, press to select the best channel based on information in the LQA database

NOTE In an ALE/CALM network, you can test the quality of the channels in a network by sending a Channel Test call (see page 176, Replacing LQA information as part of a call in an ALE/CALM network). In a Codan Selcall network:

select the channel/mode you want to use to make the call and check that it is clear of voice and data traffic NOTE In a Codan Selcall network, you can test the quality of the selected channel by sending a Channel Test call (see page 174, Testing a channel as part of a call in a Codan Selcall network). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 183 Making and receiving calls 1 If LBT Mode is set to Enabled or Override allowed, you may be prompted to try the channels again. Use the information in the following table to answer the prompt. If this prompt is displayed... Chan busy:

Try again?

All|<N> chans busy:

Try again?

Do this... If Cfg LBT Mode is set to Enabled:

press CALL to try the call again using LBT press to select a new channel, then press CALL to make a call on this channel using LBT If only one channel was tried and found to be busy using LBT, you can listen for traffic on the channel then, if clear, override LBT by holding CALL. NOTE If Cfg LBT Mode is set to Override allowed:

press CALL to try the call again using LBT

hold CALL to try the call again without LBT

(send the call regardless of any detected traffic) press CALL to make a call on this channel using LBT hold to select a new channel and try the call on this channel without LBT (send the call regardless of any detected traffic) to select a new channel, then press

If you made an ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard call, you will receive pop-

up messages stating from which stations you have received a response. NOTE To abort the call before a connection to the other station is made, press PTT. 184 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls 1 To complete the call, use the information in the following table. NOTE If you made an ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard call, you can send data within the established link by pressing CALL and following the prompts. If the link is closed automatically during these inlink messages, consider extending the Cfg In Call Timeout entry in the Control List. If you are making a... Channel Test call Do this... In an ALE/CALM network:

wait for the LQA screen to display the best channel listen for the revertive signal In a Codan Selcall network:

NOTE The call is ended automatically but can be aborted by pressing PTT or SCAN. Emergency call Selective call Get Position call Get Status call Message call Send Position call

In an ALE/CALM network:

wait until a message informs you that the call has been successful hold down PTT then speak, releasing PTT when you have finished speaking press SCAN to end the call and resume scanning

In a Codan Selcall network:

wait until a message informs you that the call has been sent and listen for audible beeps transmitted from the other station hold down PTT then speak, releasing PTT when you have finished speaking press SCAN to end the call and resume scanning

wait until a message informs you that the call has

been completed NOTE The call is ended automatically but can be aborted by pressing PTT or SCAN. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 185 Making and receiving calls If you are making a... Phone call

Do this...

wait until you hear a reply from the person you called hold down PTT then speak, releasing PTT when you have finished speaking press SCAN to end the call

In an ALE/CALM network:

The transceiver resumes scanning. In a Codan Selcall network:

The transceiver asks if you want to send a hangup signal.

to send a hangup signal, press if the other party has sent a hangup signal via the phone line, press The transceiver resumes scanning. 186 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Calls Out Log Making and receiving calls When you make a call, an entry for the call is created in the Calls Out Log. The entry lists the:

message or position that was sent if the call was a Message, Get Status or Send type of call that was made address to which the call was made Position call time at which the call was made self address from which the call was made network in which the call was made channel/mode on which the call was made phone link that was used, if the call was a Phone call

Figure 31: The Calls Out Log showing a Selective call made icon for type of call made date on which call was made address to which call was made time at which call was made If you make a Message, Get Status or Send Position call, the information sent is displayed instead of the date and time. Figure 32: The Calls Out Log showing a Message call made icon for type of call made message sent address to which call was made 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 187 Making and receiving calls Figure 33: The Calls Out Log showing a NET call made NET call icon date on which call was made name of NET to which call was made time at which call was made Up to 20 calls can be stored at one time and you can repeat any of these calls directly from the log (see page 189, Repeating a call from the Calls Out Log). The calls are listed in the order in which they were made with the most recent call at the top of the list. If you make two or more calls with the same call type and address (and message or GPS position, if applicable), only the most recent call is kept in the log. If you make a Get Position or Get Status call, an entry for the call is created in the Calls Out Log, and the information that is sent to you by the other station is stored in an entry for the call in the Calls In Log (see page 192, The Calls In Log). Displaying an entry in the Calls Out Log To display an entry in the Calls Out Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS to open the Calls Out Log. The details of the last call sent are displayed. 1 Scroll through the entries. 1 To display more information about an entry, press 1 Scroll through the settings. 1 Press 1 Press

. to return to the entry. to close the Calls Out Log and return to the screen from which you began. 188 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls Repeating a call from the Calls Out Log To repeat a call from the Calls Out Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS to open the Calls Out Log. 1 Scroll to the call you want to repeat. 1 Either:

press CALL to automatically repeat the call, or hold CALL to review all details and/or select new ones Deleting an entry from the Calls Out Log To delete an entry from the Calls Out Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS to open the Calls Out Log. The details of the last call sent are displayed. 1 Scroll to the entry you want to delete. 1 Hold 1 Select Delete entry. to open the List Manager. The transceiver asks you to confirm that you want to delete the entry. 1 Press

. The entry is deleted and the List Manager remains open. 1 Press repeatedly to return to the screen from which you began. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 189 Making and receiving calls Receiving a call There are two ways you can receive a call. You can listen to a channel and respond when you hear a voice, or you can wait until an alert tone notifies you of a call addressed to your station. This section covers receiving calls addressed to your station. When you receive a call addressed to your station, the transceiver sounds an audible alert tone, displays an incoming call screen, if permitted, and creates an entry in the Calls In Log. NOTE These events do not occur when you receive a Channel Test, Get Position, or Get Status call as the transceiver automatically responds to these calls. The call alert The call alert varies according to the type of call received. For Message, Phone, Selective and Send Position calls it continues for about 10 seconds then changes to a series of pips until you press a key. For Emergency calls it continues for 5 minutes then changes to a series of pips. Table 21: Call types and alert tones Call type Emergency Message Phone Selective Send Position Group calls:

Emergency calls all other calls Alert tone sounds like... heehaw, heehaw, heehaw pip, pip, pip, pip, pip a telephone ringing a telephone ringing pip, pip, pip, pip, pip heehaw, heehaw, heehaw beep, beep, beep, beep, beep, beep NOTE If you want to switch off the audible alert tone when a call is received, set the Cfg Alert Tones entry in the Control List to Disabled (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level and page 200, Entries in the Control List). 190 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls The incoming call screen The incoming call screen displays:

the type of call being received

the address of the station making the call the date and time at which the call was received

the message, GPS position or status information, if sent the call count number

NOTE NOTE If you want to switch off the audible alert tone when a message is received, set the Cfg Alert Tones entry in the Control List to Disabled (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level and page 200, Entries in the Control List). If you want to prevent a message being displayed when it is received, set the Cfg Incoming Msg entry in the Control List to Just log (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level and page 200, Entries in the Control List). Figure 34: An incoming call screen for a Selective call address of caller call type call count number date time Figure 35: An incoming call screen for a Message call address of caller call type message call count number 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 191 Making and receiving calls Figure 36: An incoming call screen for a NET call address of caller name of NET call type ALE selective message call count number If you receive one or more calls while the transceiver is unattended, the incoming call screen displays the details of the most recent call. The call count number at the bottom right of the screen indicates the number of calls received since the first call (see Figure 34). To remove the incoming call screen:

1 Press

. Error reporting in a received AMD message If you receive a call containing a message in which an error has been detected, the corrupted part of the message will be replaced with reverse-highlighted bullets. The Calls In Log When you receive a call, an entry is created in the Calls In Log. The entry lists the:

message, GPS position or status information received if the call was a Message, type of call received and the address of the caller Get Position, or Get Status call time at which the call was received self address to which the call was sent network in which the call was received channel/mode on which the call was received phone link that was used, if the call was a Phone call

NOTE Entries are not created for Channel Test, Get Position, and Get Status calls. 192 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Figure 37: The Calls In Log showing a Selective call received Making and receiving calls icon for type of call received date of received call address from which call was received time of received call If you receive a Message or Send Position call, or you have made a Get Position or Get Status call, the information received is displayed instead of the date and time. Figure 38: The Calls In Log showing a Message call received icon for type of call received address from which call was received message received Figure 39: The Calls In Log showing a Get Status call received icon for type of call received address from which call was received status information Figure 40: The Calls In Log showing a NET call received NET call icon self address of sender/NET name from which call was received ALE selective message received with NET call 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 193 Making and receiving calls Up to 20 calls can be stored at a time and you can return any of these calls directly from the log (see page 194, Returning a call from the Calls In Log). The calls are listed in the order in which they were received with the most recent call at the top of the list. If you receive two or more calls with the same call type and address

(and message or GPS position, if applicable), only the most recent call is kept in the log. Displaying an entry in the Calls In Log To display an entry in the Calls In Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS twice to open the Calls In Log. The details of the last call received are displayed. 1 Scroll through the entries. 1 To display more information about an entry, press 1 Scroll through the settings. 1 Press 1 Press

. to return to the entry. to close the Calls In Log and return to the screen from which you began. Returning a call from the Calls In Log To return a call from the Calls In Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS twice to open the Calls In Log. 1 Scroll to the call you want to return. 1 Either:

press CALL to use as many details from this call as possible, or hold CALL to review all details and/or select new ones 194 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls Deleting an entry from the Calls In Log To delete an entry from the Calls In Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS twice to open the Calls In Log. The details of the last call received are displayed. 1 Scroll to the entry you want to delete. 1 Hold 1 Select Delete entry. to open the List Manager. The transceiver asks you to confirm that you want to delete the entry. 1 Press

. The entry is deleted and the List Manager remains open. 1 Press repeatedly to return to the screen from which you began. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 195 Making and receiving calls Detecting transmissions from other stations NOTE The Last Heard Log is available if you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed in your transceiver. When your station detects transmissions from any other active stations, an entry is created in the Last Heard Log. The entry lists the:

the address used by the detected station time and date at which the call was detected channel/mode on which the call was detected Figure 41: The Last Heard Log address used by detected station date and time of detected transmission Up to 100 detected transmissions can be stored at a time, and you can make a call to any of the stations recorded in the log directly from the log (see page 197, Making a call from the Last Heard Log). The transmissions are listed in the order in which they were detected with the most recent at the top of the list. If you detect two or more transmissions with the same station address and channel/mode, only the most recent call is kept in the log. 196 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Making and receiving calls Displaying an entry in the Last Heard Log To display an entry in the Last Heard Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS three times to open the Last Heard Log. The details of the last transmission detected are displayed. 1 Scroll through the entries. 1 To display more information about an entry, press 1 Scroll through the settings. 1 Press 1 Press

. to return to the entry. to close the Last Heard Log and return to the screen from which you began. Making a call from the Last Heard Log To make a call from the Last Heard Log:

1 Press CALL LOGS three times to open the Last Heard Log. 1 Scroll to the Last Heard entry to which you want to make a call. 1 Press CALL. 1 Select the call type you want to use. 1 Press CALL. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 197 Making and receiving calls This page has been left blank intentionally. 198 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 14 The Control List CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Entries in the Control List (200) ALE entries (209) Auto Resume entries (215) Devices entry (216) GPS Screen entry (222) LQA Screen entry (224) Messages entry (225) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 199 The Control List Entries in the Control List The entries in the Control List enable you to customise the transceiver and control the way it operates. Table 22 provides a complete list of the entries in the Control List that can be changed at user and admin level. Some of the entries are covered in more detail in the sections after the table. NOTE CAUTION The Control List is admin hidden, by default. You will only be able to access the Control List to view and/or change entries by logging into admin level (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). If the user needs to access any entries in the Control List, the administrator should set up hot keys to these entries (see page 241, Creating a macro and assigning it to a hot key). Some entries in the Control List alter the configuration of the transceiver, for example, RS232 Mode and RS232 Mode. If your transceiver does not respond as expected after an entry in the Control List has been altered, switch the transceiver off then on again. Table 22: Entries in the Control List Name of entry Address ALE Accept ALL Call ALE Accept ANY Call ALE Accept Wildcard Call ALE AMD Position ALE BER ALE Call Threshold Use this entry to... Program up to 20 self addresses for your station and specify the network or networks in which you want to use them. For more information on self addresses see page 69, Entering your station self address. Set whether or not your transceiver will accept ALL calls that it detects. For more information see page 209, ALE Accept ALL Call. Set whether or not your transceiver will accept and respond to ANY calls that it detects. For more information see page 209, ALE Accept ANY Call. Set whether or not your transceiver will accept and respond to Wildcard calls that it detects. For more information see page 209, ALE Accept Wildcard Call. Set the position in which the transceiver will transmit AMD data. For:

the shortest possible call duration, select Auto

compatibility with other transceivers, select Leading For more information see page 209, ALE AMD Position. Increase or decrease the value of the BER threshold used in BER testing. For more information see page 210, ALE BER. Set the minimum score for a channel to be tried in ALE calls. For more information see page 210, ALE Call Threshold. Default Enabled Enabled Enabled Auto 12 errors 0%

ALE Call Weighting Weight the LQA scoring of ALE channels for data or voice. For more information see page 211, ALE Call Weighting. Mostly voice 200 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Name of entry ALE Golay ALE Hangup ALL Call ALE LQA Average ALE LQA Clear ALE LQA Decay Use this entry to... Set the value of the Golay threshold used in Golay testing. For more information see page 211, ALE Golay. Set whether or not the initiator of an ALL call can hang up the call to all linked stations. For more information see page 211, ALE Hangup ALL Call. Select the way that LQA information will be used when recording signal quality. For more information see page 211, ALE LQA Average. Clear the LQA information in the transceiver. For more information see page 212, ALE LQA Clear. Set the length of time it takes for LQA information to artificially decay, or switch this feature off. For more information see page 212, ALE LQA Decay. ALE LQA Exchange Exchange LQA information with stations during each call so that ALE LQA Mapping ALE Retries ALE Selective Msg ALE Silent Mode ALE Site Mgr ALE Soundings Audio Volume Auto Resume Listen Auto Resume Mode Auto Resume Time the link quality can be assessed in both directions. For more information see page 213, ALE LQA Exchange. Set the mapping of LQA information according to its frequency. For more information see page 213, ALE LQA Mapping. Set the number of times the transceiver retries a channel when attempting to establish an ALE link before trying the next best channel in the network. For more information see page 213, ALE Retries. Set whether or not you can send a message with a Selective call made in an ALE/CALM network. For more information see page 213, ALE Selective Msg. Prevent automatic ALE transmissions from the transceiver unit. For more information see page 213, ALE Silent Mode. Collect information on unknown ALE transceivers in the network. For more information see page 214, ALE Site Mgr. Set the status of the transceiver following a sounding. For more information see page 214, ALE Soundings. Set the audio volume of the transceiver. Set the scan method used when scanning is switched on by the Auto Resume Mode entry. For more information see page 215, Auto Resume entries. Set the action performed when the Auto Resume Time ends. For more information see page 215, Auto Resume entries. Set the length of time after scanning stops that the transceiver performs the action set in the Auto Resume Mode entry. For more information see page 215, Auto Resume entries. The Control List Default 2 Enabled Both 15 days On Frequency 1 Enabled Off Off Default 8 Leave as is Start scan 2 minutes 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 201 The Control List Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Name of entry Battery Cfg Abandon Mode Cfg Alert Tones Default key Never Use this entry to... View the status of the attached battery. Set how the transceiver will shut down following the +

sequence. If you want the transceiver to:

not respond to the abandon key sequence, select Never shut down and only be accessed by an administrator (if an admin password has been set), select Lock erase all secure keys, channels, networks, NETs, phone links, addresses, self addresses, call logs, messages, welcome text, site manager, and LQA information, then admin lock, select Erase

Normal Set whether or not the transceiver will give an alert tone (beep or ring) when it receives a message or a call. If you want the transceiver to:

provide a local alert tone and external alarm, if connected, when it receives a message or a non-message call, select Normal provide an external alarm, if connected, when it receives a non-message call only, select Messages skip ext alarm provides a local alert tone when it receives a non-message call, select Messages dont ring provide no alert tones or external alarms, if connected, when it receives any type of call, select Disabled

Cfg Auto Tune Mode Set the Auto Tune Mode to suit the antenna. If you have:

ATU/50

a broadband antenna or an antenna that does not require a tuning cycle, select 50 Ohm an antenna that uses a Codan antenna tuning interface (for example, 9350, 4203, 8558), select Codan an antenna that does not conform to Codans antenna tuning interface but provides automatic tuning capability (for example, 9103), select SWR different types of antennas that may require tuning by the internal antenna tuner, or do not require a tuning cycle, select ATU/50 Ohm an antenna that requires tuning by the internal antenna tuner, select ATU Cfg Call Status Time Set the maximum length of time a receiving station has to respond to a Get Status call with the information you requested. Cfg Chain Call Pause Set the length of time the transceiver pauses between chained calls, for example, during an Emergency call. 5 seconds 10 seconds 202 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Name of entry Cfg Channel Scroll Cfg Easitalk Cfg Fast AGC Cfg In Call Timeout Cfg Incoming Msg Cfg LBT Mode Cfg LBT Period Cfg Low Current Mode Use this entry to... Set the direction in which the key scrolls in the Channel List, that is, to the next channel or the previous channel. By default, pressing scrolls to the next highest number/next alphabetically sorted name in the Channel List, that is, 1-2-3-4 or Chan A-Chan B-Chan C-Chan D. If you want the key to scroll in the opposite direction, as it does in other lists in the transceiver, select Go to prev chan. Select a noise reduction algorithm. Switch fast auto gain control on or off. Set the length of time from the last key press on the front panel after which incoming calls on the transceiver will be hung up. Set whether or not the transceiver will display a message to the operator when it is received. If you want to:

display messages and log them in the Calls In Log, select Show and log prevent messages from being displayed, but still log them in the Calls In Log, select Just log

Set whether or not the transceiver will listen for calls and traffic on a channel before initiating a call. If you want to:

use LBT for all calls, select Enabled use LBT, with the option to override for all calls, select Override allowed disable LBT for all calls, select Disabled

For more information on listening before transmitting see page 173, Listen Before Transmit Mode. Set the length of time that the transceiver will listen for calls and traffic on a channel before initiating a call. Set the level of current used by the transceiver during muted operation. If you want to:

extend the time remaining for your battery, select Auto reduce the time remaining for your battery and improve the receivers performance in areas of high signal levels, select Disabled Cfg Power Preference Set the power preference to suit the power transmission level for transmit with high power, select High transmit with low power, select Low your station. If you want to:

Transmit astrotones when the PTT button is released during a call. This saves you having to say over each time you release PTT. Cfg PTT Beeps The Control List Default Go to next chan Cepstral Disabled 30 seconds Show and log Enabled 2 seconds Auto On 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 203 The Control List Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Use this entry to... Name of entry Cfg PTT Cutout Time Set the length of time after PTT is held down for the transceiver to cease transmission and switch to receive. This ensures that, even if PTT is held down accidentally (because, for example, you are sitting on the handset), power consumption is minimised and the transceiver is ready to receive calls. You can also use this entry to switch this feature off. Set the way in which the transceiver will handle its response to a Get Position call sent through an ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network. If you want to:

Cfg Respond GPS

respond to a Get Position call regardless of the Privacy Mode of the network through which the call was made, thus leaving your encrypted position data open to decryption by others, select Always respond in a proprietary Codan-encoded format to a Get Position call on a network with the Privacy Mode set to Registered, Group or None, select Codan respond to a Get Position call from another Codan transceiver on a network with the Privacy Mode set to Group and a common Privacy Key, select Encrypted

disable your response to any Get Position call, select Never NOTE You will still be able to make Send Position calls if this

entry is set to Never. Cfg Respond OTA Cfg RF Pre-Amp

Set the way in which the transceiver will handle its response to an OTA command sent through an ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network. If you want to:

respond to an OTA command regardless of the Privacy Mode of the network through which the call was made, thus leaving your encrypted OTA command open to decryption by others, select Always respond in a proprietary Codan-encoded format to an OTA command on a network with the Privacy Mode set to Registered, Group or None, select Codan respond to an OTA command from another Codan transceiver on a network with the Privacy Mode set to Group and a common Privacy Key, select Encrypted

disable your response to any OTA command, select Never For more information on OTA commands contact your Codan representative. Switch the RF pre-amplifier on or off. To increase the receive sensitivity of the RF unit, select On. To reduce it, select Off.

Default 10 minutes Always Codan On 204 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Name of entry Cfg Scan Voice Extend Cfg Scan Voice Max Hold Use this entry to... Set the period of time that the transceiver holds the scan when voice is detected. The transceiver will continue to extend by this amount each time voice is detected on the channel, up to the maximum hold period set in the Cfg Scan Voice Max Hold entry. If you do not want the transceiver to hold the scan after voice is detected, set this entry to Disabled. Set the maximum length of time that the transceiver pauses on a channel after voice has been detected. This entry overrides the extend function in the Cfg Scan Voice Extend entry. Cfg Speaker External Switch an external speaker, connected via the 19-way GPIO Cfg Speaker Internal Cfg Units Clarifier Customer Device Customer Name Customer Profile Customer Radio Customer Reference Display the ISO customer reference. Devices connector, on or off. Switch the internal speaker on or off. You can also toggle the internal speaker by holding MUTE. Set the default unit (metric or imperial) for temperature and distance measurements. Improve the quality of received voice by adjusting the frequency of the currently selected channel/mode to exactly match that of the received signal. You can also display the Clarifier screen by pressing CLAR. Display the Codan type number of the device. Display the ISO (sales order number) customer name. Display the ISO customer profile. Display the ISO transceiver type. display the serial number enter option codes display the firmware version display the product name rename the transceiver gain access to the lists Do the following:

For more information see page 216, Devices entry. Switch Easitalk on or off. You can also toggle Easitalk by pressing EASITALK. Use the transceiver to tune to any frequency between 250 kHz and 30 MHz. Easitalk Free Tune The Control List Default 5 seconds 5 seconds Disabled Enabled Metric 2110 2110 Off 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 205 The Control List Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Name of entry GPS Error Time Use this entry to... Set the time the transceiver waits to receive updated GPS information before it displays an error message. Default 10 minutes NOTE You cannot make Send Position calls until the transceiver receives valid GPS information. If you send an Emergency call before valid GPS information is received, the message No GPS data available is sent with the call. If you receive a Get Position call, the same message is sent to the caller. GPS Screen Help Mode Key Beep Key Hold Time Key Repeat Rate Key Scroll Speed Key Timeout LQA Screen Macro Pause When valid GPS data is received again a message is displayed on the front panel to inform you of this. Display information about your GPS position. For more information see page 222, GPS Screen entry. Switch Help Mode on or off. When Help Mode is switched on, the top line of the front panel screen displays a detailed description of the screen you are on. When Help Mode is switched off, the top line displays the standard description for the screen. Switch key valid beeps on or off. When you press a key that is appropriate for the task you are performing, the transceiver makes a valid beep. When you press an inappropriate key, the transceiver makes an error beep. The Key Beep entry enables you to switch valid key beeps on or off. You cannot switch off error beeps. Set the length of time that a key must be held down for a hold action. Set the speed with which the they are held down. Set the speed with which the characters on a key scroll when the key is held down. Set the time the transceiver waits between two presses of the same key to display the next character on the key. When this time elapses the transceiver inserts the character displayed and moves the cursor to the next space. Display information regarding the most recent LQA information update. The information includes the remote station address, local and remote BER/SINAD, LQA score, and best channel/mode. For more information see page 224, LQA Screen entry. Set the pause time of macros that have been set to operate Before pause or After pause. The macro pause time is also the time that each step in a macro is displayed when the Macro Single Step entry is switched on. For more information on macros and hot keys see page 237, Hot keys. keys repeat when and

, Off On 0.5 seconds 0.2 seconds 1 second 1 second 3 seconds 206 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Name of entry Macro Single Step Manual Tune Messages Mode Mute Mute Scan Use this entry to... Switch macro single stepping on or off. This enables you to debug macros by running them a step at a time. For more information on macros and hot keys see page 237, Hot keys. Manually tune the antenna. You can also display the Manual Tune screen by pressing TUNE. Store up to 10 messages for use in Get Status and Message calls. For more information see page 225, Messages entry. Change the mode used with the currently selected channel. You can also change the mode by pressing MODE. For more information on modes see page 229, The Mode List. Switch mute on or off. You can also toggle the mute on and off by pressing MUTE. Set the type of mute selected when scanning starts. If you want mute to open when:

a selective call to your station is detected, or when voice is detected during scanning of channels in a voice network, select Selcall voice is detected on a channel in a voice network, select Voice voice is detected on a channel in any type of network (that is, the scanning rate is reduced), select Scan for Voice

The Control List Default No Voice Scan for Voice automatically reverts to Voice when scanning stops. NOTE You can toggle the mute type, to prevent mute opening on detected voice, by pressing V/S. Store a numeric password (up to 10 digits) for administrator access to the transceiver. Store a numeric password (up to 6 digits) for user access to the transceiver. Switch off the transceiver. Set the mode in which the RS232 19-way serial port operates. If the port is:

Set the baud rate of the RS232 19-way serial port. Switch scanning on or off. Enable or disable scanning. not in use, select None receiving GPS information, select GPS controlling and monitoring the transceiver, select CICS None 9600 Yes Password Admin Password User Power Off RS232 Mode RS232 Speed Scan Scan Allow 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 207 The Control List Table 22: Entries in the Control List (cont.) Name of entry Screen Auto-Dim Screen Brightness Screen Contrast Screen Scroll Rate Screen Scroll Step Secure Index Secure Key Secure Mode Time Local Time Screen Time Zone Offset Update Main Menu Welcome Screen Welcome Text Default 1 minute 0.8 seconds 1 Global 0 hours Use this entry to... Set the time the transceiver waits after a key has been pressed to switch off the backlighting on the front panel screen. The backlighting is automatically switched on again when a key is pressed. Set the brightness of the screen. Set the contrast of the screen. Set the speed with which characters on the screen scroll when the line length exceeds the screen width. Set the number of characters on the screen that scroll as a block when the line length exceeds the screen width. Select the Corporate key. Set the Corporate key for a particular index. Set the default operating mode of the voice encryptor when you press SEC. The options are:

Global

Set the local date and time. For more information see page 67, Setting the time and date. Display the current date and time. For more information see page 67, Setting the time and date. Set the difference between the time displayed on the date/time screen and UTC. For more information see page 67, Setting the time and date. Refresh lists in the Main Menu. Display the welcome screen. This screen is briefly displayed when the transceiver is switched on. Store up to three lines of text to be displayed on the welcome screen. If all three lines of text are blank, the welcome screen is not displayed when the transceiver is switched on. Corporate 208 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual ALE entries The Control List NOTE NOTE CAUTION You must have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed to use the ALE entries in the Control List. In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). Do not attempt to change the ALE settings in the Control List unless you are familiar with ALE operation. For more information on ALE, refer to FED-STD-1045 ALE. The initial values that are set in your transceiver by Codan should provide good performance. ALE Accept ALL Call ALL calls are not addressed to a specific station. If your station detects a call with a matching ALL address syntax, it will enter the linked state and alert the operator. If you do not want to receive either global or selective ALL calls, disable this feature. ALE Accept ANY Call ANY calls are not addressed to a specific station. If your station detects a call with a matching ANY address syntax, it will send a response (random slot) to the initiating station. Your station will enter a link when it receives an acknowledgement from the initiating station. If you do not want to receive either global or selective ANY calls, disable this feature. ALE Accept Wildcard Call Wildcard calls are not addressed to a specific station. If your station detects a call with a matching Wildcard address syntax, it will send a response (random slot) to the initiating station. Your station will enter a link when it receives an acknowledgement from the initiating station. If you do not want to receive Wildcard calls, disable this feature. ALE AMD Position AMD data can be sent at different positions within an ALE call. You can set the transceiver to send it in the leading part of the call, or you can set the transceiver to automatically select the best place to send the AMD data with the call, in either the leading or acknowledge part of the call. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 209 The Control List With ALE calling, the transceiver may cycle through several channels before a link is established. If you select Leading, the AMD data is always positioned in the leading part of the call. The data will be transmitted prior to any response from the receiving station. If the transceiver abandons this channel and moves to the next best channel, it will send the AMD data again prior to any response being received. The leading position is required for interoperability with older Codan transceivers (firmware earlier than V4.00) and may be required for interoperability with transceivers from other vendors. If you select Auto, the transceiver will determine the best position for the AMD data in the call. It may move the AMD data from the leading part of the call, sending it after a response has been received from the other station. Auto is the recommended setting. NOTE The ALE AMD Position entry is only effective in Auto when the networks used to make the call have their Privacy Mode set to Plain. ALE BER ALE control information is sent and received in blocks of data called ALE words. Each word is sent three times to reduce the effects of fading, interference and noise. When the words are decoded the transceiver records the number of errors that occurred in the transmission. The number of errors indicates the quality of the channel used. A bit error rate of 0 indicates perfect reception. A bit error rate of 48 indicates that all bits of the ALE word were bad. The ALE BER entry enables you to specify the number of errors you will tolerate in this test, which indicates the quality of the channels on which you are prepared to accept calls. Also see page 211, ALE Golay. CAUTION It is recommended that this entry is not altered from the factory setting. ALE Call Threshold When the quality of a channel is tested it is given an LQA score. This score is based on the results of local and remote measurements for BER and SINAD and on the call weighting value set in the ALE Call Weighting entry. NOTE If the ALE LQA Exchange entry is set to Off, remote measurements are not used. Generally, a score of 25% indicates the minimum acceptable standard for voice communication. A score of 50% or higher indicates a good channel. The ALE Call Threshold entry enables you to set:

the minimum score a channel must achieve for it to be tried in ALE calls the minimum acceptable standard for the channel at the time when a link is being established NOTE The transceiver will attempt to make calls on channels for which there is no score, but only after channels with a score above the threshold have been tried. 210 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Control List ALE Call Weighting When the quality of a channel is tested the channel is given an LQA score. The ALE Call Weighting entry enables you to weight the scoring process according to the use of the transceiver. For example, if the transceiver is mainly used to make voice calls you would select Mostly voice. When Lowest acceptable is selected the transceiver will attempt a call on the channel with the lowest frequency (with an LQA score above the set threshold), then attempt the channel with the next higher frequency and LQA score etc, until a link is established. In some situations where propagation distances may be less than a few hundred kilometres, weighting the LQA scores in this way increases their effectiveness. ALE Golay ALE control information is sent and received in blocks of data called ALE words. After a word has been received, BER tested and accepted, the transceiver performs a Golay test to check it for errors and correct it if necessary. The number of error bits per word indicates the quality of the channel used to transmit the word. Golay testing can detect and correct up to three error bits per ALE word. It can also detect four error bits but is not guaranteed to correct all four. Note that excessive errors can sometimes create false readings. The ALE Golay entry enables you to specify the number of errors you will tolerate and correct in this test, which indicates the quality of the channels on which you are prepared to accept calls. Also see page 210, ALE BER. CAUTION It is recommended that this entry is not altered from the factory setting. ALE Hangup ALL Call During an ALL call, a link is established implicitly without the receiving stations responding to the initiating station. When the ALE Hangup ALL Call entry is enabled, the initiating station will send a link termination sequence when SCAN is pressed. All stations that entered the link will hang up the link and return to scanning when they receive this sequence. ALE LQA Average When the transceiver periodically tests the quality of the channels in your network it stores the results for future use. The transceiver uses an averaging method to reduce the effect that the new reading may have on the current channel values. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 211 The Control List The ALE LQA Average entry enables you to select the averaging method used. If you want to:

disable the averaging feature and replace the old results with the new results, select New retain 75% of the old results and 25% of the new, select Mainly old retain 87.5% of the old results and 12.5% of the new, select Old replace the old results with the average of the old and new results, select Both

CAUTION LQA information gathered by the initiating station during a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network is not averaged according to the ALE LQA Average entry. This new information replaces any information stored for the channels and stations detected during the call. LQA information gathered by the receiving station during a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network is averaged according to the ALE LQA Average entry for that station. ALE LQA Clear Use the ALE LQA Clear entry to clear the LQA information in the transceiver. If a large amount of information is stored this may take a few minutes. If a significant change has occurred to the transceiver, the ALE LQA information will adapt more rapidly to the new environment if the information is cleared. ALE LQA Decay When your transceiver periodically records the quality of the channels in your network it stores the results for future use. Several factors can affect the accuracy of these results including:

an insufficient number of ALE sounding transmissions being made in your network an insufficient number of ALE calls being made (which prevents the transceiver from exchanging channel quality information with other transceivers) stations moving their location antenna loading, nearby physical structures and local noise for stations mounted in vehicles

These factors can lead to the deterioration of good channels going unnoticed. To avoid this, use the ALE LQA Decay entry to artificially decay channel quality information over time. This forces the transceiver to continually work against the artificial decay to maintain an accurate picture of channel quality that does not overestimate actual conditions. For mobile stations the recommended decay period is 14 days. For base stations it is 1530 days. If you do not want to use this feature, select Disabled. 212 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Control List ALE LQA Exchange If you want the transceiver to send and receive LQA information to and from other stations during calls, set the ALE LQA Exchange entry to On. If the ALE LQA Exchange entry in your transceiver is set to Off it will not request LQA information from other stations. Your transceiver will receive any LQA information sent from the other station. NOTE NOTE When the ALE LQA Exchange entry is set to On, it increases the length of time it takes to establish a call by approximately 4 seconds for every 10 channels on which the call is tried. LQA information is always exchanged during a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network, regardless of the setting in the ALE LQA Exchange entry. ALE LQA Mapping The ALE LQA Mapping entry determines the method by which the LQA information is stored within the transceiver, that is, according to frequency or channel name. ALE Retries When you make a call in an ALE/CALM network the transceiver attempts to establish an ALE link with the other station on the best available channel. If you want the transceiver to retry each channel before trying the next best channel in the network, set the number of retries you want in the ALE Retries entry. The transceiver can retry channels up to five times. If you do not want the transceiver to retry channels, set the ALE Retries entry to zero. ALE Selective Msg When you make a Selective call in an ALE/CALM network you are able to include a message with the call. If you want to be prompted to include a message with a Selective call in an ALE/CALM network, set the ALE Selective Msg entry to Enabled. If you do not need to send messages with Selective calls on ALE/CALM networks, or your transceiver does not contain ALE/CALM networks, set this entry to Disabled. ALE Silent Mode The ALE Silent Mode entry disables automatic ALE transmissions from the transceiver. When ALE Silent Mode is switched on you can send ALE calls but not receive them, and the transceiver receives sounding signals but does not send them. When ALE Silent Mode is switched off the transceiver operates as a normal ALE station. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 213 The Control List ALE Site Mgr the ESN of the transceiver any other station self addresses stored in that transceiver the tuning time of the transceivers antenna The ALE Site Mgr entry enables the transceiver to collect information on other transceivers with which it communicates. Each time your transceiver detects an unknown station address it requests:

It requests this information up to three times, and only 2110 SSB Transceivers in which the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option is installed can respond. The information collected enables your transceiver to optimise calls to the other transceiver (by adjusting the time taken to wait for the antenna to tune) and to minimise soundings. NOTE If your network consists of only a few 2110 SSB Transceivers with the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed and many other transceivers, you may want to set the ALE Site Mgr entry to Off. Your transceiver will attempt to interrogate the other transceivers in the network each time calls are made. ALE Soundings The ALE Soundings entry enables the transceiver to vary the conclusion that it sends with a sounding. If you want the transceiver to:

send a TWAS conclusion to the sounding, that is, not remain in a state that will accept a link, select Default send a TIS conclusion to the sounding, that is, pause at the end of the sounding ready to accept a link, select Invite link switch off all sounding activity regardless of the Sounding Interval setting in the Network List, select Disabled

214 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Auto Resume entries NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). The Control List The auto resume entriesAuto Resume Time, Auto Resume Mode and Auto Resume Listenenable you to set the transceiver to automatically begin a task when scanning is switched off and there has been no PTT, channel change, scan on/off, mute on/off or call sending activity for a certain length of time. This enables you to ensure that the transceiver resumes scanning automatically if it is left unattended. Use the Auto Resume Time entry to specify the time you want the transceiver to wait, since the last key was pressed, before it begins the task. You can select from 120 minutes. Use the Auto Resume Mode entry to specify the task. If you:

want the transceiver to start scanning, select Start scan

want the transceiver to close the link to end any call in progress and, if it was scanning prior to the call, resume scanning, select Close link do not want the transceiver to resume scanning, select Off

If you selected Start scan as the value in the Auto Resume Mode entry, use the Auto Resume Listen entry to specify the scan method you want to use. If you want the transceiver to:

scan according to the value set in the Mute Scan entry, select Leave as is scan for voice and calls addressed to your station, select Voice and calls scan only for calls addressed to your station, select Calls only NOTE If the scan method has been altered by the user, the transceiver will return to the scan method specified in the Auto Resume Listen entry following the time that is specified in the Auto Resume Time entry. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 215 The Control List Devices entry NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). list of built-in tests ESN version of firmware installed product name lists stored in the device The Devices entry in the Control List enables you to display information specific to the transceiver. You can display the:

You can also use the Devices entry to install new options and to rename the device. Figure 42 shows the type of information that you can display about the device and the lists that are stored in the device. Figure 42: The Devices entry in the Control List Control List Control List Devices Devices 2110 SSB Transceiver Built-in Test Built-in Test Serial number Option code Firmware version Product name Rename device Mode Channel Network Keypad Control User Control RF Address Calls In Phone Link Calls Out NET 216 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Selecting a built-in test The Control List until Main Menu is displayed. To select a built-in test:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press

. 1 Scroll to Devices, then press

. 1 Scroll to Built-in Test, then press

. The hyphen next to the test name, in this case, <Auto>, indicates that the test has not been run in this session of testing. 1 Scroll to the test that you want to perform, then press

. When the test is in progress, the hyphen is replaced by a large dot. When the test has been completed, the hyphen is replaced by a that the test has passed or failed respectively. or a to show Displaying the electronic serial number of a device until Main Menu is displayed. To display the electronic serial number of a device:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Devices, then press 1 Scroll to Serial number, then press

. The ESN for the device is displayed and scrolls across the screen. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 217 The Control List Installing an option in the transceiver When you purchase an option for your transceiver (such as FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM or GPS) you receive a 16-character option code. To install the option, you need to enter the option code using the Devices entry in the Control List. until Main Menu is displayed. To install an option in the transceiver:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press

. 1 Scroll to Devices, then press

. 1 Scroll to Option code, then press The option code screen is displayed. 1 Enter the code, then press

. NOTE The transceiver automatically adds dashes after each four digits. The option is installed. NOTE Depending on the option you installed, a message may be displayed that asks you to restart the transceiver. Displaying the firmware version of your transceiver If you need to check the firmware version in your transceiver, use the Firmware version setting under the Devices entry in the Control List. until Main Menu is displayed. To display the firmware version of your transceiver:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Devices, then press 1 Scroll to Firmware version, then press

. The firmware version is displayed. 218 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Displaying the product name of a device The Control List until Main Menu is displayed. To display the product name of a device:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Devices, then press 1 Scroll to Product name, then press

. The product name is displayed. Renaming your transceiver The transceiver is shipped with a standard name, that is, 2110 SSB Transceiver. If you want to rename the transceiver, use the Rename device setting under the Devices entry in the Control List. until Main Menu is displayed. To rename your transceiver:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Devices, then press 1 Scroll to Rename device, then hold

. The name of the transceiver is displayed. 1 Enter a new name for the transceiver, then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 219 The Control List Accessing lists from the Devices entry NOTE In the following discussion, you will need to log in as administrator to see the Control List (see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). You can access all the lists through the Main Menu. You can also access them through the Devices entry in the Control List (see Figure 43). Figure 43: Lists as they are displayed in the Main Menu and under the Devices entry in the Control List Devices Main Menu Address Channel Control Keypad Mode NET Network Phone Link Built-in Test Built-in Test Serial number Option code Firmware version Product name Rename device Mode Channel Network Keypad Control User Control RF Address Calls In Phone Link Calls Out NET Displaying a list using the Devices entry until Main Menu is displayed. To display a list using the Devices entry in the Control List:

1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Devices, then press 1 Scroll to the list you want, then press

. NOTE If the list is not displayed it may be hidden at user or admin level. Switch full view on, and/or log into admin level to display the list (for help see page 112, Displaying full and normal view and page 110, Logging into admin level). You may view and edit entries and settings in the list while it is displayed. 220 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Control List Displaying and editing channels using the Devices entry When you access the Channel List from the Main Menu the transceiver selects each channel as you scroll to it. If you access the Channel List through the Devices entry you can display and edit the channels without stopping channel scanning. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 221 The Control List GPS Screen entry The GPS receiver is a hardware option. It must be enabled in the firmware by an option code. You can configure the GPS receiver to report in metric or imperial units via the Cfg Units setting in the Control List. The GPS Screen entry in the Control List enables you to display your current GPS position. Press GPS to access the GPS screen. Table 23 explains the abbreviations for each type of reading you may receive. The new reading indicator is a number that increments each time a new reading is received. It cycles from 1 to 9. Figure 44: The GPS Screen entry in the Control List type of reading new reading indicator altitude latitude longitude Table 23: Types of readings on the GPS screen Abbreviation Aut Bad Description Automatic reading Bad reading NOTE If you connect an external GPS unit to the 2110 SSB Transceiver, and an internal unit is already fitted, the information from the external GPS unit will take precedence over the internal GPS unit. When you disconnect the external GPS unit, restart your transceiver to re-initiate the internal GPS unit. 222 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual The Control List Setting up the transceiver NOTE The 2110 SSB Transceiver is compatible with NMEA format 0183 V2.00. It will accept and process the following GPS receiver input sentences:

RMC, GLL and GGA. Before you display the GPS screen, make sure that the GPS hardware option has been correctly fitted in the transceiver and is enabled. Displaying the GPS screen To display the GPS screen:

1 Press GPS. The GPS screen is displayed. For example:

NOTE If no data is displayed on the GPS screen, the transceiver has not received any valid GPS data. 1 Press GPS to return to the screen from which you began. Calculating distance and bearing To calculate the distance and bearing to another station:

1 Go to an Address List or Call Log entry containing a GPS position of the other station. The transceiver calculates the distance to the other transceiver and its bearing from true north with respect to your current location. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 223 The Control List LQA Screen entry NOTE The LQA Screen entry is only displayed if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed in the transceiver. The LQA screen is automatically displayed when you make a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network, and is accessed at other times via the LQA Screen entry in the Control List. It enables you to display the most current LQA information for the best channel. If you need to refer to this screen frequently, consider creating a hot key to display it, or making it the home screen (for more information see page 237, Hot keys, page 329, Example 2: displaying an information screen and page 95, Setting the home screen). Figure 45: The LQA Screen entry in the Control List LQA score BER/SINAD best channel number of channels tried highest number of responses on a channel The LQA screen contains information on the most recent LQA exchange that has occurred. This may be due to a Channel Test call in an ALE/CALM network, a sounding, or an ALE call. NOTE LQA information derived from a sounding will not contain BER/SINAD information from the remote site. The LQA score is an overall measure of the quality of the information between the two stations for a particular channel/mode combination. This score is compared with the ALE Call Threshold to determine whether or not the channel is suitable. The local and remote BER/SINAD provide a measure of the effectiveness of data/voice transmission on the channel. The BER may range from 0 (no errors) to 30. The transceiver typically does not use channels with a BER > 12. The SINAD may range from 0 (poor channel) to 30. The channel/mode combination with the highest LQA score is displayed on the LQA screen. The highest number of replies on a channel/mode is displayed with the number of channels on which a response was received. The information presented in the LQA screen reflects information in the LQA database, and as such will be affected by the ALE LQA Decay entry in the Control List. 224 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Messages entry You can store up to 10 messages in the Messages entry for use in Get Status and Message calls. When you make one of these calls, you can scroll through these messages then select and/or edit the one you want to send. The Control List To pre-type and store a message:

1 Press CALL. 1 Scroll to Message?, then press

. 1 Scroll to the setting in which you want to enter your message, then hold

. 1 Enter the message, then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. 1 Press or PTT to cancel the call. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 225 The Control List This page has been left blank intentionally. 226 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 15 The Keypad List CODAN The Keypad List stores information about the keys on the front panel and the events that occur when the keys are pressed. NOTE The transceiver is shipped with the Keypad List hidden at admin level. To display the list see page 113, Hiding and showing information. The Keypad List contains an entry for each key on the front panel. Each entry stores a list of the macros assigned to the key, and a list of the upper-case, lower-case and numeric characters that you can enter using the key (see Table 24). NOTE There are no entries for the CALL,

, you cannot assign macros to these keys.

, and keys as It also contains two entries that you can use to create and maintain macros. The Special entry contains a number of macros that you cannot create from the front panel but that you can copy and assign to any key. The Unassigned entry is a place where you can store macros for which you have no immediate use. For more information on macros and the Special and Unassigned entries see page 237, Hot keys. Table 24: Entries in the Keypad List Name of key Macros Upper case Lower case Numeric a

0 space qz1 abc2 def3 ghi4 jkl5 mno6 prs7 tuv8 wxy9

. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1QZ 2ABC 3DEF 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7PRS 8TUV 9WXY Emergency F1 F2 F3

assigned to key Call Logs - Out A Easitalk Channel Screen 0 space Manual Tune Clarifier Next Mode Free Rx QZ1 ABC2 DEF3 GHI4 JKL5 MNO6 PRS7 TUV8 WXY9 Tx Pwr Mute Type Secure GPS Call Emergency Mute Call Key Scan Toggle 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 227 The Keypad List Table 24: Entries in the Keypad List (cont.) Name of key Macros Upper case Lower case Numeric assigned to key Scan Toggle Mute Power Down Power Down Mute Type Mute Call Logs - Out Call Logs - In New Call End Call Call Key Scan Toggle Call Emergency Secure Hang up Mute Power Special Unassigned 228 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 16 The Mode List CODAN The Mode List stores information about the modes available in the transceiver. A mode is a set of parameters to be used with a channel consisting of a sideband and an IF filter, as shown in Table 25. An IF filter may be centred differently in the audio pass band to suit the particular requirements. For example, USB CW and USB PT use the same 500 Hz filter, but with different centre frequencies. Table 25: Examples of modes Name of mode USB LSB AM USB CW LSB CW AM CW USB PT LSB PT USBW LSBW Sideband USB LSB AM USB LSB AM USB LSB USB LSB IF centre 1500 Hz 1500 Hz 1500 Hz 900 Hz 900 Hz 900 Hz 1700 Hz 1700 Hz 1650 Hz 1650 Hz IF width 2500 Hz 2500 Hz 2500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 2700 Hz 2700 Hz The modes from which you can select depend on the options installed in the transceiver. The Mode List is display-only: you cannot add, edit or delete modes from it. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 229 The Mode List This page has been left blank intentionally. 230 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 17 Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Using the transceiver in free tune (232) Using the transceiver in Amateur Mode (235) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 231 Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode Using the transceiver in free tune The transceiver can be used as a free tune receiver. This enables you to tune to any frequency within the transceivers operating range of 250 kHz to 30 MHz. In some circumstances, the options installed on your transceiver may enable you to transmit while free tuning, for example, the Amateur Mode option enables you to transmit during free tune when in amateur frequency bands (see Table 26 on page 235). Entering a specific free tune frequency To enter a specific frequency:

1 Press FREE Rx. 1 Press

. 1 Enter a new frequency or edit the existing frequency as required, then press 1 Do one or more of the following:

to exit to the screen from which you began, press FREE Rx. to exit free tune receive, go to the Channel List and select another channel (for help see page 51, Selecting a channel) If you re-enter Free Tune prior to selecting another channel in the Channel List, the selected frequency will be the same as that last used. 232 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode Tuning to a free tune frequency To tune to a frequency:

1 Press FREE Rx. The transceiver tunes to the frequency that was currently selected in the Channel List and the cursor is placed under the last digit. If you are able to transmit during Free Tune, the Rx will be replaced by a Tx within the Amateur band frequencies, as shown below. The F2 and F3 keys on the keypad can now be used as left/right scroll keys, as indicated on the Free Tune screen. NOTE Press F3 repeatedly to insert a decimal point and enable the frequency to be tuned to two decimal places (0.01 kHz). 1 To increase or decrease the frequency by units of one, ten, one hundred and so on, move the cursor to the appropriate position... ..then press the and keys. The transceiver tunes to the new frequency. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 233 Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode 1 Do one or more of the following:

to exit to the screen from which you began, press FREE Rx. to exit free tune receive, go to the Channel List and select another channel (for help see page 51, Selecting a channel) If you re-enter Free Tune prior to selecting another channel in the Channel List, the selected frequency will be the same as that last used. 234 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Using the transceiver in Amateur Mode Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode If you have Amateur Mode enabled in your transceiver you will be able to transmit on the Amateur bands shown in Table 26. You will not be able to transmit on frequencies outside of these bands using Free Tune Mode. You may be able to transmit on pre-

configured channels outside amateur bands. Table 26: Amateur bands in the 2110 SSB Transceiver Frequency

(MHz) 1.82.0 3.54.0 7.07.3 10.110.15 14.014.35 18.018.2 21.021.45 24.825.0 28.029.7 Amateur Mode uses the frequency entered on the Free Tune screen. For information on using the Free Tune screen see page 232, Using the transceiver in free tune. When you want to transmit on the selected frequency, press PTT to tune the antenna. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 235 Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode This page has been left blank intentionally. 236 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 18 Hot keys CODAN This section contains the following topics:

About hot keys (238) Full-time and part-time hot keys (238) Assigning several macros to one key (239) Automating several tasks with one macro (239) Troubleshooting macros (239) Storing macros (240) Ideas for creating macros (240) Creating a macro and assigning it to a hot key (241) Copying a macro (244) Moving a macro (245) Renaming a macro (246) Deleting a macro (246) Creating a macro to perform two or more tasks (247) Special macros (249) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 237 Hot keys About hot keys If you want to automate some of the tasks you perform with the transceiver you can create hot keys on the front panel to perform the tasks for you. For example, if you frequently call a particular station using an entry in the Address List you can create a hot key to select the Address List from the Main Menu, search for the entry, then make the call. Performing these tasks is then as simple as pressing the hot key. Hot keys can be created to perform any task or series of tasks that involve using a list. These include:

Table 5 on page 30 lists the standard hot keys on the front panel. Creating a hot key is a simple process. The transceiver prompts you for information about the way you want the hot key to operate and puts this information into a macro. It then prompts you to press the key to which you want to assign the macro (that is, the key you want to be the hot key for the task) and enter a name for the macro. Using the hot key is as simple as pressing the key. opening a list at a particular entry displaying the time screen in the Control List calling a specific station changing a setting Full-time and part-time hot keys

, Any key can be used as a hot key except the CALL, you want to be able to use a hot key at any time, regardless of any task you may be performing, use the MUTE, SCAN, used as full-time hot keys. The remaining keys on the front panel, that is, 09, * and #, can be used as part-time hot keys. They operate as hot keys at any time except when you are entering or editing text. In this situation they are used to enter characters and cannot be used as hot keys. keys on the front panel. These keys can be key. If and

, or

, Table 27: Full-time and part-time hot keys Full-time hot keys Part-time hot keys MUTE SCAN TUNE 1 QZ FREE Rx 4 GHI 7 PRS EASI TALK CLAR 2ABC 5 JKL SEC 8TUV VIEW 0 MODE DEF3 Tx PWR6 GPS 9 CALL LOGS Keys that cannot be used as hot keys CALL PTT button on handset 238 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Assigning several macros to one key Hot keys Several macros can be assigned to one key. When you use a hot key to which several macros have been assigned, the list of macros is displayed so you can select the one you want, as shown in Figure 46. Figure 46: Using a hot key to which several macros have been assigned The order in which the macros are listed can be changed. When you assign a macro to a key you are prompted to select the position in the list in which you want to insert the new macro. You can also change the order after you have assigned the macro to a key by copying or moving the macro to and from the same or a different key. For more information see page 244, Copying a macro and page 245, Moving a macro. Automating several tasks with one macro Macros can be created to perform two or more tasks in succession. For example, you can create a macro that selects a particular channel then makes a call, or that displays your GPS position then sends that position to a particular station. You can create a macro that performs several tasks by either joining two macros or adding to a macro. For more information see page 247, Joining macros and page 248, Adding to a macro. Troubleshooting macros If you need to troubleshoot your macros, the Macro Single Step entry in the Control List may help you. When this entry is switched on and you run a macro, each individual step in the macro is displayed on the screen. The length of time each step is displayed can be set using the Macro Pause entry in the Control List. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 239 Hot keys Storing macros Macros are physically stored in the Keypad List. The Keypad List contains an entry for each key on the front panel. When a macro is assigned to a key it is stored in the Macro setting for the key. If you do not want to assign a macro to a key (because, for example, you have no immediate use for it and do not want to delete it) you can assign or move it to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List for future use. You can do this by pressing prompted to assign a macro to a key. when Ideas for creating macros Before you create a macro you may want to read the examples provided on page 327, Hot key examples for ideas about the types of tasks you can automate and the options available to you. 240 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Creating a macro and assigning it to a hot key To create a macro and assign it to a hot key:

1 Decide on the task you want the hot key to perform. 1 Navigate to the list, entry or setting in which the task begins. Hot keys For example, if the task is to open a list at a particular entry, navigate to that entry. If the task is to enter a particular value in a setting, navigate to the setting and enter the value. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Create macro, then press to open the List Manager. The transceiver prompts you to select the action you want the macro to perform and/or the timing with which you want it to operate. NOTE The information for which you are prompted and the options from which you can select vary according to the list, entry or setting from which you began. 1 If you are prompted to select the action you want the macro to perform, scroll to the option you want, then press Table 28 on page 242 explains each option. 1 Scroll to the timing with which you want the macro to operate, then press Table 28).

(see 1 Press the key to which you want to assign the macro. To assign the macro to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List, press You cannot assign the macro to the Special entry. The macros assigned to the key or entry are displayed. At the end of the list, or if there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, <end> is displayed. If you pressed the wrong key, press you want to assign the macro. to go back a step, then press the key to which

. 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the new macro, then press To insert the macro at the end of the list, scroll to <end>, then press

. 1 Type a name for the new macro, then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. The macro is created and assigned to the key. The List Manager remains open. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 241 Hot keys Table 28: Macro options Option Macro action? Go to this entry Display the list or entry you were on when you created the macro. Select this option if you want the macro to... Setting Display the list or entry on which a marker has been set. Go to marker Go to this chan Select the channel you were on when you created the macro. Display chan Go to this freq Display the currently selected channel. Select the Free Tune frequency and cursor position you were on when you created the macro. Display the currently selected frequency in the Free Tune screen with the cursor position you were on when you created the macro. Change the value in the setting you were on to the value that was displayed when you created the macro. For example, if you entered a value of 100 in the setting then began creating the macro, the macro would set the value to 100. Display freq Set this value Set next value Go to the setting you were on when you created the macro, then select the next possible value for the setting. For example, if the possible values for the setting you were on were Off and On, and prior to running the macro the value was set to Off, the macro would set the value to On. Display the value in the setting you were on when you created the macro. Display value 242 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 28: Macro options (cont.) Hot keys Option Macro operates?

Setting Immediately Before pause After pause Select this option if you want the macro to... Perform the task immediately without displaying the screen involved. For example, select a new channel without displaying the channel screen in the Channel List. Perform the task immediately, save the new value if the macro changed a value, briefly display the screen involved, then return to the screen you were on when you pressed the hot key. For example, select a new channel, briefly display the channel screen in the Channel List, then return to the screen you were on when you pressed the hot key. NOTE To change the length of time the screen is displayed, use the Macro Pause entry in the Control List. Perform the task immediately, briefly display the screen involved, save the new value if the macro changed a value, then return to the screen you were on when you pressed the hot key. (If the macro changes a value the pause gives you a chance to cancel the change before it is saved by pressing For example, change a value in a Control List entry, briefly display the entry, save the change, then return to the screen you were on when you pressed the hot key. NOTE To change the length of time the screen is displayed, use the Macro Pause entry in the Control List. ) Wait Perform the task immediately then remain on the screen involved. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 243 Hot keys Copying a macro Use the Copy macro entry in the List Manager to:

copy a macro from one key and assign the copy to the same or a different key copy a macro from the Special or Unassigned entry in the Keypad List and assign it to a key NOTE You cannot copy a macro to the Special entry in the Keypad List. to open the List Manager. To copy a macro:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Copy macro, then press 1 Do one of the following:

. to go to the Unassigned entry to go to the Special entry press the key to which the macro you want to copy is assigned press press

The macros assigned to the key or entry are displayed. If there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, (none) is displayed. Press go back a step, then press the key to which the macro is assigned. to 1 Scroll to the macro you want to copy, then press

. 1 Press the key to which you want to copy the macro. If you want to copy the macro to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List, press

. The macros assigned to the key or entry are displayed. At the end of the list, or if no macros are assigned to the key or entry, <end> is displayed. If you pressed the wrong key, press you want to assign the macro. to go back a step, then press the key to which 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the copied

. macro, then press To insert the macro at the end of the list, scroll to <end>, then press The macro is copied and the List Manager remains open. 244 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Moving a macro Hot keys Use the Move macro entry in the List Manager to:

move a macro from one key to another

move a macro to or from the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List change the order in which macros are listed on a hot key NOTE You cannot move macros to or from the Special entry in the Keypad List, but you can copy them and rename the copies if necessary. to open the List Manager. To move a macro:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Move macro, then press 1 Do one of the following:

. to go to the Unassigned entry press the key to which the macro you want to move is assigned press

The macros assigned to the key or entry are displayed. If there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, (none) is displayed. Press go back a step, then press the key to which the macro is assigned. to 1 Scroll to the macro you want to move, then press

. 1 Press the key to which you want to move the macro. If you want to move the macro to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List, press

. The macros assigned to the key or entry are displayed. At the end of the list, or if no macros are assigned to the key or entry, <end> is displayed. If you pressed the wrong key, press you want to assign the macro. to go back a step, then press the key to which 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the moved

. macro, then press To insert the macro at the end of the list, select <end>, then press The macro is moved and the List Manager remains open. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 245 Hot keys Renaming a macro NOTE You cannot rename macros in the Special entry in the Keypad List, but you can copy them and rename the copies if necessary. to open the List Manager. To rename a macro:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press 1 Scroll to Rename macro, then press 1 Do one of the following:

. to go to the Unassigned entry press the key to which the macro you want to rename is assigned press

The macros assigned to the key or entry are displayed. If there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, (none) is displayed. Press go back a step, then press the key to which the macro is assigned. 1 Scroll to the macro you want to rename, then press

. The name is highlighted. 1 Enter a new name for the macro, then press

. NOTE For help with entering text see page 52, Entering and editing text. The macro is renamed and the List Manager remains open. Deleting a macro to open the List Manager. To delete a macro:

1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Delete macro, then press 1 Do one of the following:

. to go to the Unassigned entry press the key to which the macro you want to delete is assigned press

The macros assigned to the key or entry are displayed. If there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, (none) is displayed. Press go back a step, then press the key to which the macro is assigned. to to 1 Scroll to the macro you want to delete, then press

. The macro is deleted and the List Manager remains open. 246 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Creating a macro to perform two or more tasks Hot keys If you want to create a macro that performs two or more tasks in succession you can do so by joining two macros or by adding to a macro. For example, if you have created a macro to display the GPS screen in the Control List and another to send your GPS position to a particular station, you can join them to create one macro. If you have created a macro that performs the first task you can add to it by creating a macro to perform the second task, then add this macro to the first macro in one step. Joining macros Joining macros involves joining two existing macros. Before you begin you need to consider the order in which you want the macros performed. The transceiver will prompt you to select the macro you want performed first, then the macro you want performed second. It will then make a copy of the second and join it to the end of the first. The new combined macro takes the name of the first macro. You can rename the macro if necessary (see page 246, Renaming a macro). NOTE You cannot join two macros if the first macro is assigned to the Special entry in the Keypad List. You can, however, make a copy of this macro, assign it to a key or to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List, then join another macro to the copy (for help see page 244, Copying a macro). to open the List Manager. To join two macros:

1 Decide on the order in which you want the hot key to perform the macros. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Join macros, then press 1 Do one of the following to select the macro that you want performed first:

. to go to the Unassigned entry press the key to which the macro is assigned press

The list of macros assigned to the key or entry is displayed. If there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, (none) is displayed. Press go back a step, then press the key to which the macro is assigned. 1 Scroll to the macro you want performed first, then press 1 Press the key to which the macro you want performed second is assigned. The list of macros assigned to the key or entry is displayed. If there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, (none) is displayed. Press go back a step, then press the key to which the macro is assigned. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual to to 247 Hot keys 1 Scroll to the macro you want performed second, then press

. A copy of the second macro is joined to the end of the first macro. The new, combined macro takes the name of the first macro. The List Manager remains open. Adding to a macro Adding to a macro involves creating a macro then adding it to the end of an existing macro in one step. The new, combined macro takes the name of the first macro. You can rename the macro if necessary (see page 246, Renaming a macro). NOTE You cannot add to a macro if the macro is assigned to the Special entry in the Keypad List. You can, however, make a copy of this macro, assign it to a key or to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List, then add to the copy (for help see page 244, Copying a macro). To add to a macro:

1 Navigate to the list, entry or setting in which the task you want to add to the existing macro begins. For example, if the task is to open a list at a particular entry, navigate to that entry. If the task is to enter a particular value in a setting, navigate to the setting and enter the value. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Add to macro, then press 1 If you are prompted to select the action you want the macro to perform, scroll to the to open the List Manager. option you want, then press

. NOTE The information for which you are prompted and the options from which you can select vary according to the list, entry or setting from which you began. Table 28 on page 242 explains each option. 1 Scroll to the timing with which you want the macro to operate, then press Table 28).

(see 1 Do one of the following:

to go to the Unassigned entry press the key to which the macro you want to add this macro is assigned press

The list of macros assigned to the key or entry is displayed. If there are no macros assigned to the key or entry, (none) is displayed. Press go back a step, then press the key to which the macro is assigned. to 248 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 1 Scroll to the macro to which you want to add the new macro, then press

. The new macro is added to the end of the existing macro. The new, combined macro takes the name of the existing macro. The List Manager remains open. Hot keys Special macros The transceiver is shipped with 11 macros that cannot be recreated from the front panel. These macros are assigned to the Special entry in the Keypad List and are listed in Table 29 on page 250. You cannot assign macros to, or delete macros from, the Special entry. You can, however, copy these macros from this entry and assign them to various keys or to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List (for help see page 244, Copying a macro). You can then use the copy as you would any other macro. The transceiver is shipped with copies of six of these macros assigned to various keys on the front panel. The:

Mute macro is assigned to the MUTE key

Call Emergency macro is assigned to the Call Key macro is assigned to the CALL key Call Logs - Out macro is assigned to the CALL LOGS key Power Down macro is assigned to the Scan Toggle macro is assigned to the SCAN key key key 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 249 Hot keys Table 29: Macros assigned to the Special entry in the Keypad List Name of macro Call Emergency Call Key Call Logs - In Call Logs - Out End Call Mute Mute Type New Call Power Down Scan Toggle Secure Description Begins a call to the Emergency 1 entry in the Address List. If there are other emergency entries in the list (named Emergency 2, Emergency 3 and so on) the macro pauses for approximately 10 seconds after the first call has ended then begins a call to the next emergency entry. The transceiver calls each emergency entry in sequence until the last entry has been called or you press PTT. Begins a call, enabling the user to enter call information when prompted. Displays the Calls In and Calls Out logs, beginning with the Calls In Log, then returns to the screen from which you began. When the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed, the Last Heard Log is displayed after the Calls Out Log. Displays the Calls Out and Calls In logs, beginning with the Calls Out Log, then returns to the screen from which you began. When the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed, the Last Heard Log is displayed after the Calls In Log. Ends a call if a call is in progress. Toggles mute on or off. Toggles between Selcall mute and Voice mute. Displays the new call screen with the address and call type of the last call made. Switches off the transceiver. Ends a call if a call is in progress, or switches scanning on or off. Toggles Voice Encryptor on or off, if installed with special firmware programmed and enabled in the transceiver. 250 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 19 Operating the transceiver from a computer CODAN This section contains the following topics:

About CICS (252) Using CICS (252) Setting up CICS (258) Terms used in CICS and the 2110 SSB Transceiver (259) CICS commands (260) Summary of command syntax (287) CICS response messages (291) CICS error messages (295) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 251 Operating the transceiver from a computer About CICS CICS is a set of commands that the transceiver understands. The commands are suitable for use from a computer. You can operate your transceiver with CICS instead of the front panel. To use CICS you must connect your transceiver to a PC or personal organiser via the RS232 serial port (see page 258, Setting up CICS). 2110 SSB Transceivers operate with CICS V3.20 (or later). CICS V3.20 includes the amd, alebeacon, beacon, lbt, link, lqa and sound commands, which enable the 2110 SSB Transceiver to operate with a third party messaging protocol, provide AMD messaging, LBT, and beacon capabilities through CICS (if the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option is installed). The amd command enables you to send messages within an established ALE link. The LBT range of commands enables you to start the LBT process and override the global Cfg LBT Mode setting in the Control List of the transceiver during specific calls. The alebeacon command enables you to start a processes that gathers LQA information within the ALE/CALM network applicable to the addresses provided with the call. Using CICS Entering commands When you enter CICS commands you can enter up to 255 characters. Commands are processed when they are ended with an ASCII carriage return character. ASCII line feed characters are ignored. When echoing is on, a received carriage return character is echoed as the ASCII carriage return/line feed sequence (see page 266, echo command). Structuring commands Commands can include variables that are user-defined, for example, gpsbeacon

<destination>[@<network>], where destination is the address of the station that you want to call. Each command and variable is separated by a space character. Variables inside single or double quotes are treated as a single variable. Space characters inside quoted text are treated as part of the text. Any user-defined variables that include a space character, such as a channel or network name, must have double quotes enclosing the variable. If you are using multiple ALL, ANY or Wildcard address syntaxes, or Group Selective addresses with a CICS command, you must enter the addresses within quotes, for example, alecall TOM,DICK,HARRY@PRIMEAST. 252 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer Command line control commands The Backspace key is used for basic editing in CICS. The use of other editing keys requires a VT100 terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal in Windows. All other characters are echoed as they are. Table 30 lists the keys that can be used to edit commands in CICS. Table 30: Editing keys used in CICS Keys Delete Backspace Ctrl+A Ctrl+C Ctrl+E Ctrl+K Ctrl+R Ctrl+U Action Deletes the character above the cursor. Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Moves to the start of the line. Aborts the current command. Moves to the end of the line. Deletes from the cursor to the end of the text. Refreshes the input line. Deletes the entire line of text entered. Moves up through the commands entered previously. Moves down through the commands entered previously. Moves one character to the left. Moves one character to the right. Special characters An equal sign (=) or a question mark (?) can be used to initiate an action, or request information (see page 430, Using = and ?). Command prompt CICS V3.20 (or later) has an optional prompt to enter commands, that is, >, which indicates commands can be entered (see page 275, prompt command). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 253 Operating the transceiver from a computer Addresses in commands Addresses can be specified with or without a network (see page 434, Using addresses with or without a network). An address in an ALE/CALM network must be upper-case letters or numbers, @ and ?. An address in a Codan Selcall network must be numbers. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use special ALE address syntaxes to send ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, and Wildcard calls through any of the existing call commands in CICS (alecall, aletelcall, call, gpsposition, pagecall, selcall). For more information see page 159, ALL address syntax, page 160, ANY address syntax, page 161, Group Selective address syntax, page 162, NET address syntax, and page 163, Wildcard address syntax. NOTE NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, or Wildcard address syntax in the alebeacon and beacon commands. The use of the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax in the gpsbeacon and statuscall commands will not be effective due to collisions of responses. If you enter the ALE address syntax...

@A@

@@A

@AB The transceiver will send... a global ALL call to all listening stations (see page 159, ALL address syntax) a selective ALL call to listening stations that have an A as the last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, TNAA, EANBA, 1NCA, 23A (see page 159, ALL address syntax) a global ANY call to all listening stations (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a selective ANY call to listening stations that have an A as the last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, TNAA, EANBA, 1NCA, 23A (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a double selective ANY call to listening stations that have

AB as the last two characters of their self address (A and

B may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, BAAB, 14BAB, Q2CAB, 1AB (see page 160, ANY address syntax) 254 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual If you enter the ALE address syntax...

@A?

ABC,JK3MN,PQR

(example only) NET address

A?B? (example only) Operating the transceiver from a computer The transceiver will send... a double selective wildcard ANY call to listening stations that have an A as the second to last character of their self address (A may be any specified upper-case letter or number) and any upper-case letter or number as the last character, for example, USAM, 19MA0, ENA9, 3DAZ (see page 160, ANY address syntax) a Group Selective call to the stations specifically addressed

(see page 161, Group Selective address syntax) a NET call to all stations with that NET programmed in the NET List (see page 162, NET address syntax) a Wildcard call to listening stations that have a self address matching the length of the sent address and with any upper-

case letter or number as each of the characters, for example, SAM, NAA, 234, 3AZ (see page 163, Wildcard address syntax) a selective Wildcard call to listening stations that have a self address matching the length of the sent address with A and

B as the first and third characters respectively, and with any upper-case letter or number in the second and last characters, in this case (A and B may be any specified upper-case letter or number), for example, A2BM, ADB1, AZBE, A3B8

(see page 163, Wildcard address syntax) If you are using multiple ANY, NET, or Wildcard addresses, or Group Selective addresses with a CICS command, you must enter the addresses within quotes. With Group Selective addresses, the length of the combined address can be no longer than 12 ALE words, excluding commas. An ALE word has 3 characters. There can be no more than five different first ALE words in the combined address. For example:

An address of BOB1,BOB2,BOB3,BOB4,TIM,JOHN,MIK,SUE has five different first ALE words, that is, BOB, TIM, JOH, MIK and SUE. However, this address will be rejected because it has a total of 13 ALE words, that is, BOB, 1, BOB, 2, BOB, 3, BOB, 4, TIM, JOH, N, MIK and SUE. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 255 Operating the transceiver from a computer ALE call options When you make a call through CICS you can specify whether or not to override the global settings for the transceiver at the time of the call. To enable LQA for a call To disable LQA for a call To enable LBT for a call To disable LBT for a call To make a call using the current channel only Type +lqa Type lqa Type +lbt Type lbt Type thischan Recognised variable expansion The variables listed in Table 31 may be added in a message with any command. These variables are recognised by CICS V3.20 (or later) when they are enclosed in double quotes. CICS expands the variable by inserting the current information associated with the variable into the message with the command. Table 31: Variable expansion in a command Keyword

$DATE

$GPS

$TIME

$TZ

$VER Function when used in a call or beacon command Inserts the current date in the following format: <name of day>

<month> <day> <year>

Inserts the current valid GPS position in the following format:

<latitude> <longitude> <altitude> <UTC>

Inserts the current time in the following format: <hh>:<mm>:<ss>

Inserts the time zone offset in the following format: <time zone offset>

Inserts the current version of the transceiver unit firmware in the following format: <version number>

256 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer A typical use for the variable expansion feature is as follows:

Command typed at initiating station Information displayed at receiving station alecall BH "My position is

$GPS on $DATE at $TIME"

ALE-LINK: 'Ch 27980', M2, BH, 05/02 02:13, "MY POSITION IS 8958.04N 13841.23E +0.0M 101622 (A) ON THU FEB 05 2004 AT 02:18:16 "

alecall B? +lqa

"My position is

$GPS"

LQA: 'Ch 27980', M2, 0/29, -/-, 100%

ALE-LINK: 'Ch 27980', M2, B?, 05/02 02:23, "MY POSITION IS 8958.04N 13841.23E +0.0M 101622 (A)"

Sending and receiving calls When you make calls using CICS commands, you do not need to use the hangup command when you are making successive calls or using the chan or scan commands. For example, after sending a Get Position call, CICS enables you to change the channel then send another Get Position call without using the hangup command to close the existing link. CAUTION If a response is not received to a Get Status, Get Position, or Message call

(for example, a page call ack to a Message call) you must use the hangup, chan, scan or call command to receive subsequent calls. Control software using these commands must take this into account. Responses and outputs CICS is an interface from which random outputs will occur, for example, when calls are received. Additionally, depending on the configuration of the equipment, the order of responses to commands may change. Software operating on this interface must be able to adapt to these irregularities to enable correct system behaviour under all conditions. It is recommended that echo is switched off to avoid intermixing of the commands you enter with the responses from the system (see page 266, echo command). Message length in a Message call The permitted message length when making a Message call depends on the type of call system, the Privacy Mode selected, and the character set (see page 274, pagecall command). Error reporting in a received AMD message If you receive a call containing a message in which an error has been detected, the corrupted part of the message will be replaced with tilde characters (~). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 257 Operating the transceiver from a computer Setting up CICS Connecting a computer to a transceiver To connect a computer to a transceiver:

1 Use a serial port (for example, COM1) on the computer to connect to the 19-way GPIO connector on the front panel using cable 08-06237-001. Setting up a transceiver for CICS To set up a transceiver to be used with CICS:

1 Make sure that the Control List settings for the serial port you are using have been set correctly. Check that:

the RS232 Mode entry is set to CICS the RS232 Speed entry is set to the baud rate of the computer, for example, 19200 baud CAUTION If you change the settings in these entries you must switch your transceiver off then on again for the changes to take effect. Setting up a computer for CICS To set up a computer for use with CICS:

1 Start a terminal emulation program, for example, HyperTerminal in Windows. 1 Check the settings in the terminal emulation program. Make sure that you:

select the serial port on the computer that has been connected to the transceiver select the baud rate that corresponds to the baud rate set in the Control List of the transceiver set data bits to 8 set parity to none set stop bits to 1 258 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Terms used in CICS and the 2110 SSB Transceiver Operating the transceiver from a computer The terms used in several CICS commands differ from those used in transceiver. Table 32 lists these commands and the equivalent 2110 SSB Transceiver terms. Table 32: CICS commands and the equivalent 2110 SSB Transceiver terms CICS commands alebeacon alecall aletelcall beacon gpsbeacon gpsposition pagecall selbeacon selcall selfid statuscall telcall Equivalent term in the 2110 SSB Transceiver Channel Test call using an ALE/CALM network Selective call using an ALE/CALM network Phone call using an ALE/CALM network Channel Test call that is independent of the call system Get Position call using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network Send Position call using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network Message call using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network Channel Test call using a Codan Selcall network or non-alpha address in an ALE/CALM network Selective call using a Codan Selcall network or non-alpha address in an ALE/CALM network Your station self address Get Status call using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network Phone call using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 259 Operating the transceiver from a computer CICS commands This section covers the functions and syntax of the CICS commands. In this section:

the function of each command is summarised in Table 33 the syntax and function of each command is summarised in Table 35 on page 287 Table 33: CICS commands and their functions Commands alebeacon alecall aletelcall amd beacon call chan echo freq gpsbeacon gpsposition hangup help lbt link lock lqa mode pagecall 260 page 265 page 264 page 264 See... page 261 Function Makes a Channel Test call to addressed stations using an ALE/CALM network. Makes a call to addressed stations using an ALE/CALM network. page 262 Makes a Phone call to addressed stations using an ALE/CALM page 263 network. Sends a message on the existing ALE link. Makes a Channel Test call to addressed stations using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network. Makes a call on the current channel using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network. Controls the selection of channels in the transceiver. Controls the echo state of the transceiver. Displays the frequency of the current channel, or selects the channel by the frequency specified. Makes a Get Position call to an addressed station using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network. Makes a Send Position call to addressed stations using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network. Closes an active link between your transceiver and the station that you are calling. Displays the help available in CICS. Displays the global LBT Mode or monitors the current channel for the presence of data or voice. Displays the current link status. Controls the lock status of the transceiver. Controls the display of LQA information on the current or last established link since powerup of the transceiver. Controls the mode settings of the channels in the transceiver. Makes a Message call to addressed stations using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network. page 270 page 271 page 272 page 266 page 266 page 267 page 270 page 270 page 273 page 274 page 269 page 269 page 268 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 33: CICS commands and their functions (cont.) Operating the transceiver from a computer Commands prompt ptt scan secure selbeacon selcall selfid set sideband sound statusack statuscall statustime telcall ver See... page 275 page 276 page 277 page 278 page 279 Function Controls the settings for the prompt on the command interface. Controls the settings for PTT. Controls the settings for scanning in the transceiver. Controls the voice encryptor status of the transceiver. Makes a Channel Test call to an addressed station using a Codan Selcall or non-alpha address in an ALE/CALM network. Makes a Selective call to an addressed station using a Codan Selcall network or non-alpha address in an ALE/CALM network. Controls the list of self addresses used in CICS. Controls the settings in CICS. Controls the sideband setting for channels in the transceiver. Controls the settings for sounding operations in the transceiver. Sends a response to a Get Status call. Makes a Get Status call to an addressed station using an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network. Sets the length of time a station has to respond to a Get Status call. page 285 Makes a Phone call to an addressed station using an ALE/CALM page 286 or a Codan Selcall network. Displays the current version of CICS being used. page 280 page 281 page 282 page 283 page 284 page 284 page 280 page 286 alebeacon command If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the alebeacon command to replace the LQA information for an ALE/CALM network. The command sends a request to the addressed stations you want to call on a specific channel

(thischan), or all channels, in the selected network. The receiving stations automatically respond with LQA information. To replace LQA information for a specific channel, pause scanning, select the channel, then make the beacon, including the call option thischan with the command. To test all channels in an ALE/CALM network, perform the beacon while scanning is on. NOTE To display the full response of LQA information use the lqa output on command (see page 272, lqa command). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 261 Operating the transceiver from a computer Syntax NOTE NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, or Wildcard address syntax in the alebeacon command. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion alebeacon <destination>[@<network>] [s] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@network] is the address [and network] of the station that you want to call. s makes the call in Silent Mode. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. alecall command Use the alecall command to select the best channel on which to establish a link to addressed stations, then make a call on that channel. To disconnect the link, either:

use the scan on command to close the link and resume scanning (see page 277, scan command), or use the hangup command to terminate the link (see page 269, hangup command)

Syntax NOTE For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion alecall <destination>[@<network>] ["<message>"]

[from|tis|twas <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@network] is the address [and network] of the station that you want to call.

<message> is the written text message that is to be sent to the station. Use single or double quotes, or backslashes to recognise spaces in the message text (see page 433, Using quotation marks). 262 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. tis <self address>[@<network>] is the keyword that requests a link with the destination address, using the self address [and network] provided for your station. twas <self address>[@<network>] is the keyword that does not request a link with the destination address, using the self address [and network] provided for your station. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the alecall command. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with the alecall command. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. aletelcall command Use the aletelcall command to select the best channel on which to establish a link to an addressed station, then make a telcall on that channel. A telcall is a call to a telephone number. NOTE Before you can make an aletelcall you need to know the address of a station with a telephone interconnect unit (for example, JPS RTU 282/292) through which your call can be routed to the public telephone network. To disconnect the link, either:

use the scan on command to close the link and resume scanning (see page 277, scan command), or use the hangup command to terminate the link (see page 269, hangup command)

Syntax NOTE For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion aletelcall <destination>[@<network>] <telephone number>

[from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@<network>] is the address [and network] of the station with a telephone interconnect unit.

<telephone number> is the telephone number to be dialled by the telephone interconnect unit. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 263 Operating the transceiver from a computer from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. amd command If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the amd command to send a message within an existing ALE link. When you establish a link using a calling command that allows an ALE address, for example, call and alecall, you can send messages within the link. The message must be enclosed in quotes. Syntax amd "<message>"

where:

<message> is the written text message that is to be sent to the station. Use single or double quotes, or backslashes to recognise spaces in the message text (see page 433, Using quotation marks). beacon command If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the beacon command to test the quality of channels in an ALE/CALM, Codan Selcall or Voice Only network before you use it to transmit voice or data. If you use the beacon command in an ALE/CALM network the information in the LQA database will also be replaced. The command sends a request to the addressed stations you want to call on a specific channel

(thischan), or all channels, in the selected network. The receiving stations automatically respond with LQA information if the beacon is made in an ALE/CALM network. The LQA information, or the volume and clarity of the returned test signal, indicate the quality of the channel(s). Syntax NOTE NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, or Wildcard address syntax in the beacon command. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion beacon <destination>[@<network>] [s] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

264 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer where:

<destination>[@network] is the address [and network] of the station that you want to call. NOTE If the network specified is ALE/CALM, the call will be an ALE call, and the ALE call options will be available. s makes the call in Silent Mode. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. call command Use the call command to establish a voice link with another station on the current channel in an ALE/CALM or a Codan Selcall network. Syntax NOTE For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion call <destination>[@<network>] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@network] is the address [and network] of the station that you want to call. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the call command. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with the call command. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 265 Operating the transceiver from a computer chan command Use the chan command to:

display the current channel in the transceiver change to the channel specified If you want to use the command to change to another channel, make sure that the channel has been programmed into the transceivers Channel List

(see page 119, Programming the Channel List). NOTE Syntax chan chan <name>

where:

chan displays the name of the current channel.

<name> changes to the channel specified, if the channel has been programmed into the transceivers Channel List. The name is case sensitive. echo command display the current echo state switch the echo state on and off Use the echo command to control the local behaviour of the CICS serial interface. Use it to:

The default setting is that echo is on. With echo on, any character that is typed is echoed

(mirrored) back to the screen. This corresponds to the use of Full Duplex Mode in terminal settings. If you have an automated system, the recommended setting for the system is echo off, which corresponds to Half Duplex Mode. This avoids intermixing echoes of the commands you enter and the responses from the system. Syntax echo echo on echo off where:

echo displays the current echo state of the interface. on enables echoing of characters entered. off disables echoing of characters entered. 266 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual freq command Operating the transceiver from a computer Use the freq command to:

display the receive and/or transmit frequencies of the current channel in the transceiver select a channel by the transmit frequency

Specify the frequency in kilohertz and use a decimal point (.) to specify a fraction part. NOTE Syntax freq freq <frequency>

where:

freq displays the receive and/or transmit frequencies of the current channel.

<frequency> specifies a receive frequency value in kilohertz. The transceiver searches for a channel with this frequency. If an exact match cannot be found, the channel with the next higher receive frequency is selected. Limitations When you select a channel by frequency, CHAN: <name> is displayed when the transceiver changes the channel to match the frequency you requested. If the transceiver is already on a channel that matches this frequency, only the frequency is displayed. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 267 Operating the transceiver from a computer gpsbeacon command Use the gpsbeacon command to request the current GPS position of another station. NOTE Syntax NOTE NOTE The transceiver of the receiving station must have the GPS option installed. If it has not been installed or GPS data is unavailable, a message is displayed to inform you of this. The use of the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax in the gpsbeacon command will not be effective due to collisions of responses. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion gpsbeacon <destination>[@<network>] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@<network>] is the address [and network] of the station from which you want to receive a GPS position. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. 268 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual gpsposition command Operating the transceiver from a computer Use the gpsposition command to send your current GPS position to another station. The call is automatically answered by the receiving station. NOTE The GPS option must be installed in your transceiver. Syntax NOTE For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion gpsposition <destination>[@<network>] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@<network>] is the address [and network] of the station to which you want to send your GPS position. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the gpsposition command. If you have the MIL-STD-188-

141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with the gpsposition command. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. hangup command Use the hangup command to close an active link created by a call with another station. If the transceiver was scanning before the call was made it will resume scanning once the link has been terminated. Syntax hangup 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 269 Operating the transceiver from a computer help command Use the help command to:

display the categories of help available display command details within categories Syntax help help <category>

where:

help displays the categories of help available.

<category> displays detailed help for the commands within the specified category. lbt command Use the lbt command to:

display the global LBT Mode perform a check on the current channel for the presence of data or voice Syntax lbt lbt measure where:

lbt displays the current LBT Mode. measure checks the current channel for the presence of data or voice, then displays whether the channel is busy or vacant. link command If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the link command to display the current link status of the transceiver. Syntax link where:

link displays the current link status of the system. 270 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual lock command Operating the transceiver from a computer display the current lock status of the transceiver set whether or not the transceiver is locked break a lock from another interface Use the lock command to:

When a lock is on the transceiver, it only responds to the interface issuing the command, that is, CICS. When more than one lock is on, a single lock off command releases the entire system. Syntax lock lock on lock off lock abort where:

lock displays the current lock state of the system. on attempts to lock the system. off releases the lock(s) on the system. abort attempts to break a lock from another interface. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 271 Operating the transceiver from a computer lqa command If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the lqa command to:

display the LQA information from the current or last established ALE link since powerup of the transceiver enable or disable the asynchronous output of LQA information on LQA exchanges or soundings

The LQA information comprises local and remote data. The local LQA information indicates the quality of the signal that the local station has received from the remote station. The remote LQA information indicates the quality of the signal that the remote station has received from the local station. In order to receive remote LQA information, the remote station must have ALE LQA Exchange switched on (see page 96, Changing a setting in the Control List and page 200, Entries in the Control List). NOTE Syntax lqa lqa output lqa output on lqa output off where:

lqa displays the LQA information from the current or last established link since powerup of the transceiver. output displays the current status of the asynchronous output. on enables asynchronous output of LQA information, that is, displaying LQA output as it is sent or received. Information provided includes channel name, current station, local BER/SINAD, remote BER/SINAD, and LQA score. off disables asynchronous output of LQA information (default powerup state). 272 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual mode command Operating the transceiver from a computer Use the mode command to:

display the mode setting for the current channel set a new mode setting for the selected channel (depending on the modes permitted for that channel) A mode is a type of reception or transmission you can use with a channel. It consists of a sideband, an IF centre and IF width. Most transceivers have modes such as USB and LSB. However, transceivers can be configured with additional modes available under different names. The mode command and sideband command can be used interchangeably (see page 282, sideband command). If you are using CICS V3.20 (or later), the mode command is preferred. NOTE Syntax mode mode <name>

where:

mode displays the mode of the current channel.

<name> sets the mode of the channel to the mode specified, but only if the mode is permitted for the channel. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 273 Operating the transceiver from a computer pagecall command Use the pagecall command to send a written message to another station. The receiving station automatically sends an acknowledgment response when the call is received. NOTE The permitted message length depends on the type of call system, the Privacy Mode selected, and the character set (see Table 34). Table 34: Variations in message length Call system Privacy Mode Character set ALE ALE ALE ALE Codan Selcall Codan Selcall Codan Selcall Plain None Group Registered None Group Registered ASCII-64 ASCII-256 ASCII-256 ASCII-256 ASCII-127 ASCII-256 ASCII-256 Maximum message length

(number of text characters) 8390 6484 50 50 64 64 64 NOTE NOTE NOTE Syntax NOTE ASCII-64: This protocol uses all upper-case and numeric characters and some punctuation characters. ASCII-127: This protocol uses all printable ASCII characters up to decimal 127. ASCII-256: This protocol uses full binary encoding of all 8-bit characters. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion pagecall <destination>[@<network>] "<message>" [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@<network>] is the address [and network] of the station to which you want to send the message. 274 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer

<message> is the written text message that is to be sent to the station. Use single or double quotes, or backslashes to recognise spaces in the message text (see page 433, Using quotation marks). from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. If you have the FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option installed, you can use the ALL address syntax with the pagecall command. If you have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed, you can use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with the pagecall command. NOTE You can use any of the characters in the basic 38 ASCII subset (AZ, 09,

@ and ?) for the address. prompt command Use the prompt command to:

set the type of prompt that will be displayed on the command interface disable the prompt output Syntax prompt prompt time prompt <text string>

prompt off where:

prompt enables the prompt output on the command interface if it has been disabled previously and displays the current prompt type, that is, time or the text string. time switches the prompt output to that of the time since the transceiver was last reset.

<text string> switches the prompt output to the text string entered. off disables the prompt output on the command interface. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 275 Operating the transceiver from a computer ptt command display the current PTT status of the transceiver switch between transmit and receive modes switch between voice and data modes Use the ptt command to:

The ptt command operates for 30 seconds. If you require a longer PTT, repeat the ptt on command before the PTT times out. Data Mode is the default mode when the transceiver is switched on, as PTT in CICS is generally only used with data applications. Syntax ptt ptt on ptt on voice ptt on data ptt on talk ptt off where:

ptt displays the current PTT state of the transceiver. on switches the transceiver to Transmit Mode using the selected signal. off switches the transceiver to Receive Mode using the selected signal. voice switches the transceiver to send/receive voice (enhanced) signals. data switches the transceiver to send/receive data (raw) signals. talk switches the transceiver to send/receive compressed voice signals and holds the automatic gain control during breaks in speech. 276 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual scan command Operating the transceiver from a computer Use the scan command to:

display the current scanning state of the transceiver (if scanning is on, the name of the network being scanned is also displayed) control whether scanning is on or off specify the network to be scanned

Issuing a scan on command when a lock is on will automatically unlock the interface (see page 271, lock command). NOTE Syntax scan scan on scan off scan <network>

where:

scan displays the current scanning state of the transceiver, that is, whether scanning is on or off. on starts scanning all networks that are set to scan. off stops scanning and enables channels to be changed manually.

<network> switches to the specified network and starts scanning that network. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 277 Operating the transceiver from a computer secure command NOTE The secure command is only available when the voice encryptor hardware option is installed, and special firmware is programmed into the transceiver and enabled. Use the secure command to:

activate the voice encryptor feature in the 2110 SSB Transceiver display the current secure state of the transceiver (Corporate, Global or Off) select the secure index program the secure key set the default secure mode Syntax secure secure corp [<PIN>]

secure global [<PIN>]

secure off secure on [PIN]

where:

secure displays the current voice encryptor state. corp [PIN] switches on Corporate Mode voice encryptor with or without a specified PIN. global [PIN] switches on Global Mode voice encryptor with or without a specified PIN. off switches off the voice encryptor feature. on [PIN] switches on the voice encryptor using the mode set with the secure mode corp or secure mode global commands. The following secure commands are available following the login admin command:

secure index secure key [#n] [<key-code>]

secure mode corp secure mode global where:

secure index selects one of the different Corporate keys if the secure key #n has been set. 278 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer secure key [#n] [<key-code>] sets the Corporate key for index n (8 digits for index 1; 16 digits for indices 2n). #0 sets the base key, which alters all of the keys. secure mode corp sets the default voice encryptor mode to use the Corporate key. secure mode global sets the default voice encryptor mode to use the Global key. selbeacon command Use the selbeacon command to test the quality of a selected channel before you use it to transmit voice or data. The command sends a request to the station you want to call on the channel you have selected. This receiving station automatically responds with an audible test signal. The volume and clarity of the returned signal indicates the quality of the channel. Syntax NOTE NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with a selbeacon command. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion selbeacon <destination>[@<network>] [s] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@network] is the address [and network] of the station that you want to call. s makes the call in Silent Mode. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 279 Operating the transceiver from a computer selcall command Use the selcall command to make a Selective call to an addressed station. Syntax NOTE NOTE You cannot use the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax with a selcall command. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion selcall <destination>[@<network<] [s] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@network] is the address [and network] of the station that you want to call. NOTE If the network specified is ALE/CALM, the call will be an ALE call, and the ALE call options will be available. s makes the call in Silent Mode. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. selfid command A self address is an address for your station. Other stations can selectively call your station using your self address. You can set a number of self addresses for your station. Use the selfid command to:

The initial list of self addresses used by the CICS interface are those that currently exist in the Address entry in the Control List of the transceiver. display the current list of self addresses for the CICS interface create new self addresses for the CICS interface change the current self addresses for the CICS interface NOTE Changes to the list of self addresses used by the CICS interface will not affect the list of self addresses in the Address entry in the Control List of the transceiver. The changes are lost when the transceiver is switched off. 280 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer Syntax selfid selfid <self address>[, <self address>]

where:

selfid displays your current list of self addresses used by the CICS interface.

<self address> sets the self addresses for the CICS interface to the one or more addresses specified on the command line. The addresses can be simple or fully qualified, for example, 12359 or 12359@*SELCALL, RICKY or RICKY@PRIMWEST. If no network is specified, the self address applies to all networks. Limitations The only calls displayed are those addressed to the list of self addresses used by the CICS interface. When the 2110 SSB Transceiver is switched on, all self addresses assigned to networks are added to the list of self addresses for CICS by default. When a self address is added through CICS, these default addresses are removed from the list and the new one is added. If the Address entry in the Control List of the transceiver contains wildcard self addresses, for example, 12.., these are only used by CICS in RTU282/292 mode. set command display the current option(s) available change the setting of the GP input to lock or pause Use the set command to:

When the GP port Q line input is asserted, scanning on the transceiver is stopped via a lock or a pause, as specified in this command. Syntax set set gp lock set gp pause where:

set displays the options available. gp lock locks the GP input. gp pause pauses the GP input. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 281 Operating the transceiver from a computer sideband command display the sideband for the current channel select the sideband for the current channel, if it is permitted for that channel Use the sideband or sb command to:

The sidebands are:

USB

LSB

AM The sideband and mode commands can be used interchangeably (see page 273, mode command). If you are using CICS V3.20 (or later), the mode command is preferred. NOTE Syntax sideband sideband usb sideband lsb sideband am sb sb usb sb lsb sb am where:

sideband or sb displays the sideband for the current channel. usb selects USB for the current channel, if it is permitted for that channel. lsb selects LSB for the current channel, if it is permitted for that channel. am selects AM for the current channel, if it is permitted for that channel. 282 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual sound command Operating the transceiver from a computer NOTE The sound command will only have an effect in transceivers that have the MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option installed. display the current status of ALE sounding operations, that is, on or off enable or disable ALE sounding operations initiate an ALE sounding operation Use the sound command to:

The sound command may be used regardless of the scanning state of the transceiver. It will occur in all ALE/CALM networks that have a valid self address and are set to be scanned. ALE sounding operations will not occur if the transceiver is in a link with another transceiver. Syntax NOTE For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion sound sound on sound off sound now [from <self address>[@<network>]]

where:

sound displays the current status of ALE sounding operations. on enables automatic ALE sounding to occur in networks that have a sounding interval set (see page 128, Programming the Network List). off disables automatic ALE sounding operations from the command interface. now initiates an ALE sounding operation in all ALE/CALM networks that have a valid self address and are set to be scanned. from <self address>[@<network>] initiates an ALE sounding operation on the specified self address in all ALE/CALM networks that are set to be scanned and for which this self address is valid. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 283 Operating the transceiver from a computer statusack command Use the statusack command to send a reply to a Get Status call you have received. A status call acknowledgment response contains the status information requested. It is sent automatically if a status call requesting remote diagnostics (1) was sent (see page 284, statuscall command). The statusack command must be sent within the statustime specified by the station that sent the call (see page 285, statustime command). Syntax statusack <destination>[@<network>] "<message>"

where:

<destination>[@<network>] is the address [and network] of the station that requested the status information.

<message> is the status information requested by the station that sent the status call. The message is sent within single or double quotes to allow the use of spaces in the message. statuscall command Use the statuscall command to obtain information on the status of a transceiver or attached equipment at another station. A status call is typically used to request information about a remote transceiver. NOTE For a description of each type of status information see page 335, Get Status calls specific to the model of your 2110 SSB Transceiver. When you request status information, you need to specify the type of information you require. To request diagnostic information enter 1 as the message. The receiving station will automatically send the status information requested. The receiving station is required to respond to a status call within the timeout period (see page 285, statustime command). If a response to a status call is not sent within the timeout period an error message is displayed. Syntax NOTE NOTE The use of the ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard address syntax in the statuscall command will not be effective due to collisions of responses. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion statuscall <destination>[@<network>] "<message>" [from

<self address>[@<network>]]

284 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer where:

<destination>[@<network>] is the address of the station from which you require status information.

<message> is the number that corresponds to the type of status information that you request, that is, 1 for remote diagnostics. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. statustime command Use the statustime command to specify the amount of time that the receiving station has to respond to a status call (see page 284, statuscall command). The response can be the requested information or a STATUSNACK. NOTE Be aware that the 2110 SSB Transceiver adds 45 seconds to the statustime you have entered. For example, if you have entered 10 seconds for the statustime, the receiving station has 10 seconds to prepare the response and 45 seconds to send the call to the requesting station. If a statusack response is not received on the CICS port of the receiving station within this time, a message is displayed to inform you of this. You can use the statustime command to:

display the current statustime set a new statustime Syntax statustime statustime <timeout value>

where:

statustime displays the current timeout value (in seconds).

<timeout value> sets the time (in seconds) in which the receiving station has to respond to a statuscall. Limitations The timeout value is local to this CICS interface. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 285 Operating the transceiver from a computer telcall command Use the telcall command to make a call to a telephone number. NOTE Syntax NOTE Before you can make a Phone call you need to know the address of a station with a telephone interconnect unit (for example, JPS RTU 282/292) through which your call can be routed to the public telephone network. For more information on:

address syntaxes see page 254, Addresses in commands call options see page 256, ALE call options recognised variables see page 256, Recognised variable expansion telcall <destination>[@<network>] <telephone number> [from

<self address>[@<network>]]

where:

<destination>[@<network>] is the address [and network] of the station with a telephone interconnect unit.

<telephone number> is the telephone number to be dialled by the telephone interconnect unit. from <self address>[@<network>] is the self address [and network] that you want to use for this call. ver command Use the ver command to display the version of CICS that is being used. Syntax ver 286 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer Summary of command syntax Table 35 summarises the syntax of each CICS command. Table 35: Summary of CICS command syntax Command syntax alebeacon

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] [s] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

alecall

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] ["<message>"] [lqa]

[<amd>] [from|tis|twas <self address>[@<network>]]

aletelcall

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] <telephone number> [from <self address>[@<network>]]

amd "<message>"

beacon

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] [s] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

call <destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

chan [<name>]

echo [off|on]

freq [<frequency>]

gpsbeacon

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

Function Makes a Channel Test call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM network from the self address specified. Makes a call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM network from the self address specified. Makes a Phone call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM network from the self address specified. Sends a message within the established ALE link. Makes a Channel Test call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network. This type of beacon is independent of the call system. Makes a call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. Displays the current channel, and switches to the channel specified. Displays the current echo status, and switches to Half Duplex Mode (off) or Full Duplex Mode (on, default). Displays the common receive/transmit frequency or the separate receive and transmit frequencies (in kHz) for the current channel, or selects the channel that has the receive frequency specified (in kHz). If the channel with the exact receive frequency is not found, the channel with the next higher frequency is selected. Makes a Get Position call to an addressed station using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 287 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 35: Summary of CICS command syntax (cont.) Command syntax gpsposition

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

hangup help [<category>]

lbt [measure]

link lock [abort|off|on]

lqa [output [off|on]]

Function Makes a Send Position call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. Closes an active link between your transceiver and the station that you are calling. Displays the categories of help available, and detailed help for the commands within the selected category. Displays the current LBT Mode, and performs a check on the current channel for the presence of data or voice. Displays the current link status of the transceiver. Displays the current lock status of the transceiver, attempts to break a lock, releases all locks, or sets a lock. Displays:

the LQA information from the current or last established ALE link since powerup of the transceiver the current status of the asynchronous output

Sets the asynchronous output of LQA information to:

off (no output, default) on (channel name, current station, local BER/SINAD, remote BER/SINAD, and LQA score) mode [<name>]

pagecall

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] "<message>"

[from <self address>[@<network>]]

prompt [off|<text string>|time]

Displays the mode of the current channel, and sets the mode of the current channel to that specified, if the mode is permitted for that channel. Makes a Send Position call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. Your message must be written within double or single quotes. See Table 34 on page 274 for details on the message length. Enables the prompt output on the command interface and displays the current prompt type, switches between a variable text string prompt or the time prompt (time since the transceiver was last reset), and disables the prompt. ptt [off|on] [data|voice|talk] Displays the current PTT state of the transceiver and places the transceiver into PTT for 30 seconds. Sets the PTT to:

Receive Mode with a data, voice or talk signal Transmit Mode with a data, voice or talk signal 288 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 35: Summary of CICS command syntax (cont.) Operating the transceiver from a computer Command syntax scan [<network>|off|on]

secure [[corp|global|off|on

[PIN]]]

secure index secure key [#n] [<key-code>]

secure mode [corp|global]

selbeacon

<destination>[@<network>] [s]

[from <self address>[@<network>]]

selcall

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] [s] [from <self address>[@<network>]]

selfid [<self address>[, <self address>]]

set [gp lock|pause]

sideband [am|lsb|usb]

sb [am|lsb|usb]

sound [off|on]

sound now [lbt] [lqa] [from

<self address>[@<network>]]

statusack

<destination>[@<network>]

"<message>"

Function Displays the current scanning state of the transceiver, and if scanning is on, displays the names of networks that are currently being scanned. Switches scanning off or on and switches to the network specified and begins scanning on that network. Displays the current voice encryptor state, switches on Corporate/Global Mode or the default mode voice encryptor with or without a specified PIN, and switches secure mode off. Selects 1 of n different Corporate keys. Requires login by administrator. Sets the Corporate key for an index n. Requires login by administator. Sets the default mode voice encryptor (Corporate or Global). Requires login by administrator. Makes a Channel Test call to an addressed station using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. Makes a Selective call to an addressed station using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. If the network specified is ALE/CALM, the call will be an ALE call, and the ALE call options will be available. Displays the current list of self addresses used by CICS, and creates new self addresses for CICS. Displays the current operational settings for CICS, and locks or pauses a GP input. Displays the sideband of the current channel, and changes the sideband of the current channel to AM, LSB or USB, only if permitted for that channel. Displays the current status of ALE sounding operations, and switches automatic ALE soundings off or on. Initiates an ALE sounding operation in all ALE/CALM networks that have a valid self address and are set to be scanned. Sends a response to a Get Status call with the status information requested. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 289 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 35: Summary of CICS command syntax (cont.) Command syntax statuscall

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] "<message>"

[from <self address>[@<network>]]

statustime [<timeout value>]

telcall

<destination>[@<network>]

[lbt] [lqa] <telephone number> [from <self address>[@<network>]]

ver Function Makes a Get Status call to an addressed station using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. Displays the amount of time (in seconds) the receiving station has to respond to a Get Status call, and sets this time. Makes a Phone call to addressed stations using any, or the specified, ALE/CALM or Codan Selcall network from the self address specified. Displays the version of CICS being used. 290 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer CICS response messages Table 36 summarises CICS response messages and their meanings. Table 36: CICS response messages Response message ALE-EXIT: <address>

ALE-JOINED: <address>

ALE-LINK: <channel>, <caller address>, <self address>,

<time>

ALE-LINK: FAILED ALE-REPLY: <caller address>,

"<message>"

CALL DETECTED CALL FAILED CALL SENT CALL STARTED CHAN: <name>

CICS: V<version number>

ECHO: OFF ECHO: ON EMERGENCY: <channel>, <caller address>, <destination>,

<date> <time>, [<gps position>|NO GPS UNIT CONNECTED|NO VALID GPS POSITION]

FREQ: xxxxx.x RX, INHIBIT TX Description The station specified has hung up from the link. The station specified has responded to an ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard call. The ANY, NET, and Wildcard calls may also contain multiple addresses. An ALE link has been established. The ALE link between your transceiver and the station you are calling has failed because the outgoing call was not started or was aborted. This message is preceded by a message stating the reason for the failure. The station specified has replied to your call with an AMD message. A call has been detected. An outgoing call has not started or was aborted. This message is preceded by a message stating the reason for the failure. An outgoing call has been sent. An outgoing call has been initiated. The transceiver has changed the channel to that specified. This message is only shown when the system is not scanning. Names that include spaces are displayed within double quotes. The current version status of CICS. Echo is switched off, that is, Half Duplex mode. Echo is switched on, that is, Full Duplex mode. An Emergency call has been received. The receive frequency of the current channel. The transmit frequency is inhibited or it is a TxD channel. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 291 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 36: CICS response messages (cont.) Response message FREQ: xxxxx.x RX, yyyyy.y TX FREQ: xxxxx.x RX/TX GPS-POSITION: <channel>,

<caller address>, <self address>, <date> <time>, <gps position>|NO GPS CONNECTED|NO VALID GPS POSITION LBT: ABORTED LBT: ALL CHANNELS BUSY LBT: DISABLED LBT: ENABLED LBT: OCCUPIED LBT: VACANT LINK: CLOSED LINK: INCOMING LINK: OUTGOING LOCK LOCK: ABORT LOCK: BUSY LOCK: OFF LOCK: ON LQA: <channel>, <remote station address>, <local BER/SINAD>, remote BER/SINAD>,

<LQA score>%

LQA-OUTPUT: OFF LQA-OUTPUT: ON Description The receive and transmit frequencies of the current channel. The receive and transmit frequencies (in kHz) of the current channel are the same. The GPS position of another station has been received. The LBT measurement process has been aborted. All of the channels tested for voice and data were busy. No call was sent. The global LBT Mode is disabled. The global LBT Mode is enabled. The channel tested is occupied with traffic. The channel tested is clear of voice and data traffic. The ALE link between your station and another station has been closed. The ALE link between your station and another station is active, and your station is the recipient. The ALE link between your station and another station is active, and your station is the originator. The GP input has been set to lock. A lock is released from another interface. The system is locked and cannot be used from this interface. The system is currently unlocked. The system is currently locked. The LQA information from the current or last established ALE link since powerup of the transceiver has been requested. The LQA information comprises BER/SINAD values for the link, and the LQA score. An invalid value is represented by a hyphen. The asynchronous output of LQA information has been disabled. The asynchronous output of LQA information has been enabled, that is, LQA output is displayed as it is sent or received. 292 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 36: CICS response messages (cont.) Operating the transceiver from a computer Response message MODE: <name>, <sideband>,

<ifwidth>, <ifcentre>

NO EXTERNAL UNIT CONNECTED OR NO RESPONSE NO RESPONSE OK Options:

gp PAGE-CALL: <channel>, <caller address>, <self address>,

<date> <time>, "<message>"

PAGE-CALL-ACK: <channel>,

<self address>, <caller address>, <date> <time>

PAUSE PROMPT: <time>|<text string>

PTT: OFF PTT: ON [, DATA|VOICE|TALK]

PTT: REJECTED Description The current mode of the channel. A Get Status call has been sent to a transceiver that does not have the required equipment attached. A Get Status call has been sent and the receiving station has not responded to your request for information. The command has been accepted and is being processed. Normally displayed for any command that does not respond with some value immediately. Identifies GP input as the only option that can be changed by the user. You can change the setting of the GP input to lock or pause. A Message call has been received. A Message call acknowledgment response has been received. The GP input has been set to pause. The mode of the current prompt has been requested. PTT is currently off, that is, the local transceiver is in Receive Mode. PTT is currently on, that is, the local transceiver is in Transmit Mode. Data is the default mode. You cannot transmit. Scanning has started on the ALE/CALM networks specified. Scanning has stopped. SCAN: ALE, <network>,

<network>

SCAN: OFF SCAN: ON, <network>, <network> Scanning has started on the networks specified. SECURE INDEX The index of the Corporate key currently in use. The current default setting of the voice encryptor. SECURE MODE: CORP|GLOBAL SECURE: CORP|GLOBAL [PIN]

The current state of the voice encryptor. The current state of the voice encryptor. SECURE: OFF A Selective call has been received. SELCALL: <channel>, <caller address>, <self address>,

<date> <time>

2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 293 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 36: CICS response messages (cont.) Response message SELFID-LIST: <self address>,

<self address>, <self address>

SIDEBAND: AM SIDEBAND: LSB SIDEBAND: USB SOUNDING: FAILED SOUNDING: FINISHED SOUNDING: OFF SOUNDING: ON SOUNDING: STARTED <self address>@<network>

STATUS-ACK: <channel>, <caller address>, <self address>,

<date> <time>, "<message>"

STATUS-CALL: <channel>,

<caller address>, <self address>, <date> <time>,

"<message>"

STATUS-CALL-ACK: <channel>,

<caller address>, <self address>, <date> <time>,

"<message>"

STATUSTIME: <n>

TEL-CALL: <channel>, <caller address>, <self address>,

<date> <time>, <telephone number>|DISCONNECTED Description The list of current self addresses used by the CICS interface. The sideband for the current channel is AM. The sideband for the current channel is LSB. The sideband for the current channel is USB. The ALE sounding operations have been aborted before completion. The ALE sounding operations have been completed. The ALE sounding operations have been disabled. The ALE sounding operations have been enabled. The ALE sounding operations have commenced. A Get Status call acknowledgment response has been requested and sent. A Get Status call request message has been received. A Get Status call acknowledgment response has been requested and sent. The current timeout value, where n is the amount of time

(in seconds) the receiving station has to respond to a Get Status call. A Phone call has been received or disconnected. 294 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer CICS error messages Table 37 summarises CICS error messages and their meanings. Table 37: CICS error messages Error message ERROR: Admin access required ERROR: ALE beacon not allowed Description The command that you entered requires an administrator login. Type login admin. Enter the admin password for the transceiver connected. The call type used for the call is not installed in the transceiver. Select another call type, or if you want to use the call type, contact your Codan representative. ERROR: AMD call failed The message that you have sent within an established link has failed. ERROR: Bad command The syntax of the command entered is incorrect. Use the help command to look for the categories of available commands and use the help <category> command to get information on the available commands within a category. For information on CICS functionality use the help cics command. The outgoing call has not started. This message is preceded by a message stating the reason for the failure. Check the destination address and use the selbeacon command to send a Channel Test call to the destination. You may need to select another frequency. There has been an internal problem making the call. Under normal conditions this error should not occur. Switch the transceiver off then on again. This type of call cannot be made. Check if the option associated with the call type is installed in the transceiver. The channel you entered is not programmed in the transceiver. Either program the channel into your transceiver, or select another channel for the call. You are not permitted to transmit on this CB frequency as it does not correspond with a CB channel within the transceiver. Select another frequency. The command you entered has failed. Check the syntax required for the command. The message is too long. Shorten the message, or split the message over a number of calls. The maximum number of characters permitted in a call type is provided in Table 34 on page 274. The self address contains characters that are not permitted. Check that the self address is correct for the type of network in which it is being used (see page 69, Entering your station self address). ERROR: Call failed ERROR: Call reply error XXX ERROR: Call type not allowed ERROR: Channel not found ERROR: Citizen band frequency but not citizen band channel Error: Command failed ERROR: Data too long ERROR: FROM selfid

<self address> not valid 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 295 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 37: CICS error messages (cont.) ERROR: Invalid call type for network ERROR: Invalid call options ERROR: Invalid call type or selfid for scanning networks Description Under normal conditions this error should not occur. It is an indication that something went wrong with internal processing. Contact your Codan representative. Error message ERROR: Internal error ERROR: Internal error XXXX ERROR: Internal get ERROR: Internal set ERROR: Invalid address The destination address that you are using for the call contains characters that are not permitted, or the statusack has an invalid source address. Check all addresses for the call. The call options that you have entered for the call:

do not match those allowed for the call system

have been repeated

are not recognised when inserted after a message The call type used for the call is not supported by the network. Select a call type that is valid for the network, or select a different network. You have started a call during scanning. CICS attempts to select the first suitable network, however in this case, there are no suitable networks. Do one of the following before making the call again:

The self address contains characters that are not permitted. Check that the self address is correct for the type of network in which it is being used (see page 69, Entering your station self address). The destination address used for the call type or network is incorrect, for example, alpha characters in a Codan Selcall network. Correct the destination address and try the call again. The name of the network used for the call does not exist or does not support the call type (see page 123, Network Name). The entry in the self address list is incorrect. Check that the self address and assigned networks in the self address list are correct. The self address contains characters that are not permitted by the network specified, for example, alpha characters in a Codan Selcall network. Correct the self address. The network in the self address list is incorrect. The self address list has been updated with a network using the selfid command. The network specified does not exist. Select a valid network for the self address. switch off scanning specify the network for the call select a different call type select a different self address ERROR: Invalid network name ERROR: Invalid selfid network ERROR: Invalid selfid for specified address ERROR: Invalid selfid for specified network ERROR: Invalid characters in selfid ERROR: Invalid destination address 296 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 37: CICS error messages (cont.) Operating the transceiver from a computer Error message ERROR: Invalid source address Description The self address used for the call has not been accepted. Check that the self address is correct for the networks call system. You have attempted to use LBT but it is not installed in your transceiver. ERROR: LBT option not installed ERROR: LBT wrong mode You have attempted to use LBT when the transceiver is unable to ERROR: Message too big The message length is too long. Shorten the message, or split the ERROR: Low battery voltage ERROR: Max index allowed is n ERROR: Message not allowed ERROR: Mode is not allowed ERROR: Mode not found ERROR: Network in address not found ERROR: Network not found perform LBT, for example, when the transceiver is scanning. CICS has attempted a PTT and detected that the battery voltage is low. Recharge the battery. You have attempted to set a Secure Index that is greater than n. Enter a Secure Index that is less than or equal to n. A message is not allowed with this call type. Select another call type, or if you want to use this call type with a message, contact your Codan representative. message over a number of calls. The maximum number of characters permitted in a call type is provided in Table 34 on page 274. The mode is not permitted for the selected channel. Select another mode. The mode requested is not available on this transceiver. Select another mode. The network used in the call address is not programmed in the Network List of the transceiver. Either program the network into your transceiver, or select another network for the call. You have used the scan [on|off|<network>] command. The network specified is not programmed in the Network List of the transceiver. Repeat the scan command using on, off or a valid network name. ERROR: No active link You have used the hangup command, but no call is currently in progress. ERROR: No ale network You have used the alecall or aletelcall commands. The ERROR: No call system for current channel transceiver has searched for an ALE/CALM network but one was not found. You have made a call on the currently selected channel and mode

(scan is off). No channel is specified in the call information. CICS searches all networks for one that contains the currently selected channel and mode, but has not found a network. Select another channel and/or mode. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 297 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 37: CICS error messages (cont.) Error message ERROR: No channels found ERROR: No GPS unit connected ERROR: No key at this index ERROR: No link available ERROR: No modes programmed ERROR: No modes with this sideband ERROR: No network for selfid ERROR: No networks found ERROR: No response from RF unit ERROR: No selfid ERROR: No selfid for network Description You have made a call on the currently selected channel (scan is off), but a channel cannot be selected because no channels are programmed or you were in free tune (see page 231, Using the transceiver in free tune and Amateur Mode). Exit free tune if required. Program some channels into your transceiver, or if not permitted to do so, contact your Codan representative. You have sent GPS information in a call, however, the transceiver has detected that a GPS unit is not connected in the system. Check the cable connections to the GPS unit and that the RS232 mode and speed entries in the Control List are set correctly. The GPS option must also be installed. You have selected a Secure Index that does not have a Secure Key set. Select another index, or program a key for this index. There is no link available to the addressed station. This is caused by updates occurring in the transceiver unit. Wait a few minutes for the link to be established. If the link is still unavailable, try the call again. No modes are programmed in the transceiver. Contact your Codan representative. No modes are programmed with this sideband. Contact your Codan representative. The command entered included a self address for which there is no suitable network, for example, the self address contained alpha characters but there is no ALE/CALM network. You have set the transceiver to scan or are making a call while scanning is on, but the transceiver cannot find any networks that are set to be scanned. Change the Scan Network setting in the networks that you want to scan (see page 128, Programming the Network List). There has been a problem making the call or requesting PTT such that there is no response from the transceiver unit. Check cable connections. Wait for a minute or two for the transceiver unit to recover automatically. You have made a call on the currently selected channel (scan is off) without specifying a network. The transceiver has located a network containing the channel, but no self address is set for this network in the self ID list. Select a different channel, select a self address to use with the network, or specify a network that has a valid self address in the call information. The specified network does not have a self address. Check the command syntax and the self address list. 298 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 37: CICS error messages (cont.) Error message ERROR: Not installed ERROR: No valid GPS position ERROR: Not an ALE network ERROR: Not supported ERROR: PTT active ERROR: PTT rejected ERROR: Request failed Description You have attempted to send an AMD message, request LQA information, or perform a sounding operation. The options required to perform these activities are not installed in your transceiver. If you want to perform these activities, contact your Codan representative. The GPS position is either too old or not valid yet. Check the cables connected to the GPS unit. The command entered requires an ALE/CALM network, but the network specified with the command is not an ALE/CALM network. The request cannot be executed because the option is not installed in your transceiver. If you want to use the option, contact your Codan representative. The transceiver is currently transmitting and prevents the command from being executed. For example, you will not be able to change channels when the system is transmitting. Wait until the transceiver has completed the transmission, then send the new command. PTT did not succeed. For more information see page 318, PTT rejected from <location of PTT: reason>. The information requested cannot be retrieved from the RF unit. Check the cable connections. ERROR: Scan list empty The scan on command failed because no networks are set for scanning, these networks do not contain any channels, or the Scan Allow entry is disabled. The scan <network> command failed because these networks do not contain any channels, or the Scan Allow entry is disabled. Change the Scan Network entry to Scan (see page 123, Scan Network), add channels to the network if necessary, or enable the Scan Allow entry. The system is currently scanning and cannot complete the command. Use the scan off command to switch off scanning, then try the new command again. The command you entered is not allowed while the Voice Encryptor option is active. Use the secure off command to exit secure mode, then try the new command again. Your transceiver does not have any self addresses programmed. ERROR: Scanning is on ERROR: Secure is On ERROR: Selfid list empty ERROR: Selfid list too long ERROR: Selfid too long The self address or the total length of the self address and network There are too many self addresses in the self address list. Delete self addresses until the list contains no more than 20 self addresses. name exceeds a specified limit for the call system used in the network. Shorten the length of the self address and/or the network name. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 299 Operating the transceiver from a computer Table 37: CICS error messages (cont.) Error message ERROR: Sideband not allowed ERROR: Synthesiser is unlocked ERROR: System is busy ERROR: System locked ERROR: Too many group IDs ERROR: Transceiver cut out ERROR: Transceiver is tuning ERROR: Transmit inhibited ERROR: Tx disabled because of TPE link ERROR: Unable to send data ERROR: Unknown network name in selfid ERROR: XR or VP not installed Description The sideband is not permitted for this channel. Select another mode. You cannot transmit while the synthesiser is unlocked. Switch the transceiver off then on again. If the error persists, contact your Codan representative. There has been a problem making the call or updating the self address list. Wait for a few minutes, then repeat the command. The system is locked and the command cannot be executed. Wait for the lock to be released (for example, a data call ending), or to timeout, then try the command again. You are making a call using the Group Selective address syntax, however you have entered too many addresses (see page 254, Addresses in commands). The PTT has timed out according to the value set in the Cfg PTT Cutout Time entry in the Control List. If your transmission is long, set the Cfg PTT Cutout Time entry to 30 minutes. The PTT command has been rejected because the transceiver is currently tuning. Wait until the transceiver completes the tuning cycle, then try the ptt command again. You have tried to transmit on a receive-only channel. Select a channel that has a transmit frequency. You are not permitted to transmit a signal with the TPE link in its current position and the programming options installed in your transceiver. Contact your Codan representative. There has been a problem sending data with the call. This message is preceded by a message stating the reason for the data not being sent. Refer to the description for the previous message to resolve the problem. The network for the self address does not exist as the network may have been deleted after it was allocated to the self address. Program the network into the Network List in your transceiver, or edit the self address so that it uses a current network. You have attempted to use a voice encryption option that is not installed in your transceiver. If you want to use this option, contact your Codan representative. 300 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 20 Connectors CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Front panel (302) Bottom panel (306) Battery pack (307) WARNING Only suitably qualified personnel should use the information contained in this section. Failure to observe this warning could result in damage to the transceiver. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 301 Connectors Front panel Figure 47: Front panel of the transceiver unit antennas user controls interface connectors TUNE 1 QZ FREE Rx 4 GHI 7 PRS EASI TALK CLAR 2ABC MODE DEF3 5 JKL SEC 8TUV VIEW 0 Tx PWR6 GPS 9 CALL LOGS infrared window internal speaker location of internal GPS antenna earth terminal Antenna connectors The antenna connectors comprise:

The antenna connectors are grounded using the earth terminal (

an antenna stud ( ) a 50 connector (

). 302 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Connectors Pinouts of the handset connector Figure 48: Front view of the handset connector E D F A B C Table 38: Pinouts of the handset connector Pin no. A B C D E F Function Ground Earphone PTT Microphone (switched) Power Not used Signal levels 0 V 10 V pp maximum (600 ) Active low for PTT 15 mV pp (ALC threshold)

+12 V nominal 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 303 Connectors Pinouts of the 19-way GPIO connector Figure 49: Front view of the 19-way GPIO connector B A M C P N D R V U E S T F G H L J K Table 39: Pinouts of the 19-way GPIO connector Pin no. A B C Function Line audio in Line audio out D E F G H J K L M N P R Morse RS232 transmit data RS232 receive data PTT Power and signal ground Speaker (+) audio output bridging Protected, switched supply from battery Speaker () audio output paired with J Power in for charging battery Antenna control Scan output Signal levels 300 mV pp (ALC threshold) I/P approx. 50 k bridging 1 V pp (20 dB above AGC) 600 load maximum Active low RS232 Active low 0 V 1 W into 4 12 V DC nominal 1015 V DC range 1 A maximum 1 W into 4 15.5 V DC approx. 1 A maximum, current limiting 3.3 V logic input 5 V tolerant 3.3 V logic I/O 5 V tolerant Open collector 1 k pull-down 304 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Connectors Table 39: Pinouts of the 19-way GPIO connector (cont.) Pin no. S T U V Function RS232 RTS RS232 CTS External PA ALC Quiet Signal levels RS232 05 V DC analogue Active low 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 305 Connectors Bottom panel Figure 50: Bottom panel of the transceiver unit Pinouts of the battery connector on the transceiver unit Figure 51: Front view of the battery connector on the transceiver unit F E A D B C Table 40: Pinouts of the battery connector on the transceiver unit Pin no. A B C D E F Function Ground Charge out Battery+

SMB data SMB clock Spare Signal levels 0 V 15.5 V @ 1 A maximum, current limiting 12 V nominal 3.3 V logic 3.3 V logic 306 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Battery pack Figure 52: Top panel of the battery pack Connectors Pinouts of the battery connector on the battery pack Figure 53: Front view of the battery connector on the battery pack B C A D F E Table 41: Pinouts of the battery connector on the battery pack Pin no. A B C D E F Function Ground Charge in Battery+

SMB data SMB clock Spare Signal levels 0 V 15.5 V @ 3 A maximum, current limiting 12 V nominal 3.3 V logic 3.3 V logic 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 307 Connectors This page has been left blank intentionally. 308 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 21 System messages CODAN This section lists the system messages that may be displayed on the front panel and a description of each for a 2110 SSB Transceiver. Table 42: System messages Message

**** NSP ****

Admin password incorrect Administrator logged out Antenna untuned Bad bearing:

Invalid GPS position in last message Call aborted Call already in progress Call completed Call error:

bad message Call error:

call system not configured Call error:

check cables and restart tcvr Call error:

message too long Description NSP is being used to upload or download information to the transceiver. Wait until NSP has finished. You may then need to switch the transceiver off then on again. You have entered an incorrect admin password. Enter the correct password. You have logged out of admin level and have returned to user level. so that you can send a message within a The antenna is no longer tuned. Tune the antenna. The GPS position of your transceiver is classified as Bad, so the bearing to the GPS position in the call log or Address List is not accurate. Update the GPS position in your transceiver. You have aborted the current call by pressing PTT while the call was being made. A call is currently in progress. End or abort the call before you start another. The call in which you were transferring data has been automatically completed. You have pressed Selective call however, the call system will not accept the message that you have entered. Check the characters and length of the message, as only AZ, 09, and some punctuation characters may be allowed. The option for the call system with which you have attempted to make a call has not been installed in the transceiver. Select a network with a different call system or, if you know the option code for the call system, install it using the Option code setting under the Devices entry in the Control List (see page 218, Installing an option in the transceiver). An error has occurred in a device. Switch the transceiver off, check that the cables are connected correctly, then switch the transceiver on. If the problem persists, contact your Codan representative. The message you have entered has too many characters. The permitted message length depends on the type of call system, the Privacy Mode selected, and the character set (see Table 34 on page 274). Reduce the length of your message. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 309 System messages Table 42: System messages (cont.) Message Call error:

no GPS info to send Description You have attempted to make a Send Position call but the transceiver did not have any GPS information to send. This may be because the transceiver has not received any valid GPS data and/or because it has not been correctly configured to operate with a GPS receiver. Check that:

the cable between the GPS receiver and the transceiver is connected correctly the value in the RS232 15way Mode entry in the Control List is set to GPS the baud rate in the RS232 15way Speed entry in the Control List is set to the correct baud rate for the GPS receiver

Call error:

specify status message Call error:

stop scan then retry Call failed:

auto timeout exceeded Call failed:

could not connect Call failed:

no response received Call rejected:

check call details then retry Call sent

<call type icon> <address>

Call succeeded

<call type icon> <address>

the station did not respond the channel was of poor quality Try the call again. You have attempted to make a Get Status call without specifying the type of information you want from the other station. When you try the call again, ensure that you specify this information when the transceiver prompts you for a message. An error occurred when the transceiver tried to stop scanning. Press SCAN to stop scanning, then try the call again. An automated part of a call took too long. The transceiver has ended the call. The transceiver could not connect to the station you called because:

Try again later. The transceiver did not receive a response from the station you called. Try the call on a different channel. The transceiver could not make the call because:

one or more details of the call were incorrect

the system was busy Check the details of the call and/or wait for 10 seconds before you try the call again. The Emergency or Selective call you made in a Codan Selcall network has been sent to the other station. Hold down PTT then speak. The Emergency or Selective call you made in an ALE/CALM network has been automatically answered by the other station. Hold down PTT then speak. 310 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 42: System messages (cont.) System messages Message Call type not installed: <call type icon>

Calling...

<call type icon> <address>

Calling... Send message Calling... Trying <name of channel>/<name of mode>

Cant charge Too hot Cant change frequency Cant change mode Description The option to make this type of call has not been installed in the transceiver. Select a different call type or, if you know the option code for the call type, enter it using the Option code setting under the Devices entry in the Control List (see page 218, Installing an option in the transceiver). Your call has started. Wait for the next message. You are sending a message within an existing ALE link to the in-link address. You have started a call in an ALE/CALM network. The transceiver is attempting to make the call on the channel/mode displayed. The battery monitoring system has detected that the temperature is too high for charging. Wait until the battery temperature lowers, then try charging the battery again. You cannot edit frequencies in this transceiver. You cannot change the mode on the current channel for one of the following reasons:

The mode you want to set is not an allowed mode for the channel. Select another mode. The channel/mode has been locked. You may be able to unlock it if it is locked at the same access level as that into which you are logged. The TxD option has been installed in the transceiver which prevents you from changing modes on transmit channels. For more information contact your system administrator.

Cant change mode: channel has changed Cant change mode: tcvr is scanning Cant clarify chan: tcvr is scanning Cant edit this item The channel has been reprogrammed and the mode is no longer valid. You cannot change the current mode because the transceiver is scanning. Press SCAN to stop scanning, then try again. You cannot use the clarifier while the transceiver is scanning. Press SCAN to stop scanning, then try again. You have used a macro to go to a setting that can no longer be edited. For example, you created a macro to go to the Message setting of an entry in the Address List. You then changed this entry to make a Selective call instead of a Message call. The message setting is no longer relevant to the entry so it is not displayed. When you use the macro, however, it still tries to go to this setting. To avoid this message, delete the macro. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 311 System messages Table 42: System messages (cont.) Message Cant free tune: tcvr is scanning Cant modify

<name of macro> macro Cant toggle scan: try again Cant tune:

tcvr is scanning Chain call ended Channel busy:

<name of channel>

Channel busy:

Try again later Channel List is empty Channel not found: <name of channel>

Channel Test

...listen Channel Test sent... Data call started Data changed by another user Device error in <name of device>

Error in NET:

<name of NET> <details>

Description You have attempted to use the transceiver as a free tune receiver while the transceiver is scanning. Press SCAN to stop scanning, then try again. You have attempted to modify a macro stored in the Special entry in the Keypad List. Make a copy of the macro first, assign the copy to a key or to the Unassigned entry in the Keypad List, then modify the copy. An error has occurred while switching scanning on or off. Press SCAN to toggle scanning. You have attempted to manually tune the antenna while the transceiver is scanning. Press SCAN to stop scanning, then try again. You have ended a chain call by pressing a key. The channel/mode on which you are attempting to make a call is busy. Your call cannot be made because the channel is busy. Wait for the channel to clear, or select a different channel, then try again. There are no channels in the Channel List. Create one or more channels. The channel/mode on which you are attempting to make a call is in the channel/mode list of the network you are using, but it is not in the Channel List. Start the call again and select another channel/mode. To avoid this message, delete the channel/mode from the network. Listen for the revertive from the station you called. Your Channel Test call has been sent. Wait for the revertive. An incoming or outgoing call using a modem has started. Another user is changing the entries in the list. Exit from the list, wait for the user to finish changing the entries, then select the list again to update the entries. An error has occurred in one of the transceivers devices. Switch the transceiver off then on, then retry the task that caused the error. The specified NET cannot be found, or the network associated with the NET cannot be found, or is not an ALE/CALM network. Check that the NET is programmed into your transceiver and that it contains a valid network. 312 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual System messages Table 42: System messages (cont.) Message Error reading

<name of list/entry/device>

Error reading an entry: skipping it Error reading call type Error updating list: check cables then restart tcvr Error updating list: check setting value and length GPS position established Group chan not found: <name of channel>

Hangup from:

<self address of member leaving the call>

Hangup sent

...listen Information sent... Invalid addr:

<address>

Invalid addr for call system: <destination address>

Description An error occurred when the transceiver tried to read the list, entry or device displayed. Switch the transceiver off, check that the cables are connected correctly, then switch the transceiver on. If the problem persists, contact your Codan representative. An error occurred when the transceiver tried to read an entry. Switch the transceiver off, check that the cables are connected correctly, then switch the transceiver on. If the problem persists, contact your Codan representative. An error occurred when the transceiver tried to read the call type of the outgoing call. Switch the transceiver off, check that the cables are connected correctly, then switch the transceiver on. If the problem persists, contact your Codan representative. An error occurred when the transceiver tried to update a list. Switch the transceiver off, check that the cables are connected correctly, then switch the transceiver on. If the problem persists, contact your Codan representative. An error occurred when the transceiver tried to update a list. Check the value of the setting or the length of a message before attempting to save the setting. The transceiver is now receiving valid GPS information. The channel/mode on which you are attempting to make a call is no longer in the group specified in the Network List. Select another channel. To avoid this message, delete the channel/mode from the entry you used to make the call. A station in the link has hung up. You have ended a Phone call. Listen for the revertive to confirm that the telephone interconnect unit received your hangup signal. The transceiver has sent the data in your Message or Send Position call. The address you have entered has invalid syntax for an ALE ALL, ANY, Group Selective, NET, or Wildcard call. The address of the station you are trying to call is not valid for the call system of the network you are using (for example, you are making the call in a Codan Selcall network but the destination address contains letters). Correct the address, or select a different network, then try again. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 313 System messages Table 42: System messages (cont.) Message Invalid addr for call system: <your station self address>

Invalid addr for call type: <address>

Invalid call to NET address Invalid mode:

<channel/mode> in <network>

Invalid option code Item already exists Key <name of key>

is stuck Link quality

<progress of clearing action>

List is full Locked entry Locked list Locked setting Description The self address from which you want to make this call is not valid for the call system of the network you are using (for example, you are making the call in a Codan Selcall network but the self address for this network contains letters). Correct the self address, or select a different network, then try again. You have entered an invalid address syntax for the call type, for example, you are making an ALL call in a Channel Test call. You have attempted to make a Get Position or Get Status call to a NET address. A channel in a network you are scanning has a mode that is no longer valid for it. This may be because:

The channel/mode combination will not be scanned. To avoid this message, do one or more of the following:

the mode is not an allowed mode for the channel the mode is no longer in the Mode List go to the Channel List and modify the allowed modes for the channel go to the Network List and modify the channel/mode list in the network install the correct option for the mode

You have entered an invalid option code. Enter the correct code.

You have attempted to add an item to a list that is identical to an existing item. Add a unique item. A key on the front panel is stuck down. Release the key. You have selected to clear the ALE link quality analysis information from the transceiver and the progress of the clearing activity is displayed. You have attempted to create an entry or add an item to a list that is full. Delete some entries/items. You have attempted to edit a locked list, entry or setting. If the item was locked at the same access level as that into which you are logged, or at a lower level, you can unlock the item. For example, if an entry was locked at user level and you logged in as a user, you could unlock the entry using the Unlock? entry in the List Manager (see page 115, Locking and unlocking information). To unlock the item, use the appropriate entry in the List Manager. 314 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 42: System messages (cont.) System messages Message Low battery Macro error:

recreate macro for <name of macro>

Macro memory is full Macro update needed Delete a few unused macros to make room for new macros Macros updated Reload Keypad List in NSP and save a new profile for use with JB

<transceiver unit version at which macro update occurred> and higher Memory error:

Address List reset Memory error:

all lists reset Memory error:

Calls In Log reset Memory error:

Calls Out Log reset Memory error:

Keypad List reset Memory error:

macros reset Memory error:

one or more lists reset Memory error:

Phone Link List reset Description Battery voltage is very low. Recharge or replace the battery. If the transceiver is installed in a vehicle, start the vehicle to recharge the battery. An error occurred when the transceiver tried to create the macro. Create the macro again. The memory storage for macros is full. You must delete one or more macros before you can create another. The macros programmed through NSP are inconsistent with the current version of transceiver unit firmware, and the transceiver has insufficient memory space to update the macros. Delete one or two macros then switch the transceiver off then on again. NSP has downloaded an old set of macros that are inconsistent with the current version of transceiver unit firmware. Load the new Keypad List from the transceiver into a new profile for use with this version of transceiver unit firmware and higher. The Address List has been reset to its factory-default contents due to a memory error. If you created any entries in this list you will need to recreate them. Firmware in the transceiver has been upgraded. As the layout of data in each list has changed from the previous version of firmware, all lists have been reset to their factory-default contents. Recreate the entries and/or re-enter the values in each list. The entries in the Calls In Log have been deleted due to a memory error. The entries in the Calls Out Log have been deleted due to a memory error. The Keypad List has been reset to its factory-default contents due to a memory error. If you created any macros or modified any key assignments you will need to recreate and/or re-enter them. The macro database has been reset to its factory-default contents due to a memory error. If you created any macros you will need to recreate them. Firmware in the transceiver has been upgraded. As the layout of data in some lists has changed from the previous version of firmware, some lists have been reset to their factory-default contents. Recreate the entries and/or re-enter the values in the lists affected. The Phone Link List has been reset to its factory-default contents due to a memory error. If you created any entries in this list you will need to recreate them. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 315 System messages Table 42: System messages (cont.) Message Memory error:

station addresses reset Memory error:

write failed Mode not found: <name of mode>

Name already exists Network not found: <name of network>

Network chan/mode list is empty New option installed: restart tcvr No data available No mode for

<name of channel>

No networks set to be scanned No tuner No valid GPS info within timeout period No valid network in Network List the mode is no longer an allowed mode for the channel the name of the mode has been changed in the Mode List Description Your station self addresses have been reset due to a memory error. Re-

enter these self addresses. An error occurred when the transceiver tried to write to non-volatile memory. Retry the task that caused the error. If the problem persists, contact your Codan representative. The channel on which you are attempting to make a call is in the channel/mode list of the network you are using, but:

Begin the call again and select another channel/mode. To avoid this message, modify the channel/mode setting for the entry you are using to make the call. You can also check the allowed modes for the channel in the Channel List and/or check the name of the mode in the Mode List. You have attempted to create an entry in a list with the same name as an existing entry. Create an entry with a unique name. The network in which you have attempted to make a call is not in the Network List. Select another network. To avoid this message, change the network in the entry in which this error occurred. There are no channels in the channel/mode list of the network you are scanning. Enter some channels. A new option has been installed in the transceiver. Switch the transceiver off then on for the option to take effect. The information you requested from the other station is unavailable. There are no allowed modes for the channel. Go to the Channel List and select a mode for the channel. You have switched scanning on but no networks have been set to be scanned. Go to the Network List, go to the network you want to scan, then change the value in the Scan Network setting from Dont scan. The transceiver has attempted to tune the antenna, but there may be no tuner (the antenna may not require one), or the antenna may be faulty. No valid GPS information has been received within the time set in the GPS Error Time entry in the Control List. This message is displayed when the Network List is empty. Create a suitable network in the Network List. 316 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 42: System messages (cont.) System messages Message Not found:

<name of entry>

Not in Channel List: <name of channel>

Not in network: <channel/mode>

Number too high Number too low Other station ended call Position rcvd:

<GPS position>

Power fault on antenna Power fault on antenna recovered PTT aborted:

confirmations lost PTT aborted:

timeout period exceeded Description A setting in this list refers to an entry in another list, but that entry is no longer there. Select a different entry or recreate the missing entry. One of the channels in the network you are scanning is not in the Channel List. Either remove the channel from the channel/mode list of the network, or recreate the channel in the Channel List. The channel/mode on which you have attempted to make a call is not in the network. For example, the Address List entry you are calling specifies the network in which the call is to be made, but the channel/mode is not in that network. Select a different channel/mode or network. This message may also be displayed when you are editing a channel/

mode in the Address or Phone Link List and the channel/mode is not in the network specified. Select a different channel/mode or network. You have entered a number that exceeds the maximum value for the setting. Enter a lower number. You have entered a number below the minimum value for the setting. Enter a higher number. The station you called has ended the call. The transceiver has received the GPS position of the station you called. The antenna power has failed due to excessive current being drawn by the antenna. Check the antenna connectors, and if the problem persists, check the antenna. The power fault on the antenna has been rectified. The device that was transmitting (for example, a modem) has been disconnected. Reconnect the device then try the task again. The transceiver has ceased transmission because the maximum transmission time set in the Cfg PTT Cutout Time entry in the Control List was exceeded. This may have occurred because you held PTT down too long or made a long transmission using a modem. Release the PTT button if it is held down and/or increase the PTT cutout time if necessary. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 317 System messages Table 42: System messages (cont.) Message PTT rejected from <location of PTT: reason>

Description The transceiver could not transmit from a specific location for the reason stated. The possible locations are the handset, morse key, and CICS on the 19-way port. The possible reasons are that:

you are on a receive-only channel the mode is not allowed for this channel you are in the CB frequency range but are not on a specific CB channel you are using a transceiver in which the channel programming option and the position of the TPE link does not permit transmission the system is locked the transceiver is scanning the battery is low the synthesiser is unlocked the transceiver is tuning the maximum transmission time set in the Cfg PTT Cutout Time entry in the Control List was exceeded

Read only entry Read only list Read only setting Receive-only channel Reply: <caller address>

<message>

Request sent... Response from:

<list of NET members who responded, latest response first>

Secure error:

hardware fault Secure error:

index key not set You have attempted to edit a locked list, entry or setting. The item was locked at a higher access level than that into which you are logged. You cannot unlock it unless you log into that higher level. For example, if an entry was locked at admin level and you have logged in as a user, you must log in as an administrator before you can unlock the entry. You have attempted to transmit on a receive-only channel. Select a channel on which you can transmit. You have received a response to a call from another station that includes a message. Your request that information (such as a GPS position) be automatically sent to you from another station has been sent. Wait for the next message. You have made a NET call and received a slotted response from the NET members listed. Switch the transceiver off, check that the cables are connected correctly, then switch the transceiver on. If the problem persists, contact your Codan representative. You have selected a key that has not been set up in the secure index. 318 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Table 42: System messages (cont.) System messages Message Secure error:

no keys set Secure error:

try again Service option enabled Settings hidden in <name of entry>

Skip message Only ALE/CALM allows message with Selective calls Sounding completed Status rcvd:

<Get Status information>

Synthesiser lock error Synthesiser lock recovered System error

<error number>

Tcvr busy:

retry in 10 seconds Text too long Description No keys have been programmed since the voice encryptor was installed. Program a secure key (see page 80, Using the voice encryptor). The voice encryptor module has reset unexpectedly. Press SEC to go secure. The service option in the transceiver is enabled. Contact your Codan representative to have this option disabled. You have attempted to display the settings for an entry where all the settings have been hidden at user level. To display the settings, use the Full view? entry in the List Manager. To display the settings in normal view, use the Show? entry in the List Manager. The ALE Selective Msg entry in the Control List is enabled. You have entered a message at the prompt in a Selective call and attempted to make the call on a network that is not ALE/CALM. The Selective call will proceed without the message. If you want to send the message, select an ALE/CALM network when prompted. The sounding operation that you initiated from the front panel is now complete. The transceiver has received the Get Status information from the station you called. The frequency synthesiser has not locked on a frequency. Contact your Codan representative. The frequency synthesiser can now lock on a frequency. A system error has occurred. The transceiver will restart automatically. Retry the task you were performing when the error occurred. If the problem persists, note the system error number in the message, then contact your Codan representative. The transceiver is busy. This may be because:

Wait for 10 seconds then try the task again. You have entered a line of text that is too long. Reduce the length of the text. it is receiving an incoming call it is processing a change made to your station self address 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 319 System messages Table 42: System messages (cont.) Message Too many chans for auto ALE call Too many chans to scan Tune aborted Tune antenna then retry call Tune failed Tune successful Tuner timeout Tuning... Waiting for response Description The ALE/CALM network in which you are attempting to make a call contains more than 100 channels. The transceiver will attempt to make the call on a maximum of 100 channels. To avoid this message and to ensure the transceiver uses all the channels in the network, go to the Network List and reduce the number of channels in the network to 100 or less. More than 100 channels have been set to be scanned. The transceiver will only scan 100 of them. In the Network List:

remove some channels from the channel/mode list of one or more of the networks that are set to be scanned reduce the number of networks that are set to be scanned by changing the value of the Scan Network setting in one or more networks to Dont scan

Automatic tuning of the antenna was aborted because you pressed PTT during an automatic tuning cycle. Your call cannot be made until the antenna is tuned. Tune the antenna then try the call again. The transceiver could not automatically tune the antenna. The transceiver has tuned the antenna successfully. Automatic tuning of the antenna has timed out because:

the transceiver could not tune the antenna within the specified timeout period the tuner cable is not connected the Cfg Auto Tune Mode is set incorrectly

The transceiver is automatically tuning the antenna. You have requested that information (such as a GPS position) be automatically sent to you from another station. The transceiver is waiting for a response from that station. Wait for the next message. 320 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 22 Accessories and hardware options CODAN The following accessories and hardware options are available for your 2110 SSB Transceiver. Table 43: List of accessories and hardware options Code 08-06155-002 08-06185-001 08-06186-001 08-06188-001 08-06214-001 08-06215-001 08-06216-001 08-06217-001 08-06237-001 08-06259-001 15-00216 15-00217 15-00218 15-00446 15-00452 15-00453 15-00454 15-00455 15-00456 15-00457 15-00458 15-00459 15-00573 15-00574 15-02071-EN 15-04128-EN 15-04139-EN Accessories High-stability reference oscillator Battery Pack 12 V, 8 Ah NiMh Battery Pack 12 V, 13 Ah NiMh Battery Pack 12 V, 7 Ah SLA 6-way output lead for battery charger 19-way output lead for battery charger Input lead for DC battery charger (lighter adaptor) Input lead for DC battery charger (clips) 19-way (MS) to 9-way (D-type) programming cable Earth lead with clip and plug Backpack, External Frame Backpack, Internal X Frame Backpack, Soft 4-wire counterpoise 3 m (10 ft) Collapsible Whip Antenna Tape Whip Antenna Long Wire Antenna and Adaptor Wire Dipole Antenna (330 MHz) Broadband Dipole Antenna (330 MHz) Dipole/Broadband Dipole Antenna Kit End-fed Broadband Antenna Short Knock-down Whip Antenna 2110 Battery Charger AC 1 A 2110 Battery Charger DC 1 A 2110 SSB Transceiver Technical Service Manual NGT System Programmer 2110 SSB Transceiver Repair Guide 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 321 Accessories and hardware options Table 43: List of accessories and hardware options (cont.) Code 15-10479 15-10481 15-10518 15-10525-000 15-10528-000 15-10529-000 15-10531-000 15-10532 67-90200 67-90201 67-90202 67-90203 Accessories FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option Tx program disable (TxD) option Amateur Mode option GPS receiver option (internal fit) 500 Hz filter option (internal fit) 3 kHz filter option (internal fit) Voice Encryptor option (internal fit) MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option Input lead for AC battery charger (AUS-IEC) Input lead for AC battery charger (UK-IEC) Input lead for AC battery charger (USA-IEC) Input lead for AC battery charger (EU-IEC) 322 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 23 Specifications CODAN The following table shows typical values. Table 44: Specifications for the 2110 SSB Transceiver Item Channel capacity Frequency range Operating modes Transmitted power Spurious and harmonic emissions Receiver sensitivity Selectivity Frequency stability Supply voltage Overvoltage protection Low voltage switch off 1.6 to 30 MHz 250 kHz to 30 MHz Specification 400 Transmit:

Receive:

Single sideband (J3E) USB or LSB or switched USB/LSB, (AM H3E optional) 25 W (PEP) 0.5 dB (high power) 5 W (PEP) 0.5 dB (low power) CW or single tone: approximately 60% of PEP with average PEP control

(average control disabled on handset PTT) Better than 65 dB below PEP Frequency:

0.25 to 30 MHz Frequency:

1.6 to 30 MHz RF amp off:

0.28 V PD

118 dBm RF amp on:

0.14 V PD

124 dBm

@ 300 to 2600 Hz 6 dB For 10 dB SINAD with greater than 50 mW audio output Greater than 70 dB at 1 kHz and +4 kHz reference SCF USB Maximum pass band level variation:

Ripple:

1 ppm 0.5 ppm 12 V DC nominal from supplied battery, negative earth Normal operating range:

Reverse polarity protection provided Shutdown at 16 V 0.5 V DC nominal for duration of overvoltage Switch off @ 10 V 2 dB pp

(30 to +60C)

(30 to +60C)

@ 500 to 2500 Hz

(standard)

(high stability) 10.5 to 15.5 V DC 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 323 2.53.5 A 1 A for battery life calculations 120 mA standby mode 145 mA operating mode Specifications Table 44: Specifications for the 2110 SSB Transceiver (cont.) Item Supply current Specification Transmit:

Two-tone into 50 :

Average speech:

Tuning limit of internal antenna tuner Tuning time of internal antenna tuner Size Weight Sealing Receive:

No signal:

< 1.5:1 typical SWR First time:

From memory:

2110 (including battery): 245 mm W 350 mm D 92 mm H 2.5 s 50 ms typical

(9.8 in W 14.0 in D 3.7 in H) 245 mm W 250 mm D 92 mm H

(9.8 in W 10.0 in D 3.7 in H) 2.5 kg (5.5 lb) 2.9 kg (6.4 lb) 2110 only:

2110 only:

13 Ah NiMh battery pack:

8 Ah NiMh battery pack: 2.1 kg (4.6 lb) 7 Ah SLA battery pack:

3.2 kg (7.1 lb) IP68 (immersion for 1 h at a depth of 1 m (3 ft)) 324 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Specifications Accessories Table 45: Physical specifications of accessories Accessory Tape Whip Antenna Knock-down Whip Antenna 3 m (10 ft) Collapsible Whip Antenna Long Wire Antenna and Adaptor End-fed Broadband Antenna Broadband Dipole Antenna

(330 MHz) Wire Dipole Antenna (330 MHz) Coaxial cable, 3 m (10 ft) Coaxial cable, 15 m (50 ft) Earth lead with clip/plug Counterpoise Earth stake 3121 AC Battery Charger 3122 DC Battery Charger Backpack, External Frame Backpack, Internal X Frame Backpack, Soft Size 50 mm W 20 mm D 480 mm H

(2.0 in W 0.8 in D 19.2 in H) 40 mm W 40 mm D 550 mm H

(1.6 in W 1.6 in D 22.0 in H) 40 mm W 40 mm D 550 mm H

(1.6 in W 1.6 in D 22.0 in H) 200 mm W 70 mm D 40 mm H

(8.0 in W 2.8 in D 1.6 in H) 200 mm W 70 mm D 60 mm H

(8.0 in W 2.8 in D 2.4 in H) 200 mm W 100 mm D 200 mm H

(8.0 in W 4.0 in D 8.0 in H) 200 mm W 100 mm D 200 mm H

(8.0 in W 4.0 in D 8.0 in H) 100 mm W 25 mm D 20 mm H

(4.0 in W 1.0 in D 0.8 in H) 105 mm W 105 mm D 25 mm H

(4.2 in W 4.2 in D 1.0 in H) 237 mm H 31 mm dia (head) 6 mm dia (shaft)

(9.5 in H 1.2 in dia (head) 0.3 in dia

(shaft)) 160 mm W 80 mm D 30 mm H

(6.4 in W 3.2 in D 1.2 in H) 160 mm W 80 mm D 30 mm H

(6.4 in W 3.2 in D 1.2 in H) 450 mm W 30 mm D 650 mm H

(18.0 in W 1.2 in D 26.0 in H) 420 mm W 25 mm D 650 mm H

(16.8 in W 1.0 in D 26.0 in H) 400 mm W 20 mm D 600 mm H

(16.0 in W 0.8 in D 24.0 in H) Weight 0.3 kg (0.7 lb) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) 0.5 kg (1.1 lb) 0.7 kg (1.5 lb) 3.2 kg (7.1 lb) 2.7 kg (6.0 lb) 0.2 kg (0.4 lb) 0.6 kg (1.4 lb) 0.1 kg (0.2 lb) 0.2 kg (0.4 lb) 0.1 kg (0.2 lb) 0.5 kg (1.1 lb) 0.4 kg (0.9 lb) 4.3 kg (9.5 lb) 3.4 kg (7.5 lb) 1.4 kg (3.1 lb) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 325 Specifications This page has been left blank intentionally. 326 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual

 

 

Appendix A Hot key examples CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Example 1: selecting a specific channel (328) Example 2: displaying an information screen (329) Example 3: displaying and/or changing a setting in the Control List (330) Example 4: changing a value to the next value in a list (331) Example 5: opening a list at the marker entry (332) Example 6: making a call using a specific entry in the Address List (333) Example 7: setting up one-touch discreet operation (334) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 327 Hot key examples Example 1: selecting a specific channel This example shows you how to create a macro to select a specific channel in the Channel List. When you run this macro, the transceiver:

opens the Channel List selects the channel specified in the macro briefly displays the new channel returns you to the screen you were on To create this macro:

1 Press VIEW until the channel screen is displayed. 1 Scroll to the channel you want the macro to select. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Create macro, then press to open the List Manager. The transceiver asks you to select the action you want the macro to perform. 1 Scroll to Go to this chan, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the timing with which the macro operates. 1 Scroll to Before pause, then press

. NOTE When you use a macro to select a channel the channel is always selected before the channel screen is displayed. You can therefore select Before pause or After pause. The end result is the same. 1 Press the key to which you want to assign the new macro. 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the new macro, then press

. 1 Type a name for the macro, then press

. The macro is created and assigned to the key, and the List Manager remains open. 328 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Hot key examples Example 2: displaying an information screen The time and LQA screens are information screens. You can view the information on these screens but you cannot change it. This example shows you how to create a macro to display the time screen in the Control List. When you run this macro, the transceiver:

goes to the time screen entry in the Control List briefly displays the current time and date returns you to the screen you were on To create this macro:

1 Log into admin level (for help see page 110, Logging into admin level from user until Main Menu is displayed. level). 1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Time Screen, then press 1 Hold to open the List Manager. 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Create macro, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the timing with which the macro operates. 1 Scroll to Before pause, then press

. NOTE This macro displays an information screen and does not change any values, so you can select Before pause or After pause. The end result is the same. 1 Press the key to which you want to assign the new macro. 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the new macro, then press

. 1 Type a name for the macro, then press

. The macro is created and assigned to the key, and the List Manager remains open. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 329 Hot key examples Example 3: displaying and/or changing a setting in the Control List This example shows you how to create a macro to display and/or change a setting in the Control List. You can then change the value or press When you run this macro, the transceiver:

waits for you to act goes to the Cfg Alert Tones entry in the Control List displays the current value to leave it as it is. To create this macro:

1 Log into admin level (for help see page 110, Logging into admin level from user until Main Menu is displayed. level). 1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press 1 Scroll to Cfg Alert Tones, then hold

. A question mark is displayed at the end of the top line to indicate that you can now change the value. to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Create macro, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the action you want the macro to perform. 1 Scroll to Display value, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the timing with which the macro operates. 1 Scroll to Waits, then press 1 Press the key to which you want to assign the new macro. 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the new

. macro, then press

. 1 Type a name for the macro, then press

. The macro is created and assigned to the key, and the List Manager remains open. 330 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Hot key examples Example 4: changing a value to the next value in a list For many entries in the Control List, changing a value involves selecting a value from a short list of possible values. For example, when you change the brightness of the screen you can select bright, medium or dark. This example shows you how to create a macro to change the current value to the next value in one of these entries, whatever that value may be. For entries where the values are on and off, creating a macro to go to the next value means you can toggle the entry on and off using the same macro. For other entries it means you go to the next value each time you use the macro. This example shows you how to create a macro to switch Help Mode on or off. When you run this macro, the transceiver:

The timing with which this macro operates is immediate. This means that the macro operates in the background and simply displays the result (that is, Help Mode is switched on or off). goes to the Help Mode entry in the Control List changes the value to the next value in the list (that is, from On to Off, or Off to On) saves the value To create this macro:

1 Log into admin level (for help see page 110, Logging into admin level from user until Main Menu is displayed. level). 1 Press 1 Scroll to Control, then press

. 1 Scroll to Help Mode, then hold

. A question mark is displayed at the end of the top line to indicate that you can now change the value. to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Create macro, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the action you want the macro to perform. 1 Scroll to Set next value, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the timing with which the macro operates. 1 Scroll to Immediately, then press

. If you want to briefly view the value to which the setting is changing, select Before pause. 1 Press the key to which you want to assign the new macro. 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the new macro, then press

. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 331 Hot key examples 1 Type a name for the macro, then press

. The macro is created and assigned to the key, and the List Manager remains open. Example 5: opening a list at the marker entry This example shows you how to create a macro to open a list at the entry on which a marker has been set. When you run this macro, the transceiver:

waits for you to act opens the list goes to the entry on which the marker has been set To create this macro:

1 Set a marker on the entry to which you want the macro to go (see page 94, Setting a marker). If you have already set the marker, open the list in which the entry is stored. to open the List Manager. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Create macro, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the action you want the macro to perform. 1 Scroll to Go to marker, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the timing with which the macro operates. 1 Scroll to Waits, then press 1 Press the key to which you want to assign the new macro. 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the new

. macro, then press

. 1 Type a name for the macro, then press

. The macro is created and assigned to the key, and the List Manager remains open. 332 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Hot key examples Example 6: making a call using a specific entry in the Address List opens the Address List goes to the entry specified in the macro begins a call to the address specified in the entry This example shows you how to create a macro to make a call using a specific entry in the Address List. When you run this macro, the transceiver:

The timing with which this macro operates is Immediately. This means that the macro begins the call without displaying the Address List entry first. The transceiver may, however, prompt you for information about the call depending on the details supplied in the entry. To create this macro:

1 Press VIEW until the Address List is displayed. 1 Scroll to the entry you want the macro to call. 1 Hold 1 Scroll to Macros..., then press

. 1 Scroll to Create macro, then press to open the List Manager. The transceiver asks you to select the action you want the macro to perform. 1 Scroll to Go to this entry, then press

. The transceiver asks you to select the timing with which the macro operates. 1 Scroll to Immediately, then press 1 Press the key to which you want to assign the new macro. 1 Scroll to the macro that you want to have in the list immediately after the new

. macro, then press

. 1 Type a name for the macro, then press

. The macro is created and assigned to the key, and the List Manager remains open. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 333 Hot key examples Example 7: setting up one-touch discreet operation This example shows you how to create a macro that will put your transceiver into discreet operation. When you run this macro, the transceiver switches off:

This macro is created by joining four macros together. the internal speaker alert tones backlighting key beeps To create this macro:

1 Log into admin level (for help see page 110, Logging into admin level from user level). 1 Create separate macros to perform the following tasks:

Control List entry Cfg Speaker Internal Cfg Alert Tones Screen Brightness (

Key Beeps Selected setting Macro action Disabled Set this value Set this value Disabled Set this value Set this value

+ 0) Dark Off Assign to Name Timing Speaker Immediately Unassigned Immediately Unassigned Tones Immediately Unassigned Dark Immediately Unassigned Beeps NOTE For help see page 330, Example 3: displaying and/or changing a setting in the Control List. 1 Join the macros together, selecting Speaker as the first macro each time (see page 247, Joining macros). 1 Rename the Speaker macro to Discreet. 1 Delete the Tones, Dark and Beeps macros. NOTE The internal speaker is switched on again by holding MUTE, and the screen backlighting is changed by pressing restore key beeps and alert tones, you should create new macros that enable the user to switch on these settings (see page 330, Example 3:

displaying and/or changing a setting in the Control List). If the user needs to 334 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Appendix B Get Status calls CODAN When you make a Get Status call you need to specify whether you want to retrieve diagnostic or configuration information from the remote station (see Table 46 and Table 47). You do this by entering the number 1 or 2 in the Message setting when prompted by the transceiver. You can also pre-type and store these numbers in the Messages entry in the Control List (see page 225, Messages entry), or create an entry for the call in the Address List (see page 154, Programming the Address List). Diagnostic information To obtain diagnostic information, enter 1 as the message for the Get Status call. Transceivers from other vendors may obtain diagnostic information from a 2110 SSB Transceiver by sending an AMD message containing #CMD 1 in a Plain network. Table 46: Diagnostic information from a Get Status call made to a Codan transceiver Information received RXnn.n TXnn.n S1=nnn S2=nnn SWRn.n Pnnn Tnn Description Battery voltage in receive Battery voltage in transmit Signal strength of received call ( EMF) Signal strength 2 seconds after call was received ( EMF) SWR of the antenna Power output of the transmitter (W) Temperature (C) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 335 Get Status calls Configuration information To obtain configuration information from a Codan transceiver, enter 2 as the message for the Get Status call. Table 47: Configuration information from a Get Status call made to a Codan transceiver Information received SR VR VR Mobile 2110 RF: n.nn JB:n.nn NRI:n.nn 2110:n.nn Description Product type as held in the Customer Radio entry in the Control List Product name as held in the Devices entry in the Control List, followed by the firmware version number for the device 336 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Appendix C Forgotten passwords CODAN If you have forgotten your user password, contact Codan to obtain a code to erase your password. You will be asked to quote the ESN of the transceiver unit. To obtain the required ESN and/or enter the code provided by Codan:

1 Switch on the transceiver then wait until you are prompted to enter a password. 1 Hold to display the Option code screen. The ESN is displayed on the bottom line of the screen. 1 Do one of the following:

To exit this screen and return to the Enter password screen, hold To enter the code to erase your password, start typing. The transceiver automatically enters dashes in the appropriate places. When you have entered

. The password is erased and the home screen is displayed. the code, press

. NOTE NOTE The ESN is displayed in a similar manner during Admin login. To enter a new password, use the Password User or Password Admin entry in the Control List (for help see page 96, Changing a setting in the Control List). 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 337 Forgotten passwords This page has been left blank intentionally. 338 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Appendix D Limiting user access CODAN This section contains the following topics:

Introduction (340) Syntax for the Message 10 entry (340) Activating configuration commands in the Message 10 entry (341) Restricting access to the List Manager (341) Restricting access to admin level (342) Restricting access to call types (342) Enabling the automatic removal of the incoming call pop-up (343) Restricting access to holding CALL (343) Restricting access to Voice Encryptor features (344) 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 339 Limiting user access Introduction You can limit access by users to certain areas in the 2110 SSB Transceivers user interface by entering special configuration commands in the Message 10 entry in the Control List. These commands may prevent accidental changes to setup information, and enable you to hide information on a need to know basis. You can:

restrict access to the List Manager in total, or restrict access to certain functions

(category LM) (see page 341, Restricting access to the List Manager) restrict access to the admin level (category BAL) (see page 342, Restricting access to admin level) restrict the call types that can be used to make a call unless they have already been used in an address entry (category BCT) (see page 342, Restricting access to call types) enable the automatic removal of an incoming call pop-up (category TIC) (see page 343, Enabling the automatic removal of the incoming call pop-up) restrict access to holding CALL and hence preventing changes to calling information (category HCD) (see page 343, Restricting access to holding CALL) restrict access to the secure PIN function with the Voice Encryptor feature (category BSP) (see page 344, Restricting access to Voice Encryptor features) restrict access to the Secure Standby Mode (category SSD) (see page 344, Restricting access to Voice Encryptor features)

NOTE These configuration commands operate at the user level. If you are logged into admin level you will have full access to the above functions, regardless of the setting in the Message 10 entry. Syntax for the Message 10 entry The following rules apply to configuration commands used in the Message 10 entry in the Control List:

Commands must begin with the characters #$! followed by a space, for example,

#$! BSP. If you do not use these characters, the transceiver will read any characters in the entry as a standard message. Category commands must be followed by a hyphen, then the specific commands

(see Table 48 and Table 49), separated by commas. Each category and corresponding commands are separated by a space, for example:

LM-FV,UL BCT-M,GP

340 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Limiting user access Activating configuration commands in the Message 10 entry After entering a configuration command in the Message 10 entry, you must switch your transceiver off then on again. Restricting access to the List Manager A configuration command for restricting access to the List Manager begins with

#$! LM-. Follow this command with the codes that you want to use from Table 48. Table 48: Codes for restricting access to the List Manager Use this code... Ad

(Advanced) AO

(Administration Only) Ent

(Entries) FV

(Full View) Grp

(Group) HP

(Home Page) Itm

(Item) Mcr

(Macro) SM

(Set Marker) SS

(Show Settings) UH

(User Hide) UL

(User Lock) ULO

(User Locks Off) BIT

(Built-in Test) If you want to... Prevent access to the Advanced... features in the List Manager via the Quick Start menu. Prevent access to the List Manager. Prevent creating, renaming, copying, editing and deleting of entries unless it is via the Quick Start menu. Prevent access to full view (see page 112, Displaying full and normal view). Prevent toggling between grouped and ungrouped entries (see page 103, Grouping and ungrouping entries). Prevent changing the home screen (see page 95, Setting the home screen). Prevent adding and deleting of items unless it is via the Quick Start menu. Prevent use of macros. Prevent changing the marker on any list (see page 94, Setting a marker). Prevent toggling between hiding and showing settings for an entry (see page 101, Hiding and showing settings). Prevent changing the hide or show status of an entry at user level (see page 113, Hiding and showing information). Prevent changing the locked or unlocked status of an entry at user level (see page 115, Locking and unlocking information). Prevent toggling between Locks off and Locks on at user level (see page 116, Switching locks off or on at user level). Prevent access to built-in tests. 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 341 Limiting user access For example, if you want to restrict access to all features in the List Manager, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! LM-AO If you want to restrict access to full view and ungrouping entries that are already grouped, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! LM-FV,Grp Restricting access to admin level If you want to prevent entry to admin level, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! BAL CAUTION This command can only be removed from the Message 10 entry using NSP. Restricting access to call types A configuration command for restricting access to call types begins with #$! BCT-. Follow this command with the codes that you want to use from Table 49. Table 49: Codes for restricting access to call types Use this code... AL AN CT E GP GRP GS M NE P S SP WC If you want to restrict access to this call type... ALL ANY Channel Test Emergency Get Position Group Selective Get Status Message NET Phone Selective Send Position Wildcard 342 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Limiting user access For example, if you want to restrict access to using Message and Get Position call types, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! BCT-M,GP Enabling the automatic removal of the incoming call pop-up A pop-up message is displayed when you receive an incoming call. This message usually remains on the display until you acknowledge it by pressing

. When you use the Timeout Incoming Call (TIC) configuration command, the incoming call pop-up is removed after 30 seconds. If you want to automatically remove all incoming call pop-ups after 30 seconds, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! TIC or Restricting access to holding CALL When you hold CALL, you gain access to changing call details as you make a call. If you want to prevent the user from having access to networks and channels, use the Hold Call Disable configuration command. For example, if you want to disable the hold CALL function, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! HCD 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual 343 Limiting user access Restricting access to Voice Encryptor features You can restrict access to two features of the Voice Encryptor. A configuration command for restricting access to these features begins with #$! . Follow this command with the codes that you want to use from Table 50. Table 50: Codes for restricting access to Voice Encryptor features Use this code BSP

(Block Secure PIN) SSD

(Secure Standby Disable) If you want to... Prevent access to the Secure PIN function when the user holds SEC. The function of holding SEC enters Secure Mode in the default setting. Prevent access to Secure Standby Mode (see page 83, Using the voice encryptor in Standby Mode). If you want to disable the Secure PIN function, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! BSP If you want to disable the Secure Standby Mode, enter the following into the Message 10 entry:

#$! SSD 344 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Index Numerics 19-way GPIO connector pinouts 304 A accessories for 2110 SSB Transceiver 321 specifications 325 address 142, 147 Address List 145 address 147 call type 147 calling from 181 channel/mode 149 copying entries 155 creating entries 154 deleting entries 155 editing entries 155 message 148 network 149 overview 146 phone link 148 programming 154 renaming entries 155 setting up the emergency key 150 settings 147 address syntax ALL 159 ANY 160 Group Selective 161 NET 162 Wildcard 163 admin level 108 logging in 110 ALE accept ALL call 209 accept ANY Call 209 accept Wildcard Call 209 AMD position 209 BER 200, 210 call threshold 200, 210 call weighting 200, 211 Golay 201, 211 hangup ALL call 211 LQA average 201, 211 LQA clear 201, 212 LQA decay 201, 212 LQA exchange 201, 213 LQA mapping 201, 213 retries 201, 213 selective msg 213 CODAN silent mode 201, 213 site manager 201, 214 soundings 214 ALE address syntaxes summary 164 ALE call options 256 ALE calls 169 alerts and call types 190 ALL calls 159 alternative charger requirements 35 Amateur Mode 231, 235 AMD message 171 CICS error reporting 257 error reporting 192 antenna automatic tuning 76 broadband dipole 39 end-fed broadband 39 long wire and adaptor 38 manual tuning 77 selecting 37 whip 37 wire dipole 40 antenna tuning manual 207 ANY calls 160 auto-dim 208 automatic tuning 76 B battery connector pinouts battery pack 307 transceiver unit 306 battery discharge regime 35 battery storage 19 battery voltage 77 bearing 223 best channel selecting 178 brightness screen 74, 208 C call detect time 123 call memory, see Calls In Log 192 call sign 25 call systems ALE/CALM 24 Codan Selcall 24 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Index-1 Index call types 147 Channel Test 166, 174 Emergency 167 Get Position 167 Get Status 168, 335 Message 168 overview 165 Phone 169, 179, 182 Selective 169 Send Position 170 calling methods 181 calls and alerts 190 from Address List 181 from Last Heard Log 182 from Phone Link List 179, 182 making 173 new 179, 181 receiving 190 repeating 179, 182 returning 179, 181 to groups of stations in a Codan Selcall network 170 using emergency key 150, 181 Calls In Log 179, 181, 192 Calls Out Log 179, 182, 187 chain calls 152 changing text changing between alpha and numerical characters 54 deleting text 55 entering special characters in messages and names 55 entering text 53 entering text in call addresses 56 inserting text 54 moving the cursor 54 saving text changes 56 channel names 118 screen 48 Channel List 117 channel names 118 frequencies 118 modes 118 programming 119 settings 118 Channel Test calls 166, 174 channel/mode 142, 149 in Network List 126 channels and option TxD 118 and option TxP 118 automatic selection 24 copying 120 creating 119 definition 23 deleting 120 editing 120 manual selection 51 overview 118 renaming 120 CICS address in commands 254 ALE call options 256 AMD message error reporting 257 and 2110 terms 259 command prompt 253 commands 260 alebeacon 261 alecall 262 aletelcall 263 amd 264 beacon 264 call 265 chan 266 echo 266 freq 267 gpsbeacon 268 gpsposition 269 hangup 269 help 270 lbt 270 link 270 lock 271 lqa 272 mode 273 pagecall 274 prompt 275 ptt 276 scan 277 secure 278 selbeacon 279 selcall 280 selfid 280 set 281 sideband 282 sound 283 statusack 284 statuscall 284 statustime 285 telcall 286 ver 286 connecting a computer to a transceiver 258 control commands 253 entering commands 252 error messages 295 message length 257 outputs 257 overview 252 response messages 291 responses 257 sending and receiving calls 257 setting up 258 Index-2 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Index a computer 258 a transceiver 258 special characters 253 structuring commands 252 summary of command syntax 287 using 252 clarifier 78, 205 clock, see time and date 67 compliance electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices 16 earth symbol 17 electrical safety 16 electromagnetic compatibility 16 protection of the radio spectrum 15 European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 15 Computer Interface Command Set, see CICS 252 connectors 301 19-way GPIO 304 battery (battery pack) 307 battery (transceiver unit) 306 handset 303 contrast screen 74, 208 Control List 199 user access 75 viewing 200 Corporate key setting 84 Corporate Mode D date and time 208 switching to Global Mode 82 adjusting local time 68 displaying time screen 69 setting 67 setting time zone offset 67 detection of station activity 196 direct wave 22 discharge regime battery 35 distance 223 dwell time, see call detect time 123 E Easitalk 79 editing a screen 53 electromagnetic compatibility and safety notices compliance earth symbol 17 electrical safety 16 electromagnetic compatibility 16 protection of the radio spectrum 15 electronic serial number 337 Emergency calls 167 emergency key 150, 181 encryption, see voice encryptor 80 entries grouping and ungrouping 103 error messages, see system messages 309 error reporting AMD message 192 CICS AMD message 257 compliance 15 external power supply 51 F factory level 108 FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM option 24 finding European Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive depending on distance and time of day 23 a value 65 a word 64 items in a list 64 free tune 205, 231 frequencies 118 frequency selection front panel keys 28 screen 47 full view 109, 112 G Get Position calls 167 Get Status calls 168, 335 Global Mode switching to Corporate Mode 82 GPS calls see Get Position calls 167 see Send Position calls 170 GPS screen 206, 222 ground wave 22 group calls using a Codan Selcall network 170 Group Selective calls 161 grouping entries 103 H handset connector pinouts 303 Help Mode 206 HF radio transmission about 22 hiding information 113 settings 101 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Index-3 Index home screen displaying 95 setting 95 hot keys 237 creating 241 examples 327 full-time and part-time 238 using 75 I incoming call screen 191 K Keypad List 227 L Last Heard Log 196 making a call 197 making a call from the log 179 LBT Mode 173, 203 limiting user access 339 List Manager 91 entries 92 using 91 lists changing 97 copying an entry 99 creating an entry 97 deleting an entry 100 editing an entry 99 renaming an entry 98 selecting 90 locking information 115 locks off/on feature 116 low current 203 lower-case characters entering 54 LQA information LQA screen 224 M macros 237 adding to 248 assigning several to one key 239 automating several tasks 239 copying 244 creating 241 deleting 246 examples 327 ideas for creating 240 joining 247 moving 245 performing two tasks 247 replacing using Channel Test call 175 renaming 246 special 249 storing 240 troubleshooting 239 Main Menu 88 update 208 making a call from the Last Heard Log 197 making calls 173 manual sounding 177 manual tuning 77 markers 94 mathematical symbols entering 55 Message 10 entry activating 341 removing incoming call pop-up automatically 343 restricting access to admin level 342 restricting access to call types 342 restricting access to Hold Call function 343 restricting access to List Manager 341 restricting access to Voice Encryptor features 344 syntax 340 Message calls 168 messages 148 pre-typed 207, 225 system 309 microphone using 63 MIL-STD-188-141B ALE option 24 Mode List 229 modes 23, 51, 118, 207, 229 mute 207 muting the transceiver 61 setting the mute type 61 N NET calls 162 NET List 131 address 134 incoming calls 135 link 135 LQA exchange 137 member address 134 name 134 network 134 outgoing calls 135 programming 138 response 136 slot width 137 tune time 136 viewing 134 NETs copying 139 creating 138 deleting 139 editing 139 Index-4 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual overview 132 renaming 139 Network List 121 call detect time 123 call systems 123 channel/mode 126 network name 123 nominal preamble 125 privacy mode 124 privacy password 125 programming 128 scanning 123 settings 123, 134 sounding interval 124 viewing 123 networks 24, 142, 149 copying 129 creating 128 deleting 129 editing 129 overview 122 renaming 129 special names 127 new calls making 179, 181 noise reduction, see Easitalk 79 nominal preamble 125 normal view 109, 112 numbers entering 54 O option FED-STD-1045 ALE/CALM 24 MIL-STD-188-141B ALE 24 TxD 118 TxP 118 option codes for 2110 SSB Transceiver 321 entering 337 options P password admin 207 entering 46 forgotten 337 user 207 Phone calls 142, 169, 179, 182 Phone Link List 141 address 142 calling from 179, 182 channel/mode 142 network 142 programming 143 Index settings 142 viewing 142 phone links 148 copying 144 creating 143 deleting 144 editing 144 overview 142 renaming 143 phonetic alphabet 26 pin connections 19-way GPIO connector 304 battery connector (battery pack) 307 battery connector (transceiver unit) 306 handset connector 303 power off 46, 207 on 46 power preference 49, 203 preamble, see nominal preamble 125 privacy mode 124 password 125 punctuation marks entering 55 Q Quick Start 57 adding/editing a channel 58 adding/editing an entry in the Address List or Call Book 59 deleting an entry 60 opening and closing 57 setting the time and date 59 setting up a scan list 58 setting your station self address 59 R receiving calls 190 recognised variables 172, 256 removing incoming call pop-up automatically 343 repeating a call 189 repeating calls 179, 182 restricting access to admin level 342 to call types 342 to Hold Call function 343 to List Manager 341 to Voice Encryptor features 344 restricting information 108 returning a call 194 returning calls 179, 181 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Index-5 Index S safety radiation 16 scan rate, see call detect time 123 scanning 207 channels 24, 62 pausing 62 scrambler, see voice encryptor 80 screen auto-dim 208 brightness 74, 208 contrast 74, 208 editable 52 editing 53 front panel 47 scroll rate 208 scroll step 208 secure index 208 key 208 mode 208 selcalls, see Selective calls 169 selecting a channel 51 an item in a list 29 selecting the best channel 178 Selective calls 169 self address deleting 73 editing 72 entering 69 self ID, see self address 69 Send Position calls 170 serial numbers electronic 337 settings changing in the Control List 96 hiding and showing 101 showing information 113 settings 101 sky wave 22 sounding interval 124 manual 177 special network names 127 specifications 323 accessories 325 station self address storage setting 69 battery 19 SWR 77 symbols entering 55 syntax for Message 10 entry 340 system messages 309 T testing installation 42 on-air 43 VSWR 42 testing the quality of a channel 174 text entering and editing 52 time and date 208 adjusting local time 68 displaying time screen 69 setting 67 setting time zone offset 67 time screen 208 displaying 69 time zone offset 67, 208 transceiver components 27 troubleshooting 41 macros 239 tuning automatic 76 manual 77, 207 U ungrouping entries 103 unlocking information 115 upper-case characters entering 54 user access limiting 339 user access to the Control List 75 user level 108 UTC offset 67 V variable expansion 172, 256 Voice calls making 180 voice encryptor 80 advanced security use 85 basic security use 84 Corporate key setting 84 switching between Global and Corporate Modes 82 switching off 81 using 80 using in Standby Mode 83 voltage standing wave ratio 42 volume audio 201 Index-6 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Index W wave direct 22 ground 22 sky 22 welcome screen 208 text 208 Wildcard calls 163 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual Index-7 Index This page has been left blank intentionally. Index-8 2110 SSB Transceiver Reference Manual www.codan.com.au Head Office Codan Limited ABN 77 007 590 605 81 Graves Street Newton SA 5074 AUSTRALIA Telephone +61 8 8305 0311 Facsimile +61 8 8305 0411 asiasales@codan.com.au Codan (UK) Ltd Gostrey House Union Road Farnham Surrey GU9 7PT UNITED KINGDOM Telephone +44 1252 717 272 Facsimile +44 1252 717 337 uksales@codan.com.au Codan US, Inc. 8430 Kao Circle Manassas VA 20110 USA Telephone +1 703 361 2721 Facsimile +1 703 361 3812 ussales@codan.com.au Codan Limited ABN 77 007 590 605 105 Factory Road Oxley Qld 4075 AUSTRALIA Telephone +61 7 3716 6333 Facsimile +61 7 3716 6350

 

 

CODAN Codan Limited ABN 77 007 590 605 105 Factory Road Oxley Old 4075 Australia Nemko Canada Inc 303 River Road Ottawa, Ontario, Canada GAYA 4 Attn: Director of Certification Authority to Act as Agent On our behalf, | appoint Nemko Canada Inc., 303 River Road, RR#5, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, K1V 1H2, (Name and address). to act as our agent in the preparation of this application for equipment certification. | certify that submitted documents properly describe the device or system for which equipment certification is sought. | also certify Communications rll A Neel will have affi xed to it a label identical to that hr it =T@ eo lailialgeryse 1 2 hi -1alsa itieara For instances where our authorized agent signs the application for certification on our behalf, | acknowledge that all responsibility for complying with the terms and conditions for certification, as specified by Nemko Canada Ine, still resides with Codan Limited, 105

\ (applicant name and adaress). OFT CXe] 23 EN of November 20 04 Agency agreement expiration date: | 23 November 2005 Title: Compliance Manager On behalf of : Codan Limited _ Telephone: _+61 7 3716 6322 _ em sks AyeN{

Quality Endorsed 1SO 9001 Lic1817 Pane Tel: +61 (0)7 3716 6333 Fax: +61 (0)7 3716 6350 www.codan.com.au

 

 

DATE : 11 March 2005 Equipment Authorization Division Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 FCC ID: DYY2110 Product Name: 2110 SSB Transceiver Request for Confidentiality Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the commissions rules, we hereby request that the following documents be held confidential on behalf of Codan Limited:

Schematics, theory of operation and block diagrams (as previously requested) In addition Codan Limited request confidentiality for the following document(s):

Technical Service Manual (contains schematics and is not a guide for the user) These materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information and are not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of this information might be harmful to the company and provide unjustified benefits to our competitors. Dated this By:

Day of March 2005 11 Rune Berberg Signature Title: Compliance Manager On behalf of :

Telephone: +61 7 3716 6322 Codan Limited Printed Rev- 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DC Voltages and Currents

- The dc voltages applied to and dc currents into the several elements of the final radio frequency amplifying device for normal operation over the power range:

DC voltages/currents into the power amplifying elements are as follows (all 25W PEP):

Gain control: 12V/20mA Driver: 12V/30mA Output: 12V/6A peak

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tune-up procedure

- Tune-up procedure over the power range, or at specific operating power levels. By tune up procedure, we assume you mean from the customers perspective -

filter selection for the 50 Ohm port is automatic. Antenna tuning for the antenna stud is automatic, but can be manually initiated by pressing the

"TUNE" button (button 1), then pressing PTT. Selection of the output ports is automatic, testing the 50 Ohm port first. Operation without a load (neither 50 Ohm nor antenna) should be avoided.